Pro Piping Help Topics

®
Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire™ 2.0
Pro/PIPING™ (Spec-Driven)
Help Topic Collection
Parametric Technology Corporation

Copyright © 2005 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to the
copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that
restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the
right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for
internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable
software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary
notice provided by PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to
any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without
the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without
notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains
valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United
States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to
third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with
written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS
DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary
Advanced Surface Design, Behavioral Modeling, CADDS, Computervision, CounterPart,
Create Collaborate Control, EPD, EPD.Connect, Expert Machinist, Flexible Engineering, GRANITE,
HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine, InPart, MECHANICA, Optegra, Parametric Technology,
Parametric Technology Corporation, PartSpeak, PHOTORENDER, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/E,
Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, Product First,
Product Development Means Business, Product Makes the Company, PTC, the PTC logo, PT/Products,
Shaping Innovation, Simple Powerful Connected, The Way to Product First, and Windchill.
Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary
3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, AutobuildZ, CDRS, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV-DORS,
CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, EDAcompare, EDAconduit, DataDoctor, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III,
Distributed Services Manager, DIVISION, e/ENGINEER, eNC Explorer, Expert Framework,
Expert MoldBase, Expert Toolmaker, FlexPDM, FlexPLM, Harmony, InterComm, InterComm Expert,
InterComm EDAcompare, InterComm EDAconduit, ISSM, KDiP, Knowledge Discipline in Practice,
Knowledge System Driver, ModelCHECK, MoldShop, NC Builder, POLYCAPP, Pro/ANIMATE,
Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COLLABORATE,
Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONCEPT, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER,
Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE,
Pro/FEM-POST, Pro/FICIENCY, Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS, Pro/INTERFACE,
Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View,
Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK, Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NC-POST,
Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM,
Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PIPING,
Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT,
Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link,
Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, ProductView, PTC Precision, Routed Systems Designer, Shrinkwrap,
The Product Development Company, Validation Manager, Wildfire, Windchill DynamicDesignLink,
Windchill PartsLink, Windchill PDMLink, Windchill ProjectLink, and Windchill SupplyLink.
Patents of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary
Registration numbers and issue dates follow. Additionally, equivalent patents may be issued or pending
outside of the United States. Contact PTC for further information.
GB2366639B 13-October-2004 GB2353376 05-November-2003 5,140,321 18-August-1992
GB2363208 25-August-2004 GB2354686 15-October-2003 5,423,023 05-June-1990
(EP/DE/GB)0812447 26-May-2004 6,545,671 B1 08-April-2003 4,310,615 21-December-1998
GB2365567 10-March-2004 GB2354685B 18-June-2003 4,310,614 30-April-1996
(GB)2388003B 21-January-2004 GB2354683B 04-June-2003 4,310,614 22-April-1999
6,665,569 B1 16-December-2003 6,608,623 B1 19-August-2003 5,297,053 22-March-1994
GB2353115 10-December-2003 6,473,673 B1 29-October-2002 5,513,316 30-April-1996
6,625,607 B1 23-September-2003 GB2354683B 04-June-2003 5,689,711 18-November-1997
6,580,428 B1 17-June-2003 6,447,223 B1 10-Sept-2002 5,506,950 09-April-1996
GB2354684B 02-July-2003 6,308,144 23-October-2001 5,428,772 27-June-1995
GB2384125 15-October-2003 5,680,523 21-October-1997 5,850,535 15-December-1998
GB2354096 12-November-2003 5,838,331 17-November-1998 5,557,176 09-November-1996
GB2354924 24-September-2003 4,956,771 11-September-1990 5,561,747 01-October-1996
6,608,623 B1 19-August-2003 5,058,000 15-October-1991 (EP)0240557 02-October-1986
Third-Party Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, Distiller, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Advanced ClusterProven, ClusterProven, and the ClusterProven design are trademarks or registered
trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries
and are used under license. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation
of this software product. AIX is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation. Allegro, Cadence, and
Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence Design Systems, Inc. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, and Panther
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor are
registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. CADAM
and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes. COACH is a trademark of CADTRAIN,
Inc. CYA, iArchive, HOTbackup, and Virtual StandBy are trademarks or registered trademarks of CYA
Technologies, Inc. DOORS is a registered trademark of Telelogic AB. FLEXlm is a trademark of
Macrovision Corporation. Geomagic is a registered trademark of Raindrop Geomagic, Inc. EVERSYNC,
GROOVE, GROOVEFEST, GROOVE.NET, GROOVE NETWORKS, iGROOVE, PEERWARE, and the
interlocking circles logo are trademarks of Groove Networks, Inc. Helix is a trademark of
Microcadam, Inc. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft America, Inc. HP-UX is a registered trademark
of Hewlett-Packard Company. I-DEAS, Metaphase, Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, TeamCenter,
UG-NX, and Unigraphics are trademarks or registered trademarks of UGS Corp. InstallShield is a
registered trademark and service mark of InstallShield Software Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. IRIX is a registered
trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. I-Run and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of Alias Ltd. LINUX
is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. MainWin and Mainsoft are trademarks of Mainsoft
Corporation. MatrixOne is a trademark of MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphics and Board Station are
registered trademarks and 3D Design, AMPLE, and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor
Graphics Corporation. MEDUSA and STHENO are trademarks of CAD Schroer GmbH. Microsoft,
Microsoft Project, Windows, the Windows logo, Windows NT, Windows XP, Visual Basic, and the
Visual Basic logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. Moldflow is a registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. Netscape and the Netscape N
and Ship's Wheel logos are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S.
and other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. OrbixWeb is a registered
trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. RAND
is a trademark of RAND Worldwide. Rational Rose is a registered trademark of Rational Software
Corporation. RetrievalWare is a registered trademark of Convera Corporation. RosettaNet is a
trademark and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet, a nonprofit
organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. SolidWorks is a registered
trademark of SolidWorks Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in other
countries. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun
Microsystems, Inc. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java
based marks, and “The Network is the Computer” are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. 3Dconnexion is a registered trademark
of Logitech International S.A. TIBCO is a registered trademark and TIBCO ActiveEnterprise,
TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous, TIBCO TurboXML, and
TIBCO BusinessWorks are the trademarks or registered trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in the
United States and other countries. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications, Inc.
Third-Party Technology Information
Certain PTC software products contain licensed third-party technology:
Rational Rose 2000E is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation.
RetrievalWare is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation.
VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade
secret information belonging to VKI.
HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by,
Tech Soft America, Inc.
I-Run and ISOGEN are copyrighted software of Alias Ltd.
Xdriver is copyrighted software of 3Dconnexion, Inc, a Logitech International S.A. company.
G-POST is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of Intercim.
VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech.
Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology.
MainWin Dedicated Libraries are copyrighted software of Mainsoft Corporation.
DFORMD.DLL is copyrighted software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be
distributed.
LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork Design 1990–2001.
Visual Basic for Applications and Internet Explorer is copyrighted software of Microsoft Corporation.
Parasolid is © UGS Corp.
TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of Technomatix
Technologies Ltd.
TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous,
TIBCO TurboXML, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are provided by TIBCO Software Inc.
Technology "Powered by Groove" is provided by Groove Networks, Inc.
Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebEx Communications, Inc.
Oracle 8i run-time, Oracle 9i run-time, and Oracle 10g run-time are Copyright © 2002–2004 Oracle
Corporation. Oracle programs provided herein are subject to a restricted use license and can only be
used in conjunction with the PTC software they are provided with.
Adobe Acrobat Reader and Adobe Distiller are copyrighted software of Adobe Systems Inc. and are
subject to the Adobe End-User License Agreement as provided by Adobe with those products.
METIS, developed by George Karypis and Vipin Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can be
researched at http://www.cs.umn.edu/~karypis/metis. METIS is © 1997 Regents of the University of
Minnesota.
Windchill Info*Engine Server contains IBM XML Parser for Java Edition and the IBM Lotus XSL
Edition.
Pop-up calendar components Copyright © 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights
Reserved.
Apache Server, Tomcat, Xalan, Xerces, and Jakarta are technologies developed by, and are copyrighted
software of, the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org) – their use is subject to the terms
and limitations at: http://www.apache.org.
UnZip (© 1990-2001 Info-ZIP, All Rights Reserved) is provided “AS IS” and WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND. For the complete Info-ZIP license see http://www.info-zip.org/doc/LICENSE.
The Java™ Telnet Applet (StatusPeer.java, TelnetIO.java, TelnetWrapper.java,
TimedOutException.java), Copyright © 1996, 97 Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meißner, is redistributed
under the GNU General Public License. This license is from the original copyright holder and the
Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. You may obtain a copy of the source code
for the Applet at http://www.mud.de/se/jta (for a charge of no more than the cost of physically
performing the source distribution), by sending e-mail to leo@mud.de or marcus@mud.de—you are
allowed to choose either distribution method. Said source code is likewise provided under the GNU
General Public License.
GTK+ - The GIMP Toolkit is licensed under the GNU Library General Public License (LGPL). You may
obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.gtk.org, which is likewise provided under the GNU
LGPL.
zlib software Copyright © 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.
OmniORB is distributed under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License and GNU
Library General Public License.
The Java Getopt.jar file, copyright 1987-1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Java Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn (arenn@urbanophile.com), is redistributed under the GNU
LGPL. You may obtain a copy of the source code at
http://www.urbanophile.com/arenn/hacking/download.html. The source code is likewise provided under
the GNU LGPL.
CUP Parser Generator Copyright ©1996-1999 by Scott Hudson, Frank Flannery, C. Scott Ananian–
used by permission. The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard to this
software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the authors
or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages, or any damages
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or
other tortious action arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software.
This product may include software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org): Copyright © 1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. This
product may include cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
ImageMagick software is Copyright © 1999-2005 ImageMagick Studio LLC, a nonprofit organization
dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available. ImageMagick is freely available
without charge and provided pursuant to the following license agreement:
http://www.imagemagick.org/script/license.php.
Gecko and Mozilla components are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 at
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL. Software distributed under the Mozilla Public License (MPL) is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied.
See the MPL for the specific language governing rights and limitations.
Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License Version 1.1 (at
http://www.mozilla.org/NPL). Software distributed under the Netscape Public License (NPL) is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied
(see the NPL for the rights and limitations that are governing different languages). The Original Code
is Mozilla Communicator client code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer of the Original
Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape are Copyright © 1998
Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors: Kazu Yamamoto
(kazu@mozilla.gr.jp), Ryoichi Furukawa (furu@mozilla.gr.jp), Tsukasa Maruyama (mal@mozilla.gr.jp),
Teiji Matsuba (matsuba@dream.com).
iCal4j is Copyright © 2005, Ben Fortuna, All rights reserved. Redistribution and use of iCal4j in source
and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met: (i) Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions,
and the following disclaimer; (ii) Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution; and (iii) Neither the name of Ben Fortuna nor the names of any other
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission. iCal4j SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Software may contain the Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software. This software is Copyright ©
1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Software may contain libpng, Copyright © 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, which is distributed according
to the disclaimer and license (as well as the list of Contributing Authors) at
http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and
Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN’95),
and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements
predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the
restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software
Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT’88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at
FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 081505
Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA
Table of Contents
Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) ..................................................................... 1
Using Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) ......................................................... 1
About Pro/PIPING and Piping Systems ......................................................... 1
Tailoring the Pro/PIPING Working Environment........................................... 1
About Pro/PIPING Design Modes ................................................................. 2
To Access the Specification-Driven Design Mode............................................ 2
About the Pro/PIPING User Interface (Spec-Driven) ....................................... 3
PIPING Menu (Spec-Driven) ....................................................................... 3
Piping System Tree ................................................................................... 4
About the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven).............................................. 4
Viewing the Piping System Tree............................................................. 5
Pipeline Selection and Display Features .................................................. 5
Customize the Pro/PIPING Piping System Tree......................................... 5
To Access the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven) ........................................ 5
To Select Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ............................................................. 6
To Display or Blank Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ............................................... 6
To Display Centerlines or Solids (Spec-Driven) ........................................... 6
To Highlight Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ......................................................... 7
To Reorganize Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ...................................................... 7
To Modify the Column Display (Spec-Driven).............................................. 7
To Display the Piping System Tree from the Active Assembly ....................... 8
To Display the Pipeline Component View.................................................... 8
To Display the Piping Spool View .............................................................. 8
To Create or Delete Pipeline Labels from the Piping System Tree .................. 8
To Display or Hide Pipeline Labels............................................................. 8
To Create or Delete Pipe Solids from the Piping System Tree........................ 9
To Display or Hide Pipe Solids .................................................................. 9
To Create or Delete Pipe Insulation Quilts .................................................. 9
To Display or Hide Pipe Insulation Quilts.................................................... 9
vii
Table of Contents
About Customizing the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven)...........................10
Configuring Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) ................................................10
About Configuring Pro/PIPING (Spec-Driven) ...............................................10
ISOGEN Configuration Options ................................................................10
To Set Pro/PIPING Configuration Options (Spec-Driven) ................................11
Specifying Thumb Wheel Increments ..........................................................11
isogen_attribute_map_file (Spec-Driven) ....................................................12
isogen_endtype_map_file (Spec-Driven) .....................................................12
isogen_mandatory_attr_file (Spec-Driven) ..................................................12
isogen_nominal_size_map_file (Spec-Driven) ..............................................13
isogen_output_files_dir (Spec-Driven) ........................................................13
isogen_pcf_filename_format (Spec-Driven) .................................................13
isogen_symbol_map_file (Spec-Driven) ......................................................13
pipe_3D_bend_theor_int_pts (Spec-Driven) ................................................13
pipe_extend_dim_scheme (Spec-Driven) ....................................................14
pipe_solid_centerline (Spec-Driven) ...........................................................14
pipe_solid_label_format (Spec-Driven)........................................................14
pipe_update_pre_20_int_pts (Spec-Driven).................................................14
pipeline_assembly_library_dir (Spec-Driven) ...............................................15
pipeline_assembly_name_format (Spec-Driven) ...........................................15
pipeline_label_format (Spec-Driven)...........................................................15
pipeline_solid_start_part_name (Spec-Driven) .............................................16
pipeline_spool_label_format (Spec-Driven)..................................................16
pipeline_start_assembly_name (Spec-Driven)..............................................16
piping_wildfire_convert (Spec-Driven) ........................................................17
piping_appearance_map_file (Spec-Driven) .................................................17
piping_bolt_nut_select_file (Spec-Driven) ...................................................17
piping_design_method (Spec-Driven) .........................................................17
piping_end_compatibility_file (Spec-Driven) ................................................18
piping_fitt_angle_tolerance (Spec-Driven) ...................................................18
piping_fitt_category_map_file (Spec-Driven) ...............................................18
viii
Table of Contents
piping_fitt_library_dir (Spec-Driven)...........................................................18
piping_insulation_dir_file (Spec-Driven) ......................................................18
piping_joint_fitting_clearance (Spec-Driven)................................................19
piping_joint_fitting_offset (Spec-Driven) .....................................................19
piping_manufacture_dir_file (Spec-Driven) ..................................................19
piping_material_file (Spec-Driven) .............................................................19
piping_mcat_dir (Spec-Driven) ..................................................................19
piping_mcat_dir_file (Spec-Driven) ............................................................20
piping_min_bolting_clearance (Spec-Driven) ...............................................20
piping_project_data_dir (Spec-Driven)........................................................20
piping_schematic_driven...........................................................................20
piping_schematic_xml_dir (Spec-Driven) ....................................................20
piping_spec_dir_file (Spec-Driven) .............................................................21
piping_system_tree_format (Spec-Driven) ..................................................21
piping_thumb_wheel_increment (Spec-Driven) ............................................21
piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc (Spec-Driven) ..............................................22
units_system_dic_file ...............................................................................22
Setting Up Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) .................................................22
About Setting Up Specification-Driven Pro/PIPING ........................................22
Piping Specification Database ....................................................................23
About the Piping Specification Database ...................................................23
How the Piping Specification Database Works .........................................24
Master Catalog Files...............................................................................24
About Master Catalog Files...................................................................24
To Modify Master Catalog Files .............................................................25
Piping Master Catalog Directory File ......................................................26
Example: Piping Master Catalog Directory File ........................................28
Pipe Master Catalog File ......................................................................30
Example: Pipe Master Catalog File ........................................................30
Fitting Master Catalog File....................................................................31
Example: Fitting Master Catalog File......................................................32
ix
Table of Contents
Bolt Nut Selection File .........................................................................34
Example: Bolt Nut Selection File ...........................................................35
Bolt Nut Master Catalog File .................................................................37
Example: Bolt Nut Master Catalog File ...................................................37
Piping Material File..............................................................................38
Example: Piping Material File................................................................39
Pipe Outer Diameter File......................................................................39
Example: Pipe Outer Diameter File........................................................40
Pipe Thickness File..............................................................................41
Example: Pipe Thickness File................................................................41
Pipe Manufacture Directory File ............................................................42
Example: Pipe Manufacture Directory File ..............................................43
Bend File ...........................................................................................43
Example: Bend File .............................................................................44
Bending Spring Back and Elongation File................................................45
Example: Bending Spring Back and Elongation File..................................45
Bend Machine File...............................................................................46
Example: Bend Machine File.................................................................48
Miter File ...........................................................................................48
Example: Miter File .............................................................................49
End Compatibility File..........................................................................50
Example: End Compatibility File............................................................50
Insulation File ....................................................................................50
Example: Insulation File ......................................................................51
Tip: Pipe Insulation Definition...............................................................52
Appearance Map File ...........................................................................53
Combined Size Code File......................................................................53
Example: Combined Size Code File .......................................................54
Tip: Defining Size Codes ......................................................................54
Units System File................................................................................54
Example: Units System File..................................................................55
x
Table of Contents
Project Data Files ..................................................................................56
About Project Data Files ......................................................................56
About Specification Directory Files ........................................................57
Example: Specification Directory File .....................................................59
To Create a Specification Directory File..................................................59
About Auto-Selection Files ...................................................................60
Example: Auto-Selection File................................................................62
To Create an Auto-Selection File ...........................................................68
To Create an Auto-Selection Pipe Record ...............................................68
To Create an Auto-Selection Fitting Record ............................................70
To Create an Auto-Selection Assembly Fitting Record ..............................73
Preview Fitting Graphics ......................................................................74
Size Tables ........................................................................................75
Format Keywords ...............................................................................76
About Insulation Directory Files ............................................................78
Example: Insulation Directory File.........................................................79
To Create an Insulation Directory File ....................................................79
To Modify Project Data Files .................................................................80
About the Fitting Category Map File.......................................................81
Example: Fitting Category Map File .......................................................83
To Map an Icon File.............................................................................83
Fitting Categories ...............................................................................84
Creating Fitting Category Icons ............................................................84
Fitting Library Files ................................................................................85
About Fitting Library Files ....................................................................85
To Set Up a Library Component ............................................................85
Fitting Library Creation........................................................................85
The ANSI Standard ........................................................................... 106
Update Model ........................................................................................ 117
About Update Model ............................................................................ 117
To Change and Update Colors ............................................................... 118
xi
Table of Contents
To Change and Update Corner Types ..................................................... 119
To Change and Update Material Codes ................................................... 120
To Change and Update Stock Number Formats ........................................ 121
To Change and Update Outside Diameters .............................................. 122
To Change and Update Wall Thickness ................................................... 123
To Change and Update Material Density ................................................. 124
To Change and Update Miter Parameters ................................................ 124
To Change and Update Bend Parameters ................................................ 125
To Change and Update Bend Machine Parameters .................................... 126
Tip: Updating Multiple Changes ............................................................. 126
Design Rule Parameters .......................................................................... 127
About Design Rule Parameters (Spec-Driven).......................................... 127
To Define Design Rule Parameters (Spec-Driven)..................................... 127
Bend Arc Threshold (Spec-Driven) ......................................................... 128
Example: Bend Arc Threshold (Spec-Driven) ........................................... 129
Design Rules Checking ......................................................................... 129
About Design Rules Checking ............................................................. 129
To Check for Design Rule Violations (Spec-Driven) ................................ 129
Displaying Missing Fitting Violations .................................................... 131
Displaying Segment Violations............................................................ 131
Displaying Bend Violations ................................................................. 132
Displaying Branch Violations .............................................................. 132
Checking Design Rules ...................................................................... 133
Bend Tables .......................................................................................... 137
About Bend Tables (Spec-Driven) .......................................................... 137
Bend Table Menu .............................................................................. 138
To Define a Bend Table (Spec-Driven).................................................... 138
Defining Bend Tables (Spec-Driven)....................................................... 138
To Modify a Bend Table (Spec-Driven).................................................... 140
To Delete a Bend Table (Spec-Driven).................................................... 140
To Show a Bend Table (Spec-Driven) ..................................................... 140
xii
Table of Contents
To Read a Bend Table to a Model (Spec-Driven) ...................................... 140
To Write a Bend Table to a File (Spec-Driven) ......................................... 141
Bend Table Data (Spec-Driven) ............................................................. 141
Formula Equations (Spec-Driven) .......................................................... 141
Formula Equation Rules ..................................................................... 142
Conversion Equations (Spec-Driven) ...................................................... 142
Conversion Equation Variables............................................................ 143
Conversion Equation Rules................................................................. 143
To Assign a Bend Table (Spec-Driven).................................................... 143
Set Display............................................................................................ 144
About Setting Display Options ............................................................... 144
To Set Display Options ......................................................................... 144
Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies ........................................................ 144
About Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven) ..................................................... 144
To Make a Piping Assembly Active (Spec-Driven)........................................ 145
About Converting Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven) ..................................... 145
Assembly Conversion Processes ............................................................ 145
To Convert Non Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven)........... 146
To Convert Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven) ................. 148
Converting Piping Assemblies to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Format ................... 148
Specification-Driven Pipelines ..................................................................... 149
About Specification-Driven Pipelines ......................................................... 149
To Create a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ........................................................... 149
To Delete a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ........................................................... 151
To Rename a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ......................................................... 152
Specification-Driven Pipeline Merging........................................................ 152
About Merging Pipelines ....................................................................... 152
To Merge Pipelines............................................................................... 152
Workflow for Creating a New Pipeline by Merging Pipelines........................ 153
Workflow for Merging Pipelines.............................................................. 155
Selecting End Components ................................................................... 155
xiii
Table of Contents
Considerations for Merging Pipelines ...................................................... 156
Specification Break................................................................................. 157
About Specification Break ..................................................................... 157
To Insert a Specification Break .............................................................. 157
Example: Inserting a Specification Break ................................................ 158
Suppressing Pipelines ............................................................................. 158
To Suppress a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)..................................................... 158
To Resume a Suppressed Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ..................................... 159
Piping Layers ......................................................................................... 159
About Piping Layers (Spec-Driven)......................................................... 159
To View Piping Layers (Spec-Driven)...................................................... 159
Specification-Driven Pipeline Routing ........................................................... 159
About Specification-Driven Pipeline Routing ............................................... 159
About Setting a Start Point ...................................................................... 160
Route Pipe Menu .................................................................................... 160
To Set a Start Point ................................................................................ 161
To Route a Pipe in Specification-Driven Mode ............................................. 162
To Route a Pipeline by Referencing a Pipe Edge.......................................... 162
Reference Edges for Routing .................................................................... 164
Associativity Between the Routed Pipeline and the Reference Pipeline ........... 165
Routing Flexible Hoses ............................................................................ 166
About Routing Flexible Hoses in Specification-Driven Piping ...................... 166
To Enable Routing of Flexible Hoses in Specification-Driven Piping ............. 166
To Use the PIPE ENV Menu ................................................................... 167
Specification-Driven Routing with Extend .................................................. 167
About Specification-Driven Routing with Extend....................................... 167
To Extend a Pipeline Using a Csys Reference ........................................... 168
To Extend a Pipeline Using a Csys Axis Reference .................................... 169
To Extend a Pipeline by Referencing an Edge, Axis, or Segment................. 171
To Extend a Pipeline by Referencing a Plane or a Point ............................. 172
Routing with Equipment Nozzles............................................................... 174
xiv
Table of Contents
About Equipment Nozzles ..................................................................... 174
To Route a Pipeline from an Equipment Nozzle ........................................ 174
To Route from a Port ........................................................................... 174
To Route to a Port ............................................................................... 175
Checking Pipe and Port Sizes ................................................................ 175
Specification-Driven Routing with Follow ................................................... 175
About Specification Driven Routing with Follow........................................ 175
To Route a Pipeline with Follow ............................................................. 175
To Redefine Pipe Follow References ....................................................... 176
Branch Routing ...................................................................................... 176
About Branch Routing .......................................................................... 176
To Set a Branch Start Point................................................................... 176
To Route a Branch to a Pipeline ............................................................. 178
About Stub-in Branches........................................................................ 179
Considerations for Creating a Point on a Pipe Segment From Either End...... 179
Points on a Segment .............................................................................. 180
About Adding Points to Existing Routing ................................................. 180
To Add Dynamic Points to Existing Routing ............................................. 180
To Add Static Points to Existing Routing ................................................. 181
Specification-Driven Pipeline Insertion and Modification ............................... 181
About Inserting and Modifying a Pipeline in Another Pipeline ..................... 181
To Insert and Modify a Pipeline in Another Pipeline .................................. 182
Selecting Pipeline Bounds ..................................................................... 183
Selecting the First Segment .................................................................. 185
Propagating the Inserted From Pipeline in the To Pipeline Assembly ........... 185
Specification-Driven Piping Flow Direction ................................................. 186
About Specification-Driven Piping Flow Direction...................................... 186
To Create the Pipeline Model for a Pipeline with Branch Series ................... 187
Default Flow Direction Determination Rules............................................. 187
Example: Default Flow Direction for Pipeline with Branch Series................. 188
To Create the Pipeline Model for a Pipeline with Loop Series ...................... 189
xv
Table of Contents
Example: Default Flow Direction for Pipeline with Loop Series.................... 189
To Display the Flow Direction of a Pipeline .............................................. 190
Displaying or Hiding the Flow Direction of a Pipeline................................. 190
Example: Displaying the Flow Direction of a Specified Pipeline Series ......... 191
Flow Direction Violations ...................................................................... 191
Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments ................................................ 192
About Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments .................................... 192
To Suppress and Resume Pipe Segments................................................ 192
Example: Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments ............................... 193
Specification-Driven Fitting Insertion ........................................................... 195
About Specification-Driven Fitting Insertion ............................................... 195
About Specification Override during Fitting Insertion ................................... 195
To Insert Fittings ................................................................................... 195
Example: Overriding Specifications during Fitting Insertion .......................... 199
About Branch Fittings ............................................................................. 200
Inserting Trimmed Elbows ....................................................................... 200
About Inserting Trimmed Elbows ........................................................... 200
To Convert Elbows to Trimmed Elbows ................................................... 200
To Insert a Trimmed Elbow by Specifying a Selection Name ...................... 201
To Insert a Trimmed Elbow by Selecting the Nearest Standard Elbow ......... 201
To Insert Elbows at all Corners with Trim................................................ 202
To Insert Elbows at All Corners without Trim ........................................... 202
To Insert Elbow Fittings at all Corners by Specifying a Selection Name ....... 203
Inserting Group Fittings .......................................................................... 203
About Inserting Group Fittings .............................................................. 203
To Insert Group Fittings ....................................................................... 204
Example: Overriding Specifications during Group Fitting Insertion.............. 208
Key Fitting.......................................................................................... 208
Group Fitting Rules .............................................................................. 209
End Type Compatibility Checking ........................................................... 209
Modifying Fittings ................................................................................... 209
xvi
Table of Contents
About Modifying Fittings (Spec-Driven)................................................... 209
To Delete Fittings ................................................................................ 210
To Delete Group Fittings....................................................................... 210
Example: Deleting Group Fittings .......................................................... 211
To Redefine Specification-Driven Fittings ................................................ 213
About Specification Override during Fitting Replacement........................... 213
To Replace Fittings .............................................................................. 213
Tip: Modifying and Deleting Valve Numbers ............................................ 214
Fitting Overlap Checking ...................................................................... 215
Specification-Driven Pipeline Modification ..................................................... 215
About Pipeline Modification ...................................................................... 215
To Modify Pipe Segments ........................................................................ 216
To Modify a Corner Type ......................................................................... 216
Tip: Modifying Corner Types .................................................................... 217
Tip: Changing the Bend Radius of a Pipeline .............................................. 218
To Modify the Bend Parameters................................................................ 218
To Reverse Flow Direction ....................................................................... 219
Flow Direction Violations ......................................................................... 220
To Modify the Line Shape of a Flexible Hose............................................... 220
To Edit a Pipeline ................................................................................... 220
To Replace a Bend with an Elbow ............................................................. 222
Specification-Driven Pipe Fabrication ........................................................... 222
About Fabricating Pipes........................................................................... 222
Cutting Pipe Pieces ................................................................................. 223
About Cutting Pipe Pieces ..................................................................... 223
To Cut a Pipe at a Specified Location Using Placement.............................. 223
To Cut a Pipe at a Specified Location Using a Plane Reference ................... 224
To Cut Pipe at a Specified Location Using a Pipe Reference........................ 225
To Cut Pipe at a Single Location Using a Fitting Port Reference .................. 226
Selecting the Reference Fitting Port ....................................................... 227
Changing the Selected Reference Fitting Port ....................................... 229
xvii
Table of Contents
Relocating the Selected Reference Fitting Port ...................................... 229
To Cut Pipe at Multiple Locations Based on Pipe Stock or

User-Specified Length .......................................................................... 230
To Cut Pipe at Multiple Locations with Automatic Joint Fitting Insertion ....... 230
To Cut Parallel Pipes at Locations Identical to the Reference Pipe Run......... 231
To Cut Parallel Pipes at Specified Interval Length..................................... 232
Tip: Selecting a Reference Pipe Run for Cutting Parallel Pipes .................... 233
Example: Parallel Pipe Piece Cutting ...................................................... 234
Checking the Clearance between the Pipe Cuts with Flanged Fittings .......... 235
Staggering of Cuts With Joint Fitting ................................................... 236
Assigning FLANGE_OD as a Dimension or Part Parameter ......................... 237
To Cut Pipes Associated With a Block ..................................................... 237
Example: Block Boundary Based Pipe Piece Cutting.................................. 238
Using Joint Fittings .............................................................................. 241
For Parallel Pipe Cuts ........................................................................ 241
For Pipe Cuts at Block Boundary Intersection........................................ 241
Assigning a Weld Type ......................................................................... 242
To Delete a Pipe Piece Cut .................................................................... 242
Generating Pipe Spools ........................................................................... 243
About Spool Generation ....................................................................... 243
To Create a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment ........................ 243
To Modify a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment ........................ 244
To Delete a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment ........................ 245
About Simplified Spool Representation ................................................... 245
To Display a Simplified Spool ................................................................ 246
Pipe Insulation....................................................................................... 246
About Pipeline Insulation (Spec-Driven).................................................. 246
To Assign Insulation during Pipeline Creation (Spec-Driven) ...................... 246
To Modify Insulation Assigned to a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)......................... 247
To Delete Insulation (Spec-Driven) ........................................................ 248
Using the Model Tree to Delete Insulation ............................................ 248
xviii
Table of Contents
To Report Insulation Information (Spec-Driven) ...................................... 249
About Assigning Insulation to Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ................... 249
To Assign Insulation to Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ............................ 249
To Redefine Insulation Assigned to a Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ......... 251
Using the Model Tree to Redefine Insulation ......................................... 251
Creating Pipe Solids................................................................................ 253
About Pipe Solids ................................................................................ 253
To Create or Erase a Pipe Solid ............................................................. 254
Example: Creating Pipe Solids and Insulation Quilts ................................. 255
Using the Piping System Tree to Create and Erase Pipe Solids ................ 256
Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling ............................................................ 257
About Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling................................................. 257
About Associating an XML File with a Pipeline............................................. 258
About Routed Systems Designer Component Properties in Schematic-Driven

Pipeline Modeling ................................................................................... 258
Pipelines ............................................................................................ 258
Equipment and Nozzles ........................................................................ 258
Fittings .............................................................................................. 259
Branches............................................................................................ 260
To Designate Schematic Information......................................................... 260
Designating Equipment, Nozzles, Fittings, and Branches.............................. 261
About Routing a Pipeline Using Schematic Information ................................ 261
About Inserting a Fitting Using Schematic Information ................................ 262
About Replacing a Fitting Using Schematic Information ............................... 263
Specification-Driven Pipe Drawing ............................................................... 263
About Pipe Drawings (Spec-Driven) .......................................................... 263
Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) ................................................... 263
About Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) (Spec-Driven)................... 263
To Generate an Isometric Drawing (Spec-Driven) .................................... 264
Component Material Description (Spec-Driven)........................................ 266
Creating Pipe Component Information (Spec-Driven) ............................... 267
xix
Table of Contents
Example: ISOGEN Identifiers on a Component (Spec-Driven) .................... 269
ISOGEN Attribute Map File (Spec-Driven) ............................................... 269
Example: ISOGEN Attribute Map File (Spec-Driven) ................................. 272
ISOGEN Symbol Map File (Spec-Driven) ................................................. 276
Default Symbol Mapping .................................................................... 276
Symbol Key Selection........................................................................ 277
Example: ISOGEN Symbol Map File (Spec-Driven) ................................... 278
ISOGEN Endtype Map File (Spec-Driven) ................................................ 278
Default End Type Mapping ................................................................. 279
Example: ISOGEN Endtype Map File (Spec-Driven) .................................. 279
ISOGEN Nominal Size Map File (Spec-Driven) ......................................... 280
Default Nominal Size Mapping ............................................................ 281
Example: ISOGEN Nominal Size Map File (Spec-Driven) ........................... 281
ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File (Spec-Driven) ...................................... 285
Example: ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File (Spec-Driven) ........................ 285
ISOGEN Error Log File (Spec-Driven) ..................................................... 286
Example: ISOGEN Error Log File (Spec-Driven) ....................................... 286
Installation Drawing Generation ............................................................... 286
About Installation Drawing Generation ................................................... 286
Example: Piping Installation Drawing ..................................................... 287
To Specify Display Style for Pipe Segments............................................. 287
Pipe Display Style................................................................................ 288
To Select a Slope Symbol for Pipe Segments ........................................... 290
Pipe Slope Symbol............................................................................... 291
To Annotate Installation Drawing........................................................... 292
Attribute and Parameter Specification File............................................... 295
User Object Type .............................................................................. 295
Attribute and Parameter Names.......................................................... 296
Factor ............................................................................................. 296
Format ............................................................................................ 296
Style............................................................................................... 298
xx
Table of Contents
Layer .............................................................................................. 298
Example: Attribute and Parameter Specification File................................. 298
AEC Object Type File............................................................................ 298
User Object Type .............................................................................. 299
AEC Object Type............................................................................... 299
Example: AEC Object Type File.............................................................. 299
Pipe Spool Drawing Generation ................................................................ 300
About Pipe Spool Drawing Generation .................................................... 300
Process Flow of Pipe Spool drawing Generation........................................ 301
Using Pro/ENGINEER......................................................................... 301
Using ISOGEN .................................................................................. 302
ISOGEN Data Control Files.................................................................... 302
About ISOGEN Data Control Files ........................................................ 302
Option Switches File.......................................................................... 303
Alternative Text File .......................................................................... 304
Position Text File .............................................................................. 305
Drawing Definition File ...................................................................... 305
Drawing Frame File ........................................................................... 305
ISOGEN File ..................................................................................... 305
Displaying Bending Data ...................................................................... 306
About Bending Data .......................................................................... 306
About the Node Number .................................................................... 306
About the Bending Point .................................................................... 307
About Bending Spring Back ................................................................ 310
About Bending Elongation .................................................................. 311
About Pipe Cutting Length ................................................................. 312
About the Bending Angle ................................................................... 313
About the Bend Radius ...................................................................... 313
About Bending Rotation Angle ............................................................ 314
About the Flange Angle ..................................................................... 315
About the Flange Twist Angle ............................................................. 317
xxi
Table of Contents
Specification-Driven Pipe Reporting ............................................................. 319
About Specification-Driven Pipe Reporting ................................................. 319
To Create Pipeline Reports ...................................................................... 320
To Generate a Bend Location Table........................................................... 321
To Generate a Bend Machine Table ........................................................... 321
Example: Bend Location Report ............................................................... 322
Example: Bend Machine Report................................................................ 322
Reporting the Weight and COG Information for Pipe Segments ..................... 323
Example: Pipe Segment Report ................................................................ 323
Example: Fitting Report .......................................................................... 324
Example: Insulation Report ..................................................................... 325
Example: Bill of Materials ........................................................................ 326
Pipeline Network Report .......................................................................... 329
About the Pipeline Network Report......................................................... 329
Example: Pipeline Network Report -1 ..................................................... 330
Errors in the Pipeline Network Report ..................................................... 331
To Change the Pipeline Network Report Format ....................................... 333
Example: Pipeline Network Report with Changed Format .......................... 334
Assigning and Reporting Bolt Nut Information ......................................... 337
Reporting the Bolt Nut Quantity for Fittings............................................. 337
Schematic Consistency Check Report ........................................................ 340
About Schematic Consistency Check Report ............................................ 340
To Create a Schematic Consistency Check Report .................................... 340
Schematic Consistency Check Report Format .......................................... 341
Workflow for Checking Schematic Consistency ........................................ 342
Glossary .................................................................................................. 345
Glossary of Terms .................................................................................. 345
Index ......................................................................................................... 349
xxii
Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven)
Using Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven)
About Pro/PIPING and Piping Systems

Pro/PIPING is an optional Pro/ENGINEER module. Accessed through Assembly mode,
Pro/PIPING enables you to generate 3D piping systems in Pro/ENGINEER assemblies.
You can create piping systems in either the specification-driven or non specification-
driven piping design modes. Creating a piping system involves establishing pipeline
parameters, routing lines, and inserting fittings.
A piping system typically consists of pipelines, fittings, and equipment.
• A pipeline is composed of pipe segments and fittings. A segment of line may
consist of one or more consecutive sections, straight pieces of pipe with bends or
miter cuts or a section of flexible tube between breaks. The system creates a
break whenever you create a fitted corner or insert an internal fitting in the
pipeline.
• A fitting is a part or assembly that you use to connect lines to other lines, fittings,
and equipment, or to perform specific functions in the piping system (for
example, flow valves).
• Equipment in the working assembly (for example, a coil or a tank) is represented

by assembly components with predefined entry ports.
Tailoring the Pro/PIPING Working Environment

You can tailor your Pro/PIPING work environment to your specific needs using
various tools:
• Using simplified representations, you can create a special version of a piping
assembly that includes only those components that you need to route a pipeline.
Using simplified representations can improve regeneration, retrieval, and display

time, which allows you to work more efficiently. Simplified representations
simplify a view by controlling which members of an assembly the system
retrieves into a session and shows.
The By Rule functionality enables you to exclude piping solids and fittings from a
simplified representation by assigning a parameter and then excluding all
components that have a particular value for that parameter.
Although you cannot exclude assembly features, you can easily place all piping
features on a layer by type.
• Using top-down design tools, you can set up a well-structured design using
advanced component creation tools containing skeleton models and copied
geometric and datum references.
1
Pro/PIPING (Spec-Driven) - Help Topic Collection
• Using reference control and investigation tools, you can view and manage the
complex web of dependencies (references) that evolve as you make features in a
design.
• Using viewing and environment control settings, you can set different
visualization (display) modes for components in an assembly. You can assign
wire frame, hidden line, no hidden line, shaded or blanked display modes to
components.
• The Piping System Tree provides an intuitive pipeline-level visual representation

of a piping project. You can use show/blank and centerline/solid display modes,
and also highlight pipelines. These display modes are accessed from this fully
customizable piping interface.
About Pro/PIPING Design Modes

Pro/PIPING allows you to create complex piping systems based on the piping design
mode you choose. You set the piping design mode by setting the
piping_design_method configuration option. The following design modes are
available:
• Non Specification-Driven—Creates piping systems using manual tasks. All line
stocks must be manually created and associated to a routed pipeline. All fittings
must also be manually inserted. The Non-Specification-Driven piping design
mode does not use project-specific data during pipe modeling. Furthermore, this
design mode does not support design compatibility checks such as size mismatch
detection, end type mismatch, and so on.
• Specification-Driven—Creates piping systems based on the piping design

method practiced by the Plant, Shipbuilding, and Aerospace design industries.
Pro/PIPING creates specification-driven piping systems using piping specifications
and automated modeling tasks. These tasks use archived piping data and
project-specific data from the Specification Database. Pro/PIPING creates all line
stocks on-the-fly and automatically associates them to the appropriate pipelines.
All fittings are selected automatically during fitting insertion. The Specification-
Driven piping design mode supports intelligent design rule checking during
modeling. Note that you must set up the Specification Database Project Data files
to model specification-driven piping systems.
• User-Driven—Enables you to switch between Non Specification-Driven and

Specification -Driven piping modes and convert your piping assemblies at any
time in the design process. Select or clear the Spec Driven check box on the
PIPING menu to control the project piping design mode and convert piping
assemblies to the selected mode.
To Access the Specification-Driven Design Mode

1. Configure Pro/PIPING for the Specification-Driven or User-Driven piping design
modes.
2. Create or open a piping assembly.
2
3. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu appears. If you are using the
User-Driven mode, select the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING menu.
You can use the PIPING menu to design your specification-driven piping system.
About the Pro/PIPING User Interface (Spec-Driven)

The Pro/PIPING user interface contains the following elements that increase usability
and decrease mouse picks:
• The PIPING menu groups all necessary tools as menu commands in one
convenient location. These commands open dialog boxes or submenus for
intuitive step-by-step piping assembly creation.
• Pro/PIPING dialog boxes contain:
o Expandable/collapsible sections that are indicated by a triangle. When you

click the triangle, a section expands or collapses.
o Bands that separate major groupings within a dialog box.
o Sets of related functions. For example, fitting placement, positioning

parameters, alignment point, flip, and rotation angle are all available
through the Insert Fitting dialog box for Specification-Driven piping
systems.
o Dynamic options that update as you make selections.
o Easy-to-use buttons, text and list boxes, and thumb wheels.
o A fitting preview window allows for immediate inspection and confirmation

of fitting selections.
• The Piping System Tree provides an intuitive pipeline-level visual representation

of a piping project. You can use the show/blank, or centerline/solid display
modes, and highlight pipelines. These display modes are accessed from this
customizable piping interface.
• The View tab in the Piping System Tree allows you to change views.
PIPING Menu (Spec-Driven)

The PIPING menu contains the following Pro/PIPING commands:
• Active Asm—Opens the SELECT dialog box that allows you to change the
current active assembly. Select the active assembly from either the Model Tree,
Piping System Tree, or the working window. The name of the currently active
assembly appears in the graphics window.
• Component—Opens the COMPONENT menu that allows you to manipulate

assembly components.
• Pipeline—Opens the OPER PIPE LINE menu on which you can create and
immediately route a new pipeline or delete, rename, suppress, or resume
existing pipelines.
3
• Route—Opens the ROUTE PIPE menu on which you can add to or edit the path
of an existing pipeline assembly.
• Fitting—Opens the FITTING menu on which you can insert, delete, redefine, or
replace pipe fittings.
• Modify Pipe—Opens the Modify Pipeline dialog box in which you can modify
several piping options in the active assembly.
• Modify Dim—Opens the MODIFY menu on which you can modify the active
assembly component dimensions.
• Regenerate—Opens the PRT TO REGEN menu on which you can update

modified objects and assembly dimensions.
• Fabrication—Opens the FABRICATION menu on which you can cut pipes,

delete cuts, generate spools, create pipe solids, create insulation, and delete
insulation.
• Designation—Opens the Pipeline Designation dialog box using which you can
designate pipeline information that is used for the schematic driven pipeline
modeling.
• Drawing—Opens the Generate Isometric dialog box using which you can
generate PCF files.
• Set Up—Opens the PIPE SETUP menu on which you can set up how Pro/PIPING
creates piping systems.
• Info—Opens the Report Pipeline dialog box in which you can retrieve piping
system information.
Piping System Tree
About the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven)

The Piping System Tree allows you to control how the pipeline is displayed. This tree-
based interface organizes all pipelines in the active assembly and its subassemblies
by piping system (categories) and orders pipelines according to their names. The
ability to include all subassemblies in the Piping System Tree streamlines the pipeline
display process. This ability is especially important if you create pipelines based on
the "one pipeline per assembly" modeling method.
Note: The sequence of display of the components is based on the direction of flow of
the network.
The Piping System Tree does the following:
• Displays all pipelines in the top-level assembly and its subassemblies.
• Organizes pipelines in a collapsible or expandable hierarchy according to the

value assigned to the piping_system_tree_format configuration option. The
pipelines are grouped according to the mnemonic, by default. This organization of
pipelines provides a clear and intuitive visual representation of the piping project
4
and allows immediate piping system recognition and pipeline selection. For
example, you can group and display all water pipes or all specification 12A
pipelines.
• Allows for efficient pipeline selection. You can quickly select pipelines and perform
the required tasks.
Note: Unlike the Pro/ENGINEER Model Tree, you cannot use the Piping System
Tree to sequentially reorder the pipelines and assembly components.
Viewing the Piping System Tree
Click on the top menu bar to switch between the standard Model Tree and the
Piping System Tree with pipeline view.
Note: You can switch to the standard Model Tree from the pipeline view or spool
view by clearing View > Pipeline View or View > Spool View, respectively.
Pipeline Selection and Display Features

The Piping System Tree provides the following dynamic pipeline selection and display
options:
• Pipeline—Displays or hides a pipeline.
• Label—Creates, deletes, displays, or hides a pipeline label.
• Solid—Creates, deletes, displays, or hides a pipe solid.
• Insulation—Creates, deletes, displays, or hides pipe insulation.
• Flow—Displays and allows the reversal of the flow direction of the pipeline or
pipe segment nodes.
Customize the Pro/PIPING Piping System Tree

The Piping System Tree is fully customizable. You can reorganize pipelines in multiple
ways by setting the piping_system_tree_format configuration option. You can also
open a separate Piping System Tree window.
To Access the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven)

1. Open or create a Pro/PIPING assembly.
2. Click Applications > Piping. The Piping System Tree opens. From the Piping
System Tree, you can select pipelines and display modes. Click View > Pipeline
View or View > Spool View to switch between the pipeline view and the spool
view.
Note: The sequence of the components displayed is based on the direction of

flow of the network.
5
To Select Pipelines (Spec-Driven)
1. Click . The Piping System Tree opens.
2. Select one of the following:
o PIPING SYSTEM TREE—Selects all pipelines in the top level assembly

including those in the subassemblies.
o Piping System (Category)—Selects all pipelines in the piping system. For

example, if a piping system is configured for MNEMONIC and you select
WATER, all water pipelines in the top level assembly are selected.
o Pipeline—Selects one pipeline.
You can also select individual pipelines in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics

window.
To Display or Blank Pipelines (Spec-Driven)
2. Select one or more pipelines from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A
shortcut menu appears.
3. Click Pipeline > Show from the menu to display the pipeline in the graphics
window, or click Pipeline > Hide to hide the pipeline in the graphics window.
To Display Centerlines or Solids (Spec-Driven)
2. Select one or more pipelines and right-click. A shortcut menu appears.
3. Click Solid > Show to display pipe centerlines for the selections. The selected
pipelines appear in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window.
Note: The Piping System Tree centerline or the solid display mode differs from the
centerline and solid display capabilities in Set Display and the mode set by the
pipe_solid_centerline configuration option in the following ways:
o The Piping System Tree centerline or the solid display mode allows you to
select one or more pipelines in the active assembly, including
subassemblies. You can display the selected pipeline with a pipe solid or
centerline.
Note: If you are creating pipelines based on the "one pipeline per
assembly" modeling method, it is recommended that you use this centerline
or solid display mode.
6
o The Set Display centerline or solid display mode (PIPING > Set Up > Set
Display) enables you to select pipelines in both the active assembly, as
well as the subassemblies. You can display the selected pipeline with a pipe
solid or centerline.
o The mode set by the pipe_solid_centerline configuration option

indicates the center of the pipe solid geometry with a line. This is a global
setting for all pipelines.
To Highlight Pipelines (Spec-Driven)

1. Click Show > Highlight Model.
2. Select pipelines from Piping System Tree. The selected pipelines are highlighted
in the Piping System Tree and in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window.
3. Repeat this process to turn off the Highlight Model display mode.
To Reorganize Pipelines (Spec-Driven)

1. Click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2. In the Option box, type the piping_system_tree_format configuration option.
3. In the Value box, type one or any combination of the following values along with
any ASCII characters (default is MNEMONIC):
o SIZE
o SPECIFICATION
o MNEMONIC
o NUMBER
o INSULATION
As an example, the MNEMONIC-SPECIFICATION combination groups all pipelines

according to fluid carried and piping specification.
To Modify the Column Display (Spec-Driven)
2. Click Settings > Tree Columns. The Model Tree Columns dialog box opens.
3. Under Not Displayed, select the items you want to display and click . The
selected items now appear under Displayed.
4. Click OK. The selected items and their respective values are displayed in the
columns of the Piping System Tree.
7
To Display the Piping System Tree from the Active Assembly

1. Click View > From Active Asm in the Piping System Tree. All the pipelines
below the current assembly are displayed.
2. To cancel the selection of From Active Asm, clear From Active Asm.
To Display the Pipeline Component View
2. Click the plus sign (+) adjacent to the branch node or double-click the branch
node. The branch node expands to show the pipeline components.
3. Select a pipeline in the expanded Piping System Tree. The pipeline is highlighted
in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window.
To Display the Piping Spool View
1. Click . The Piping System Tree opens. Click View > Spool View in the Piping
System Tree. All the pipelines that have their spool numbers generated are
shown with their respective spools.
2. Click the plus sign (+) adjacent to the spool node or double-click the spool node.
The spool node expands to show its branch components.
3. Click a spool to select it in the expanded Piping System Tree. The spool is
highlighted in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window.
Note: You can switch between Pipeline View and Spool View at any time.
To Create or Delete Pipeline Labels from the Piping System Tree
3. Click Label > Create to create a label for the pipeline, or click Label > Delete
to delete the label of the selected pipeline.
Note: Delete is available only if a label has been created for a pipeline.
To Display or Hide Pipeline Labels
8
3. Click Label > Show to display the label of the selected pipeline or click Label >
Hide to hide the label of the selected pipeline.
Note: Show and Hide are available for a pipeline only if a label has been
created for the pipeline.
To Create or Delete Pipe Solids from the Piping System Tree
3. Click Solid > Create to create solids for the entire pipeline or pipe segments, or
click Solid > Delete to delete the solids for the entire pipeline or pipe segments.
Note: Delete is available only if the selected pipe segment nodes have solids.
To Display or Hide Pipe Solids
3. Click Solid > Show to show solids for the entire pipeline or pipe segments, or
click Solid > Hide to hide solids for the entire pipeline or pipe segments.
Note: Hide is available only if the selected pipe segment nodes have
unsuppressed solids.
To Create or Delete Pipe Insulation Quilts
3. Click Insulation > Create to create pipe insulation quilts for the entire pipelines,
or click Insulation > Delete to delete the pipe insulation quilts for the entire
pipeline.
Note: Insulation is available in the Piping System Tree and in the

Pro/ENGINEER graphics window only if a pipe solid has been created.
To Display or Hide Pipe Insulation Quilts
9
3. Click Insulation > Show to show pipe insulation quilts for the entire pipeline, or
click Insulation > Hide to hide pipe insulation quilts for the entire pipeline.
Note: Insulation is available only if the selected pipe segment nodes have
unsuppressed pipe insulation quilts.
About Customizing the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven)

Customizing the Piping System Tree gives you the flexibility to display and organize
your piping projects in the following ways:
• Reorganize pipelines—Reorganize pipelines in multiple ways by setting the
piping_system_tree_format configuration option to modify categories.
• Modify the column display—Display informational columns and select items to

display in these Piping System Tree columns.
Configuring Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven)
About Configuring Pro/PIPING (Spec-Driven)

You can customize the way the Specification-Driven piping design mode operates by
entering config.pro configuration file options and their values in the Options dialog
box (Tools > Options). For example, you can modify piping design modes, pipeline
formats, file names and directory locations, and configure the Pro/PIPING ISOGEN
interface.
Pro/PIPING provides a list of configuration options arranged in alphabetical order.
Each option contains the following information:
• Configuration option name
• Default and available variables or values. All default values are in italics.
• Brief description and notes describing the configuration option
ISOGEN Configuration Options

Pro/PIPING allows you to create isometric pipeline drawings by providing an
isometric drawing generation (ISOGEN) interface. Using the Generate Isometric
dialog box (PIPING > Drawing), you can create ISOGEN .pcf files for use with an
ISOGEN drawing tool. The following configuration options must be set in the
Pro/PIPING config.pro file to use the ISOGEN interface:
• isogen_mandatory_attr_file
• isogen_symbol_map_file
• isogen_output_files_dir
• isogen_nominal_size_map_file
10
• isogen_pcf_filename_format
• isogen_endtype_map_file
Note:
• Many configuration options are common to both the Specification-Driven and
Nonspecification-Driven modes in Pro/PIPING.
• After you set the configuration options, all settings take effect immediately in the
current Pro/ENGINEER session.
• All the configuration options for which you specify numeric values will use the
units of the active piping assembly.
• The Symbol Map, Endtype Map, and Nominal Size ISOGEN Map files are required
to map Pro/PIPING component information to ISOGEN component information.
To Set Pro/PIPING Configuration Options (Spec-Driven)

1. Locate the configuration option you want to set using the configuration topics.
2. Click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
3. Select the configuration option from the list.
or
In the Option box, type the configuration option name.
4. In the Value box, type the value. You can use the Value list to see which values
are available. If the value requires an integer, type it.
5. Click Add / Change. The configuration option and its value appear in the list. A
green status icon confirms the change.
6. When you finish configuring Pro/PIPING, click Apply or OK.
Note: It is recommended that you set the Pro/PIPING configuration options before
starting a new piping project.
Specifying Thumb Wheel Increments

You can specify the increment for each controllable movement of the thumb wheel
using the piping_thumb_wheel_increment or piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc
configuration options, as applicable. In certain cases, Pro/PIPING uses the following
configuration options to determine the increment value:
Configuration Option Description
create_fraction_dim No—Pro/PIPING creates dimensions in

the decimal format (default).
Yes—Pro/PIPING creates dimensions in

the fractional format.
11
Configuration Option Description
dim_fraction_format Std—Pro/PIPING displays dimensions as

a fraction in the standard Pro/ENGINEER
format (15 1/2 for 15.5 inches).
Aisc—Pro/PIPING displays dimensions

as a fraction in the AISC format (1' 3
1/2" for 15.5 inches).
dim_fraction_denominator Sets the largest denominator to be used

in a fraction, when you want to display
linear dimensions in a fractional format.
default_dec_places (0-14) Sets the number of decimal places that

Pro/PIPING must display when you want
to display linear dimensions in the
decimal format. By default, Pro/PIPING
displays the dimensions to an accuracy
of two decimal places.
isogen_attribute_map_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_attribute_map.ptd,
<absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify a path and name for the file that maps Pro/PIPING attributes or parameters
to the ISOGEN user-definable attributes.
Note: The isogen_attribute_map.ptd file can be copied to a local directory. You
can modify this file and maintain different versions as per your requirements. Use
the isogen_attribute_map_file configuration option to access the required
modified version.
isogen_endtype_map_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_endtype_map.ptd,
Specify a path and name for the file that maps Pro/PIPING endtypes with ISOGEN
endtypes.
isogen_mandatory_attr_file (Spec-Driven)
isogen.fls, <valid file name>
Specify a name for the file that contains ISOGEN mandatory attribute files.
12
isogen_nominal_size_map_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_nominal_size_map.
ptd, <absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify a path and name for the file that maps Pro/PIPING sizes with ISOGEN
nominal sizes in millimeters and inches.
isogen_output_files_dir (Spec-Driven)
<proe_run_directory>, <absolute directory path>
Specify a directory path for archiving the ISOGEN output files.
isogen_pcf_filename_format (Spec-Driven)
MNEMONIC-SPECIFICATION-NUMBER, <a combination of the following keywords: SIZE,
SPECIFICATION, MNEMONIC, NUMBER, INSULATION, SPOOLNUM, and any valid file name
characters>
Specify a name format for ISOGEN (.pcf) files. Pro/PIPING creates ISOGEN file
names from the values assigned to the keywords as shown in the following table:
ISOGEN File Name Assigned Value ISOGEN (.pcf) File

Format Name
mnemonic-number- water,1001,is water-1001-is.pcf

insulation
ship1-mnemonic- water,1001,is ship1-water-1001-

number-insulation is.pcf
isogen_symbol_map_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_symbol_map.ptd,
Specify a path and name for the file that maps Pro/PIPING fitting library part names
with ISOGEN component names and symbol keys (SKEY).
pipe_3D_bend_theor_int_pts (Spec-Driven)
yes, no
Set the theoretical intersections and bends in three-dimensional piping models.
• Yes—Pro/PIPING displays theoretical intersections and bends in three-
dimensional models.
• No—Pro/PIPING does not display theoretical intersections and bends in three-

dimensional models.
13
pipe_extend_dim_scheme (Spec-Driven)
cartesian, cylindrical, spherical
Specify a dimension scheme for piping extend segment.
pipe_solid_centerline (Spec-Driven)
yes, no
Set the pipe solid centerline display mode. Pro/PIPING displays a pipe solid centerline
in the graphics window to indicate the center of the pipe solid. After you set this
option, the display changes immediately in the current session of Pro/ENGINEER.
This mode displays the pipe solid center only.
• yes—Pro/PIPING displays the pipe solid centerlines.
• no—Pro/PIPING does not display pipe solid centerlines.
Note: The pipe_solid_centerline mode differs from the centerline or solid display
capabilities in both the Set Display and the Piping System Tree in the following
ways:
• The mode set by the pipe_solid_centerline configuration option indicates the
center of the pipe solid geometry with a line. This is a global setting for all
pipelines.
• The Set Display centerline or solid display mode (PIPING > Set Up > Set
Display) enables you to select pipelines in both the active assembly, as well as
the subassemblies. You can display the selected pipelines with a pipe solid or
centerline.
• The Piping System Tree centerline or solid display mode allows you to select one
or more pipelines in the active assembly, including subassemblies. You can
display the selected pipeline with a pipe solid or centerline. Note that if you are
creating pipelines based on the "one pipeline per assembly" modeling method, it
is recommended that you use this centerline/solid display mode.
pipe_solid_label_format (Spec-Driven)
SIZE-SPECIFICATION-MNEMONIC-NUMBER-INSULATION, <one or a combination of the
following keywords: SIZE, SPECIFICATION, MNEMONIC, NUMBER, INSULATION, and
any valid file name characters>
Specify a pipe solid label format. Pro/PIPING generates pipeline labels from the
values assigned to the keywords during pipe solid creation.
pipe_update_pre_20_int_pts (Spec-Driven)
yes, no
Pro/PIPING can update pipelines created prior to Pro/PIPING Release 20.0. This
enables users to get intersection point entities. Pro/PIPING creates these entities in
session or when you retrieve the piping model.
14
• Yes—Pro/PIPING updates pipelines created prior to Pro/PIPING Release 20.0.
• No—Pro/PIPING does not update pipelines created prior to Pro/PIPING Release

20.0.
pipeline_assembly_library_dir (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/pipelinelib, <absolute directory
path>
Specify a directory path for selecting a pipeline assembly.
Note: Pro/PIPING uses the PRO_DIRECTORY environment variable to store the
<proe_load_directory>.
pipeline_assembly_name_format (Spec-Driven)
MNEMONIC-NUMBER, <one or a combination of the following keywords: SIZE,
SPECIFICATION, MNEMONIC, NUMBER, INSULATION, and any valid file name
characters>
Specify a pipeline assembly name format. Pro/PIPING creates assembly names from
the values assigned to the keywords during pipeline creation and routing. Any
combination of keywords and valid file name characters are allowed.
The following table describes the format:
Assembly Name Assigned Value Assembly File Name

Format
MNEMONIC-NUMBER- WATER, 1001, IS WATER-1001-IS.ASM

INSULATION
SHIP1-MNEMONIC- WATER, 1001, IS SHIP1-WATER-1001-IS.ASM

NUMBER-INSULATION
pipeline_label_format (Spec-Driven)
SIZE-SPECIFICATION-MNEMONIC-NUMBER-INSULATION, <one or a combination of the
following keywords: SIZE, SPECIFICATION, MNEMONIC, NUMBER, INSULATION, and
any valid file name characters>
Specify a pipeline label format. Pro/PIPING creates pipeline labels from the values
assigned to the keywords during pipeline creation and routing.
15
Pipeline Label Format Assigned Value Pipeline Label
MNEMONIC-NUMBER- WATER, 1001, IS WATER-1001-IS

INSULATION
SHIP1-MNEMONIC- WATER, 1001, IS SHIP1-WATER-1001-IS

NUMBER-INSULATION
pipeline_solid_start_part_name (Spec-Driven)
<string value>
Specify a default start part name for the pipe solid generation. The value specified
for this configuration option is used as a default template part name in the Pipe
Solid dialog box.
pipeline_spool_label_format (Spec-Driven)
SIZE-SPECIFICATION-MNEMONIC-NUMBER-SPOOL#PREFIX[0]SPOOLNUM[01]SUFFIX[],
<one or a combination of the following keywords: SIZE, SPECIFICATION,
MNEMONIC, NUMBER, INSULATION, SPOOLNUM, PREFIX, SUFFIX, and any valid file
name characters>
Specify a pipeline spool label format. Pro/PIPING creates spool labels from the values
assigned to the keywords during pipe piece cutting.
Pipeline Spool Label Assigned Value Pipeline Spool Label

Format

INSULATION
SHIP1-MNEMONIC-NUMBER- WATER, 1001, IS SHIP1-WATER-1001-IS

INSULATION
pipeline_start_assembly_name (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/fittinglib/ pipeline_start.asm,
Specify a path and name for the file that contains template information (assembly
units, pre-defined views, etc.). Pro/PIPING uses this information to create new
pipeline subassemblies.
Note: The Pipeline Start assembly file must be stored in the directory location
specified by the piping_fitt_lib_dir configuration option.
16
piping_wildfire_convert (Spec-Driven)
automatic, never, manual
Specify a value for this configuration option when working with piping assemblies
that are created in versions of Pro/PIPING earlier than Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire.
• automatic—Automatically converts all piping assemblies that are under the
active top assembly when you invoke the Pro/PIPING application.
• never—Does not convert piping assemblies.
• manual—Displays the Piping Assemblies Conversion dialog box when you

invoke the Pro/PIPING application. This is the default value.
Note: A piping assembly gets modified if it is updated to the Wildfire format.
piping_appearance_map_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_appearance
.map, <absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify a path and name for the file that maps all colors used in a Pro/PIPING piping
design project.
Note: The Piping Appearance Map file must be stored in the directory location
specified by the piping_mcat_dir configuration option.
piping_bolt_nut_select_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_bolt_nut_s
elect.ptd, <absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify a path and name for the file that provides the bolt and nut data for the
corresponding bolt nut code. The data includes information about the related unique
MCCS code, the Bolt Nut Master Catalog file, and the required quantity of bolt and
nuts.
Note: The bolt nut code must be assigned to fittings of all sizes and schedule ratings
in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file. This code is applied to all the fitting instances in
the fitting master catalog file when generating the Auto-Selection file, that is,
*_asfile.ptd. The bolt nut data related to the bolt nut code is obtained from the
Piping Bolt Nut Select file.
piping_design_method (Spec-Driven)
non_spec_driven, spec_driven, user_driven
Specify the piping design method for the piping project.
• non_spec_drivenActivates the Non Specification-Driven piping design mode.
• spec_drivenActivates the Specification-Driven piping design mode.
17
• user_drivenActivates the User-Driven piping design mode. This mode allows

you to switch between Specification-Driven and Non Specification-Driven piping
design modes and convert existing assemblies at any time in the design process.
piping_end_compatibility_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_end_compat
ibility.ptd, <absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify a path and name for the file that contains the list of all valid end type
connections (fitting-to-fitting, fitting-to-pipe, and pipe-to-fitting) allowed for a piping
project. Pro/PIPING uses this data for end type checking during fitting insertion.
Note: The Piping End Compatibility file must be stored in the directory location
piping_fitt_angle_tolerance (Spec-Driven)
1.5, <positive real number>
Specify a value for the piping fitting angle tolerance. Pro/PIPING uses this data to
check fitting angles during fitting insertion. The unit of measurement is degrees.
piping_fitt_category_map_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/sample_project/piping_fitt_categ
ory_map.ptd, < absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify a name for the file that maps each fitting category to a fitting category
button in the fitting insertion dialog boxes.
Note: The Piping Fitting Category Map file must be stored in the directory location
specified by the piping_project_data_dir configuration option.
piping_fitt_library_dir (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/fittinglib/, <absolute directory
path>
Specify a path where the fitting model part (individual parts or family table generic
parts with their associated tables) files are archived. Pro/PIPING uses this data
during fitting insertion.
piping_insulation_dir_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/sample_project/piping_insulation
_dir.ptd, <absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify a name for the file that contains the list of all valid insulation specifications
for a piping project.
Note: The Piping Insulation Directory file must be stored in the directory location
specified by the piping_project_data_dir configuration option.
18
piping_joint_fitting_clearance (Spec-Driven)
1, <positive integer>
Specify a value for the minimum joint fitting clearance. Pro/PIPING uses this data
when inserting joint fittings and when cutting parallel pipe segments. The value that
you specify for this configuration option is calculated in the current piping assembly
units. For example, a value of 200.0 represents 200 inches in the INCH assembly
unit, and 200 mm in the MM assembly unit. The default values are 25mm in the MM
assembly unit and 1 inch in the INCH assembly unit.
piping_joint_fitting_offset (Spec-Driven)
Specify a value for the minimum joint fitting offset. Pro/PIPING uses this value when
inserting joint fittings, and when cutting parallel pipe segments. The value specified
for this configuration option is calculated in the current piping assembly units. For
example, a value of 200.0 represents 200 inches in the INCH assembly unit and 200
mm in the MM assembly unit. The default values are 100mm in the MM assembly
unit and 4 inches in the INCH assembly unit.
piping_manufacture_dir_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_manufactur
e_dir.ptd, <absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify a name for the file that contains pipe manufacturing information for projects
based on a pipe material code. The piping_mcat_dir configuration option resources
or retrieves data from this file.
Note: The Piping Manufacture Directory file must be stored in the directory location
piping_material_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_material.p
td, <absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify the path and name for the file that contains the piping material information.
Pro/PIPING associates this information (material code, full description, pipe density,
pipe and fitting master catalog file names) with pipes and fittings.
Note: The Piping Material file must be stored in the directory location specified by
the piping_mcat_dir configuration option.
piping_mcat_dir (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/, <absolute
directory path>
Specify a path where the piping Master Catalog files are archived. Pro/PIPING uses
the Master Catalog files to create piping specification files (Project Data files) for a
piping project.
19
piping_mcat_dir_file (Spec-Driven)
piping_mcat_dir.ptd, <valid file name>
Specify a name for the file that contains all pipe and fitting master catalog files.
Note: The Piping MCAT Directory file must be stored in the directory location
piping_min_bolting_clearance (Spec-Driven)
Specify a value for minimum bolt clearance in the current assembly units.
Pro/PIPING uses this data during fitting insertion.
piping_project_data_dir (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/sample_project/, <absolute
directory path>
Specify a path where the project related specification and design rule files are
archived. Pro/PIPING uses this data for specification-driven pipeline modeling and
reporting.
piping_schematic_driven
no, yes
Enable or disable the schematic-driven modeling.
• yesEnables the schematic-driven modeling options in pipeline creation, pipeline
routing, and fitting insertion.
• noDisables the schematic-driven modeling options.
piping_schematic_xml_dir (Spec-Driven)
current working directory,
<absolute directory path containing XML files giving schematic information>
Specify a path where the XML files containing the schematic information, obtained
from Routed Systems Designer, are archived. This is used as the start location for
XML file selection and search. Piping Design uses this data for the following tasks:
• Specification-driven pipeline modeling
• Specification-driven pipeline 2D and 3D schematic consistency checking.
The default value for this option is <current working directory>

Note: A pipeline should be completely defined in one XML file.
20
piping_spec_dir_file (Spec-Driven)
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/sample_project/piping_spec_dir.p
td, <absolute directory path and valid file name>
Specify a path and name for the file that archives the list of all piping specifications.
Pro/PIPING uses this file specification-driven fitting selection, pipeline creation, and
design rule checking.
piping_system_tree_format (Spec-Driven)
MNEMONIC, <one or a combination of the following keywords: SIZE, SPECIFICATION,
MNEMONIC, NUMBER, INSULATION, and any ASCII characters>
Specify the piping system tree format. Pro/PIPING creates piping systems or
categories from the values assigned to the keywords. These categories organize all
pipelines in the Piping System Tree. The following table describes the format:
Piping System Tree Pipeline Values Piping System

Format (Category) Name
MNEMONIC-SPECIFICATION WATER, 11C WATER-11C

INSULATION
SHIP1-MNEMONIC-NUMBER- WATER, 1001, IS SHIP1-WATER-1001-IS

INSULATION
piping_thumb_wheel_increment (Spec-Driven)
1, <positive real number>
Specify a value for the piping thumb wheel increment in the current model unit.
Pro/PIPING uses this data to adjust the positioning increments when using the
thumb wheel for various tasks such as during inserting fittings and extending and
routing a pipeline.
In certain cases, Pro/PIPING decides the increment value based on the following:
• If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to no, Pro/PIPING uses
the increment value that you specified using the
piping_thumb_wheel_increment configuration option. If the increment value is
less than the least decimal value that you specified using the
default_dec_places configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the least decimal
value as the increment.
• If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to no, and if you do not
specify any value for the piping_thumb_wheel_increment configuration option,
Pro/PIPING uses the least decimal value that you specified using the
default_dec_places configuration option, as the increment.
21
• If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to yes, and if the

increment value that you specified using the piping_thumb_wheel_increment
configuration option is less than the least denominator value that you can specify
using the dim_fraction_denominator configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the
least fraction value as the increment.
• If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to yes, and you do not
specify any value for the piping_thumb_wheel_increment configuration option,
Pro/PIPING uses the least fractional value as the increment.
piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc (Spec-Driven)
A positive real number between 0 and 1.
While creating a branch point on a pipe segment or inserting fittings, Pro/PIPING
uses this data to adjust the positioning increments as a ratio when you specify
increments using the thumb wheel. Pro/PIPING assigns 0.01 as the default value.
In certain cases, Pro/PIPING determines the increment value based on the following:
• If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to no, Pro/PIPING uses
the increment value that you specified using the
piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc configuration option. If the increment value is
less than the least decimal value that you specified using the
default_dec_places configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the least decimal
value as the increment.
• If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to yes, and if the

increment value that you specified using the piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc
configuration option is less than the least denominator value that you can specify
using the dim_fraction_denominator configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the
least fraction value as the increment.
units_system_dic_file
<proe_load_directory>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_units_syst
em_dic_file.ptd,<directory path and valid file name>
Specify a path and name for the file that specifies units systems used for various
piping specification database files.
Setting Up Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven)
About Setting Up Specification-Driven Pro/PIPING

Pro/PIPING allows you to design complex piping systems based on piping
specifications. In order to design these piping systems, you must first set up
Specification-Driven Piping. You can use the PIPE SETUP menu (PIPING > Set Up)
to perform the following setup procedures:
• Spec DB—Allows you to set up the piping Specification Database Project Data
files. The Pro/PIPING Specification Database contains Master Catalog (MCAT),
22
Project Data, and Fitting Library files. Pro/PIPING includes populated MCAT and
Fitting Library files for immediate use. However, you must define the Project Data
files for each piping project before beginning pipe system modeling.
• Update Model—Allows you to update the active assembly in the current piping
model with piping data changes made to the specification files (Project Data
files), the MCAT files, or both. You can also modify line stocks and update the
current piping model to reflect the changes.
• Design Rules—Allows you to add or change the Design Rule parameters.
• Bend Allow—Lets you define or modify bend tables.
• Set Display—Sets the centerline or solid pipeline display for a selected pipeline
in the graphics window.
Piping Specification Database
About the Piping Specification Database

The Pro/PIPING Piping Specification Database archives all piping library and catalog
files that can be used to create specification-driven piping systems and stores all
project-specific files. The Piping Specification Database contains the following three
file groups:
• Master Catalog (MCAT) Files—Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all of the
basic design information required for pipe modeling. Pro/PIPING includes MCAT
files. You can create MCAT files or modify existing ones when you want to update
and expand the piping data.
• Fitting Library Files—Fitting part files (Pro/ENGINEER and generic) with their
associated family tables and fitting assembly files. Fitting Library files provide the
physical representation for fittings in a piping model. Pro/PIPING includes Fitting
Library files. You can create Fitting Library Files or modify existing ones when you
want to update and expand the fitting library.
• Project Data Files—Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all project-specific design
information selected from the Master Catalog files. You create new Project Data
files for each new piping project when you set up Specification-Driven Piping for
that project. After you select piping data for each specification in the Define
Piping Specification dialog box, Pro/PIPING saves this data to a Project Data
file. You can modify the Project Data file by selecting new piping data.
Both the Master Catalog files and the Fitting Library files are archived collections that
contain all available items or components that can be used in piping system creation.
Unlike Project Data Files, these files do not change as you design new piping
projects.
Note: Create or modify the Piping Specification Database files before designing a
Specification-Driven piping project.
23
How the Piping Specification Database Works

The Piping Specification Database functions as the Pro/PIPING piping data libraries.
You begin a project by first creating any necessary Master Catalog and Fitting Library
files. After these files are updated, you create Project Data files for each new piping
project by assigning piping data from the Master Catalog files for each project
specification. Pro/PIPING retrieves all piping data from the Project Data files during
piping system design.
For example, you begin piping design with pipeline creation. You select a
specification and Pro/PIPING retrieves the data that you assigned to the specification
from the Project Data files. You select from this data and create the pipeline. After
the pipeline is created, Pro/PIPING copies the piping data to linestock features. As
you begin routing pipelines or creating pipe solids, Pro/PIPING uses the linestock
data. All insulation data is retrieved from the Project Data Files and copied to
insulation features for use in insulation modeling. During fitting insertion, Pro/PIPING
retrieves fitting data from the Project Data files.
Master Catalog Files
About Master Catalog Files

Pro/PIPING Master Catalog (MCAT) files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all of
the piping design data required for pipe modeling. This piping data is available for all
projects and remains unchanged as new piping projects are designed. The MCAT file
data sources consist of industry standards and practices, and manufacturer catalogs.
Pro/PIPING includes Master Catalog files. You can modify existing MCAT files to
satisfy project requirements.
How Master Catalog Files Work

Master Catalog files contain all piping data that is available for all piping projects.
MCAT files function as a piping data library. During Specification-Driven Piping setup,
you must add all piping data from printed sources into the Master Catalog files, as
needed. You also must create the Project Data files.
You create Project Data files by selecting piping data from the MCAT files and
assigning it to each project specification. Pro/PIPING writes this data to the Project
Data files. Project Data files allow you to control the data that Pro/PIPING retrieves
during project design.
As an example, before you begin designing the piping project, you must set up
Specification Driven piping by creating the Project Data files. Assign different piping
data (pipeline and fitting data, insulation data, and so forth) to specifications 11B,
12A, and 12C. As you begin designing the pipeline for specification 12A, Pro/PIPING
retrieves only the piping data that you assigned to this specification. All other Master
Catalog file data remains archived. You select from the specification 12A piping data
and begin project design.
24
The following table lists each Pro/PIPING Master Catalog file and its information type:
Master Catalog (MCAT) File Information Type
Piping Master Catalog Directory file All Piping Master Catalog files
Pipe Outer Diameter file All available pipe outside diameters
Pipe Thickness file All available pipe thickness
Pipe Master Catalog file All available pipe sizes for a

material type
Piping Material file All available pipe material data
Piping Manufacture Directory file Relates the pipe material code to

the Bend, Bend Machine, and the
Miter files
Fitting Master Catalog file All available fittings
Bend file All available bend tables
Bending Machine File All available bend machines and

their parameters
Miter file All available miter tables
End Compatibility file All available end type matching

tables
Insulation file All available insulation data for

pipes and fittings
Appearance Map file All available colors that can be

applied to pipelines
Note: You can define the MCAT directory path by setting the piping_mcat_dir
configuration option.
To Modify Master Catalog Files

Pro/PIPING allows you to modify Master Catalog (MCAT) files. You must modify MCAT
files when periodic updates and additions require up-to-date information. You can
use either Pro/TABLE or any ASCII file editing tool for MCAT file modification.
1. Open Pro/TABLE or any ASCII editing tool.
2. Open the MCAT file to modify.
3. Enter the piping data into the file complying with the file format.
4. Save the modified MCAT file.
25
Piping Master Catalog Directory File

The Piping Master Catalog Directory file lists all the available Pipe and Fitting Master
Catalog (MCAT) files and insulation files. Each Piping MCAT Directory file entry
associates a piping category and a Master Catalog file with a Pipe Outer Diameter
file, a Pipe Thickness file, a Combined Size Code file, a selection name for a fitting
category, and the bolt nut code associated to fitting.
Pro/PIPING uses the Piping Master Catalog Directory file to:
• Retrieve Pipe Outer Diameter and Pipe Thickness file data. This data is based on
the associated Pipe or Fitting MCAT file.
• Retrieve fitting selection names based on fitting categories and Fitting MCAT file
while creating the Auto-selection file.
• Retrieve size codes for pipes and fittings.
• Retrieve the bolt and nut code associated with a fitting. The code provides
information about the type, quantity, associated Bolt Nut MCAT file, and MCCS
code.
The Piping Master Catalog Directory file format is described in the next table.
Field Name Description
CATEGORY Pipe, fitting, or insulation categories defined in the

Master Catalog file.
Pro/PIPING supports the following category types:
1. Fixed Categories
o PIPE—For pipes
o FLEX_PIPE—For flexible pipes.
o INSULATION—For insulation
2. User-Defined Fitting Categories
Pro/PIPING provides the following categories that

are used by the fittings and archived in the
Pro/PIPING Fitting Library files. You can define new
categories as required.
o VALVE
o ANGLE_VALVE
o RELIEF_VALVE
o FLANGE
o GASKET
o ELBOW
26
o ELBOW_LET—For elbow olets
o BRANCH
o BRANCH_LET—For branch olets
o REDUCER
o GENERAL—For fittings that do not belong to

any of the above types
SNAME Fitting selection name.
MCAT_FILE Path for the Pipe or Fitting Master Catalog file name.
PIPE_OD_FILE Path for the Pipe Outside Diameter file name.
PIPE_THK_FILE Path for the Pipe Thickness file name.
SIZE_CODE_FILE Path for the Combined Size Code file name.
Pro/PIPING uses a single combined size code file for

all the pipes and fittings, by default.
BOLT_NUT_CODE Default bolt nut code. Pro/PIPING provides the

following bolt nut codes. You can define new bolt nut
codes as required.
CFA
CFB
CFC
CFD
CFE
CFF
CFG
CFH
Note: You can define the MCAT Directory file name by setting the
piping_mcat_dir_file configuration option. The default file is
piping_mcat_dir.ptd.
27
Example: Piping Master Catalog Directory File

Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_mcat_dir.ptd
CATEGORY SNAME MCAT_ PIPE_OD_ PIPE_THK_ SIZE_ BOLT_NUT

FILE FILE FILE CODE_ _CODE
FILE
PIPE pipe/p pipeod/od pipethk/thk pipeod/co

ipe_st _steel _steel mbined_siz
eel e_code

ipe_st _steel _steel mbined_siz
ain e_code

ipe_co _copper _copper mbined_siz
pper e_code

ipe_al _albrass- _albrass mbined_siz
brass nicu e_code
JOINT COUPLI fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co

NG /coupl _steel mbined_siz
ing_s e_code
w_ste
el
ELBOW ELBOW fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co

45LR /elbo _steel mbined_siz
w_45l e_code
ong_b
w_ste
el
ELBOW ELBOW fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co

90LR /elbo _steel mbined_siz
w_90l e_code
ong_b
w_ste
el
GENERAL BFLANG fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co

E /flang _steel mbined_siz
e_nec e_code
k_rf
28

FILE
FLANGE NECKFL fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co CFA

ANGE /flang _steel mbined_siz
e_nec e_code
k_rf
FLANGE SLIPFLA fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co

NGE /flang _steel mbined_siz
e_slip e_code
GASKET GASKET fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co

/gask _steel mbined_siz
et_ne e_code
ck
GASKET GASKET fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co

/gask _steel mbined_siz
et_sli e_code
p
GENERAL NIPPLE fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co

/nippl _steel mbined_siz
e_bw e_code
REDUCER CRED fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co

/red_c _steel mbined_siz
oncen e_code
tric_b
w_ste
el
VALVE GATE fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co CFE

/vl_ga _steel mbined_siz
te_sc e_code
_iron
VALVE GLOBE fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co CFF

/vl_gb _steel mbined_siz
_flrf_s e_code
teel
VALVE GLOBE fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co CFG

/vl_gb _steel mbined_siz
_sc_ir e_code
on
29

FILE
VALVE CHECK fitting pipeod/od pipeod/co CFH

/vl_s _steel mbined_siz
wing_ e_code
check
_flrf
Pipe Master Catalog File

The Pipe Master Catalog file defines all available pipe sizes, schedules, and end types
for each pipe material type.
Pro/PIPING retrieves pipe end types based on the selected pipe size and schedule.
The Pipe Master Catalog file format is described in the next table.
SCH_RATE Pipe schedule
SIZE Pipe nominal diameter
END_TYPE Pipe end type
Example: Pipe Master Catalog File

Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_mcat_dir.ptd
SCH_RATE SIZE END_TYPE
40 2" BE
40 3" BE
40 4" BE
40 6" BE
40 8" BE
40 10" BE
40 12" BE
40 14" BE
30
SCH_RATE SIZE END_TYPE
40 16" BE
40 18" BE
40 20" BE
40 24" BE
40 36" BE
80 ½" PE
80 ¾" PE
80 1" PE
80 1-1/2" PE
Fitting Master Catalog File

The Fitting Master Catalog file defines all the available pipe fittings for each fitting
catalog in the Fitting Library (JIS, ANSI, DIN, and so forth).
Pro/PIPING retrieves the selected fitting model name and weight based on the fitting
size, branch size, new size, and the fitting rating from the Fitting Master Catalog file.
Pro/PIPING uses this data for specification-driven fitting insertion.
The Fitting Master Catalog file format is described in the next table.
SCH_RATE Fitting rating.
SIZE Fitting inlet nominal diameter.
NSIZE Fitting outlet nominal diameter. Only required

when it is applicable to this particular fitting.
BSIZE Fitting branch outlet nominal diameter. Only

required when it is applicable to this particular
fitting.
END_TYPE Fitting inlet end type.
NEND_TYPE Fitting outlet end type.
FITT_MODEL_NAME Fitting model name. It can be the name of a

.prt (Part) or a .asm (Assembly) file, or an
instance of a family table from the Fitting
Library.
31
Example: Fitting Master Catalog File

The following is an example of the Fitting Master Catalog files gate_astm_steel.ptd
(steel gate valve) and concetric_astm_steel.ptd (steel reducer.)
Default Path
<ProE load
point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/valve/gate_astm_steel.ptd>
SCH_RATE SIZE NSIZE BSIZE END_TYPE NEND_TYPE FITT_MODEL_NAME
150 ½" BW GATE_ASTM_STEEL_0D
150 ¾" BW GATE_ASTM_STEEL_0F
150 1" BW GATE_ASTM_STEEL_01
150 1- BW GATE_ASTM_STEEL_0D
1/2
"
32
Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/reducer/

concetric_astm_steel.ptd
150 2" 1" BW REDUCER_ASTM_STEEL

_0201

_0302

_0403

_0604

_0806

_1008

_1210

_1412

_1614

_1816

_2018

_2220

_2422

_2624

_2826
33

_3028

_3230
Bolt Nut Selection File

The Bolt Nut Selection file specifies a unique material classification code (MCCS) for
the corresponding bolt nut code. The MCCS code is unique for different pipe sizes
and for different pressure ratings of a fitting. This code is subsequently used to
obtain information about the bolt nut material from the Bolt Nut Master Catalog file.
This file is identified by the piping_bolt_nut_select_file configuration option.
The Bolt Nut Selection file also provides information about the number of bolt nuts
required for the main fitting and for the flanges mated to that main fitting.
The Bolt Nut Master Catalog file format is described in the next table.
Bolt_Nut_Code Code identifying the bolt nut data
Size Pipe size
SCH_RATE Pressure rating of fitting
MCCS_CODE Material classification code of bolt nut
Quantity Number of bolt nuts for the fitting and mated flanges
Mcat_file Path of the Bolt Nut Master Catalog File that gives
information about the material description and the bolt nut
part name
If a fitting requires eight bolt nuts of different MCCS codes, the same bolt nut code
appears as two records, as shown in the next table.
BOLT_ SIZE SCHEDULE_ MCCS QUANTITY MCAT_FILE

NUT_ RATING
CODE
CFF 32A 5K 2111201 4 boltnut/bolt_

2065 nut_mcat.ptd
CFF 32A 5K 2111210 4 boltnut/bolt_

2130 nut_mcat.ptd
34
Example: Bolt Nut Selection File

Default Path
<ProE load
point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd>
BOLT_NUT SIZE SCH_RATE MCCS_CODE QUANTITY MCAT_FILE

_CODE
CFA 10A 40 311AB40010 4 boltnut/bolt_nut_mcat

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd
35
BOLT_NUT SIZE SCH_RATE MCCS_CODE QUANTITY MCAT_FILE

_CODE

.ptd
CFB 15A 40 357AA40015 4 boltnut/bolt_nut_mcat

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd

.ptd
36
Bolt Nut Master Catalog File

The Bolt Nut Master Catalog file defines the material classification code (MCCS) and
material for all types of bolts and nuts.
The bolt nut code is always assigned to a fitting as a fitting parameter in the auto-
selection file *_asfile.ptd. Using the bolt nut code, Pro/PIPING retrieves the
corresponding unique MCCS code from the bolt nut selection file
piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd. This MCCS code is used to obtain the bolt nut
material description from the Bolt Nut Master Catalog file, bolt_nut_mcat.ptd.
Pro/PIPING uses this data for specification-driven bolt nut insertion.
The Bolt Nut Master Catalog file format is described in the next table.
MCCS_CODE Bolt and Nut Material Classification Code
Bolt_Type Type of Bolt
MATL_DESC Bolt and Nut Material Description
Bulk_Item_Name Bulk Item Name
Example: Bolt Nut Master Catalog File

Default Path
<ProE load
point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/boltnut/bolt_nut_mcat.ptd>
MCCS BOLT_TYPE Material_Description Bolt_part_name
311AB40010 STUD BOLT NUT ASTM CS 311AB40010<BOL

106 T_NUT_BULK>
311AB40015 STUD BOLT NUT ASTM CS 311AB40015<BOL

106 T_NUT_BULK>
357AA40020 THREAD BOLT NUT ASTM CS 357AA40020<BOL

107 T_NUT_BULK>
357AA40025 THREAD BOLT NUT ASTM CS 357AA40025<BOL

107 T_NUT_BULK>
33AA30250 THREAD BOLT NUT ASTM CS 33AA30250<BOLT

112 _NUT_BULK>
33AA20250 NUT_TYPE1 BOLT NUT ASTM CS 33AA20250<BOLT

115 _NUT_BULK>
37
MCCS BOLT_TYPE Material_Description Bolt_part_name
322AA20050 NUT_TYPE1 BOLT NUT ASTM CS 322AA20050<BOL

115 T_NUT_BULK>

115 T_NUT_BULK>
322AI10032 NUT_TYPE2 BOLT NUT ASTM CS 322AI10032<BOLT

116 _NUT_BULK>

116 _NUT_BULK>

116 _NUT_BULK>

116 T_NUT_BULK>
Piping Material File

The Piping Material file defines piping material by using material code, material
description, and material density. The Piping Material file associates material codes
with Pipe, Fitting, or Insulation Master Catalog files to perform the following
specification-driven tasks:
• Pipeline Creation and Routing—Pro/PIPING retrieves the material description
and material density from the Piping Material file. This data is based on the
material code and the Pipe Master Catalog file name.
• Fitting Insertion—Pro/PIPING retrieves the fitting material description from the

Piping Material file. This data is based on the fitting material code and the Fitting
Master Catalog file name.
• Insulation Reporting—Pro/PIPING retrieves the insulation material description

from the Piping Material file. This data is based on the insulation material code.
The Piping Material file format is described in the next table.
MATL_CODE Material code
MATL_DESC Material description
MATL_DENSITY Material density
MCAT_FILE Piping Master Catalog file name
Note: You can define the Piping Material file name by setting the
piping_material_file configuration option (default is piping_material.ptd)
38
Example: Piping Material File

Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_material.ptd
MATL_CODE MATL_DESC MATL_DENSITY MCAT_FILE
AA ASTM A234 WPB 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
AB ASTM A105 GRB 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
AC ASTM A106 GRB 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
AD ASTM A216 GR 7.8 pipe/astm_steel

WCB
AE ASTM A193 GR B7 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
AF ASTM A194 GR 2H 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
AG ASBESTOS RING 2.0 gasket/asbestos_ring

GASKET
AH ASTM A181 GR1 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
AM ASTM A312 TP321 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
AO ASTM A351 CFBC 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
AP ASTM A403 WP321 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
AQ ASTM A182 F321 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
BA ASTM A335 GR P1 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
BB ASTM A217 GR 7.8 pipe/astm_steel

WC1
BC SP. W GASKET 4.6 1.8 gasket/sp_ring

% CHR
BD ASTM A234 WPI 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
BE ASTM A182 GR F1 7.8 pipe/astm_steel
Pipe Outer Diameter File

The Pipe Outer Diameter file defines the pipe outside diameter (OD). The OD is a
fixed value relative to the nominal pipe diameter and pipe material category.
Pro/PIPING uses the Pipe Outer Diameter file to retrieve the pipe outside diameter
and pipe size code based on the pipe size for specification-driven pipeline creation.
39
Pro/PIPING also uses this file to retrieve the fitting size code. This code is based on
the fitting size and is used for fitting stock number creation.
The Pipe Outer Diameter file format is described in the next table.
PIPE_OD Pipe outside diameter (OD)
SIZE_CODE Size code
The size code can be used in a pipe or fitting stock

number as a replacement for size.
Example: Pipe Outer Diameter File

Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/pipeod/od_steel.ptd
SIZE PIPE_OD SIZE_CODE
1" 1.315 01
1-1/2" 1.9 1D
2" 2.375 02
3" 3.5 03
4" 1.315 04
6" 6.625 06
8" 8.625 08
10" 10.75 10
12" 12.75 12
14" 14 14
16" 16 16
18" 18 18
20" 20 20
24" 24 24
40
Pipe Thickness File

The Pipe Thickness file defines the pipe wall thickness. The pipe wall thickness is a
fixed value relative to the nominal pipe diameter, pipe schedule, and pipe material
type.
Pro/PIPING uses the Pipe Thickness file to retrieve the pipe wall thickness based on
the pipe size and schedule for specification-driven pipeline creation.
The Pipe Thickness file format is described in the next table.
PIPE_THK Pipe wall thickness
Example: Pipe Thickness File

Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/pipethk/thk_steel.ptd
SCH_RATE SIZE PIPE_THK
40 1" 0.133
40 1-1/2" 0.145
40 2" 0.154
40 3" 0.216
40 4" 0.237
40 6" 0.28
40 8" 0.322
40 10" 0.365
40 12" 0.406
40 14" 0.438
40 16" 0.5
40 18" 0.562
40 20" 0.594
40 24" 0.688
41
SCH_RATE SIZE PIPE_THK
80 1" 0.179
80 1-1/2" 0.2
80 2" 0.218
80 3" 0.3
80 4" 0.337
80 6" 0.432
80 8" 0.5
80 10" 0.594
80 12" 0.688
80 14" 0.75
80 16" 0.844
80 18" 0.938
80 20" 1.031
80 24" 1.218
Pipe Manufacture Directory File

The Pipe Manufacture Directory file associates a pipe material code with a Bend file,
a Bending Machine file, a Miter file, and a Bending Spring Back and Elongation file.
Pro/PIPING retrieves the Bend file, Bend Machine file, Bending Spring Back and
Elongation file, Miter file and names from the Pipe Manufacture Directory file. This
data is based on pipe material code. Pro/PIPING uses the Pipe Manufacture Directory
file during specification-driven pipeline creation.
The Pipe Manufacture Directory file format is described in the next table.
MATL_CODE Material code
BEND_FILE Bend file name
BEND_MACHINE_FILE Bending Machine file name
MITER_FILE Miter file name
42
BEND_SPRING_BACK_ELONGATION_FILE Bending spring back and elongation

file name
Note: You can define the Pipe Manufacture Directory file name by setting the
piping_manufacture_dir_file configuration option (default is
piping_manufacture_dir.ptd).
Example: Pipe Manufacture Directory File

Default Path
<ProE load
point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_manufacture_dir.ptd
MATL_ BEND_ BEND_MACHINE BEND_SPRING_BACK_ MITER_FILE

CODE FILE _FILE ELONGATION_FILE
AA bend/be bend_machine/b bend_spring_back_elongation miter/miter_

nd_steel end_machine /bend_spring_back_elongatio steel
n_steel
AB bend/be bend_machine/b miter/miter_

nd_steel end_machine steel
CA bend/be
nd_copp
er
CB bend/be
nd_albs
Bend File
The Bend file defines the bend information for pipe sizes that are assigned to specific
pipe material codes. Pipe material codes and the Bend files are associated in the Pipe
Manufacture MCAT file. The Pipe Manufacture file is associated to the Pipe Master
Catalog file for each material code through the Piping Material file.
Pro/PIPING retrieves the bend radius from the Bend file. This bend data is based on
the pipe size and is used for specification-driven pipeline creation and routing.
Note: The Bend file units of measurement must be the same as those in the Pipe
Outer Diameter file.
43
Example: Bend Radius
1 Bend radius
The Bend file format is described in the next table.
SIZE Pipe nominal diameter.
RADIUS Bend radius.
RATIO Ratio between the bend radius and the pipe outside
diameter.
MIN_RADIUS Minimum bend radius.
MAX_RADIUS Maximum bend radius.
MIN_ANGLE Minimum bend angle.
MAX_ANGLE Maximum bend angle.
Example: Bend File

Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/bend/bend_steel.ptd
SIZE RADIUS RATIO MIN_RADIUS MAX_RADIUS MIN_ANGLE MAX_ANGLE
15A 100 100 100 0 360
20A 125 125 125 0 360
25A 125 125 125 0 360
32A 135 135 135 0 360
44
SIZE RADIUS RATIO MIN_RADIUS MAX_RADIUS MIN_ANGLE MAX_ANGLE
40A 145 145 145 0 360
50A 185 185 185 0 360
65A 230 230 230 0 360
80A 265 265 265 0 360
100A 345 345 345 0 360
125A 420 420 420 0 360
150A 560 560 560 0 360
200A 750 750 750 0 360
Bending Spring Back and Elongation File

The Bending Spring Back and Elongation file is used to store the spring back and
elongation for a given pipe material. The amount of spring back and elongation are
determined based on the pipe size, bend radius and bend angle.
Note: The Bending Spring Back and Elongation file units of measurement must be
the same as those in the Pipe Outer Diameter file.
The Bending Spring Back file format is described in the next table.
RADIUS Bend radius.
ANGLE Bend angle in degree.
SPRING_BACK_LEN Spring back length.
ELONGATION_LENGTH Elongation Length.
Example: Bending Spring Back and Elongation File

Default Path
<ProE load
point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/bending_spring_back_elongation/be
nding_spring_back_elongation_steel.ptd
SIZE RADIUS ANGLE SPRING_BACK_LEN ELONGATION_LEN
15A 100 65 1 0
45
SIZE RADIUS ANGLE SPRING_BACK_LEN ELONGATION_LEN
15A 100 75 1 0
15A 100 90 2 2
32A 135 5 0 0
32A 135 45 1 1
40A 145 45 1 1
40A 145 90 5 4
80A 265 10 0 0
80A 265 90 8 9
100A 345 5 0 0
200A 750 20 1 0
Bend Machine File

The Bend Machine file defines bend manufacturing information for a particular
bending machine. The Bend Machine file is associated with the pipe material codes in
the Pipe Manufacture Directory file. This material code is associated with the Pipe
Master Catalog file through the Piping Master Catalog Directory file.
Pro/PIPING retrieves the start, middle, and end clamp lengths from the Bending
Machine file. This data is based on pipe size and is used during bend creation and
design rule checking.
Note: The Bend Machine file units of measurement must be the same as those in the
Pipe Outer Diameter file.
The following examples illustrate bend creation:
Example 1: Only One Bend in a Pipe Spool
1 Start segment length
46
2 Bending start
3 Bend radius
4 End segment length
Example 2: More Than One Bend in a Pipe Spool
1 Start segment length
2 Bending start
3 Bend radius
4 Middle segment length
5 End segment length
The Bending Machine file format is described in the next table.
FIELD NAME DESCRIPTION
START_CLAMP_LEN Minimum clamp length required before the first bend of the
pipe spool.
Design rule: The length of the start segment should be

equal or longer than this value.
MID_CLAMP_LEN Minimum clamp length required between two bends of the

pipe spool.
Design rule: The length of the middle segment should be

END_CLAMP_LEN Minimum clamp length after the last bend of the pipe spool.
Design rule: The length of the end segment should be

47
Example: Bend Machine File

Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/bend_machine/

bend_machine_one.ptd
SIZE START_CLAMP_LEN MID_CLAMP_LEN END_CALMP_LEN
½" 3.0
¾" 3.0
1" 3.0
1-1/2" 5.0
2" 5.8
3" 6.0
4" 10.5
6" 13.0
Miter File
The Miter file defines miter information for pipe sizes that are assigned to specific
pipe material codes. The pipe material codes are associated with the Pipe Master
Catalog file through the Piping Material file.
Pro/PIPING uses the Miter file to retrieve the miter radius, the minimum and
maximum miter angles, and the number of cuts. The pipeline size and the vertex
angle are used to select the miter type from the Miter file when you create miters.
Note: The vertex angle must be greater than the minimum miter angle
(MIN_ANGLE) and less than or equal to the maximum miter angle (MAX_ANGLE).
The miter types can be one cut, two cut, three cut, or four cut.
The miter radius and the number of cuts from the selected miter file are used to
create miters.
Note: The unit of measurement in the Miter file is defined using the Units System
Directory File.
The Miter file format is described in the next table.
RADIUS Radius of the miter
MIN_ANGLE Minimum miter angle
48
MAX_ANGLE Maximum miter angle
CUT_NUMBER Number of miter cuts
Example: Miter File

Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/miter/miter_steel.ptd
SIZE RADIUS MIN_ANGLE MAX_ANGLE CUT_NUMBER
250A 0 0 30 1
250A 267 30 60 2
250A 267 60 90 3
300A 0 0 30 1
300A 319 30 60 2
300A 319 60 90 3
350A 0 0 30 1
350A 356 30 60 2
350A 356 60 90 3
400A 0 0 30 1
400A 406 30 60 2
400A 406 60 90 3
450A 0 0 31 1
450A 457 30 60 2
450A 457 60 90 3
500A 0 0 31 1
500A 508 30 60 2
500A 508 60 90 3
49
End Compatibility File

The End Compatibility file defines all of the compatible pipe and fitting end types
used in piping design. Pro/PIPING uses this file to determine if two ends are
compatible and can be mated. End type compatibility is based on end types and
fitting ratings.
End Type Compatibility occurs during specification-driven pipeline creation, routing,
and fitting insertion.
The End Compatibility file format is described in the next table.
Field Name Description Mandatory
END_TYPE1 First pipe or fitting end type YES
RATING1 First fitting rating NO
END_TYPE2 Second pipe or fitting end type YES
RATING2 Second fitting rating NO
Note: You can define the End Compatibility file name by setting the
piping_end_compatibility_file configuration option (default is
piping_end_compatibility.ptd).
Example: End Compatibility File

Default Path
<ProE load
point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_end_compatibility.ptd
END_TYPE1 RATING1 END_TYPE2 RATING2
BE BW
BW BW
FF 150 GF 150
Insulation File
The Insulation file defines the insulation data for pipes and fittings. Pro/PIPING
retrieves the insulation material code and material thickness from the Insulation file
and uses this insulation data for use in insulation modeling and reporting.
50
The Insulation file format is described in the next table.
TYPE Insulation type.
Pro/PIPING supports the following insulation types:
o GENERAL
o TRACE_PIPE
Note: Only enter an insulation type in the first entry field

for each type.
CATEGORY Pro/PIPING accepts any of the Piping Master Catalog

Directory file categories.
MATL_CODE Insulation material code.
MATL_THK Insulation thickness.
Note: Required when the insulation material thickness is

applicable.
SIZE Pipe and fitting nominal diameter. Pro/PIPING uses this

data to apply the selected insulation (material type and
thickness) to the pipes and fittings.
STOCK_NO Stock number for the insulation material.
Example: Insulation File

Default Path
<ProE load
point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/insulation/general_fitting.ptd
TYPE CATEGORY SIZE MATL_CODE MATL_THK STOCKNO
GENERAL PIPE 32A MWCOVER 30
PIPE 40A MWCOVER 30
PIPE 50A MWCOVER 30
PIPE 65A MWCOVER 30
PIPE 80A MWCOVER 30
PIPE 100A MWCOVER 30
51
TYPE CATEGORY SIZE MATL_CODE MATL_THK STOCKNO
PIPE SWIRE
PIPE BOND
PIPE GCLOTH
BEND TAPE
ELBOW TAPE
FLANGE MWCOVER 25
FLANGE GCLOTH
FLANGE GYARN
FLANGE SHOOK
VALVE MWCOVER 25
VALVE GCLOTH
VALVE GYARN
VALVE SHOOK
Tip: Pipe Insulation Definition

When you define pipe insulation, start from the object being insulated and work
outward. Define each insulation material part, one by one, in the radius direction.
The following diagram illustrates the insulation definition process:
52
Pipe
Insulation: Mineral wool cover/provision refrigeration pipe cover
Steel wire
Bond
Cloth: Glass cloth/galvanized steel
Insulation define direction
Appearance Map File

The Piping Appearance Map Master Catalog (MCAT) file archives all of the colors used
during piping design. Click View > Color and Appearance to create or modify
colors.
You assign colors to specifications during Specification Directory file creation and
modification.
You can define the Appearance Map file name by setting the
piping_appearance_map_file configuration option (default is
piping_appearance.map).
Combined Size Code File

The combined size code file defines combined size codes for pipes and fittings of
various combinations of sizes. You can use the combined size code to define the
stock number format for pipes and fittings that represent all combinations of sizes.
The Combined Size Code file format is described in the next table.
Field Name Definition
SIZE Size of the pipe or the inlet size of

the fitting
NSIZE New size or the outlet size of the

fitting
BSIZE Branch size or branch let size of the

fitting
COMBINED_SIZE_CODE Combined size code that represents

a combination of sizes
Pro/PIPING, by default, uses the size code specified in the default combined size
code file for all the pipes and fittings.
53
Example: Combined Size Code File

Default Path
<ProE load
point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/pipeod/combined_size_code.ptd
SIZE NSIZE BSIZE COMBINED_SIZE_CODE
100A 100
100A 50A A09
100A 100A 65A 010
Note:
• The pipes and fittings in the first row of the previous table have only one size.
Therefore, no values are specified for NSIZE and BSIZE.
• A REDUCER fitting having main size 100A and new size 50A can be represented
by a combined size code A09. This combined size code represents the size
combination 100A x 50A. Because the combined size code such as A09 is user-
defined, it may not have any visual relation to the actual fitting size combination.
• A TEE fitting with a branch size of 65A is represented by a combined size code
010 as shown in the third row of the previous table.
Tip: Defining Size Codes

Pro/PIPING uses the following rules to assign size codes while defining the material
classification code format and the stock number format for pipes, fittings, and
assembly fitting records in the Auto-Selection files:
• The combined size code defined in SIZE_CODE_FILE that is specified in the Piping
Master Catalog Directory file is used to represent keyword COMBINED_SIZE_CODE.
• The size code defined in PIPE_OD_FILE that is specified in the Piping Master
Catalog Directory file is used to represent keywords such as SIZE_CODE,
NSIZE_CODE, and BSIZE_CODE.
Units System File

The Units System file specifies the units system that can be used for the various
parameter values in the piping data files. You can define the Units System file using
the UNITS_SYSTEM_DIC_FILE configuration option. The default file is
piping_units_system_dic_file.ptd. The units system defined in standard
Pro/ENGINEER is used to specify units in the piping data files.
54
The Unit System file format is described in the next table.
FILE Data file name
PRO_UNIT_SYS Pro/ENGINEER units system used for

the data file
Pro/PIPING supports the following

predefined Pro/ENGINEER units
system:
o PROE_DEF—Inch Lbm Second
o CGS—Centimeter Gram Second
o FPS—Foot Pound Second
o IPS—Inch Pound Second
o MKS—Meter Kilogram Second
o MMKS—Millimeter Kilogram
Second
o MMNS—Millimeter Newton
Second
Note: Pro/PIPING also uses the

other user-defined Pro/ENGINEER
units systems.
Example: Units System File

Default Path
<ProE load
point>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_units_system_dic_file.ptd
File PRO_UNIT_SYS
pipeod/od_steel MMKS
pipeod/od_copper MMKS
pipeod/od_albrass-nicu MMKS
pipethk/thk_copper MMKS
pipethk/thk_steel MMKS
pipethk/thk_sus MMKS
55
File PRO_UNIT_SYS
bend/bend_albs MMKS
bend/bend_copper MMKS
bend/bend_steel MMKS
miter/miter_steel MMKS
insulation/exhaust MMKS
insulation/general MMKS
insulation/general_fitting MMKS
insulation/sweat MMKS
insulation/trace_pipe MMKS
piping_material MMKS
bend_machine/bend_machine MMKS
bend_machine/bend_springback_elong_steel MMKS
piping_manufacture_dir MMKS
Project Data Files
About Project Data Files

Project Data files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all project specific design
information. You create Project Data files when you set up Specification-Driven
Piping for each piping project.
To set up Specification-Driven Piping, you must define each piping specification and
assign piping data to them using the Define Piping Specification dialog box
(PIPING > Set Up > Spec DB). Pro/PIPING writes this piping data to the following
Project Data files:
• Specification Directory Files—Store all piping specifications, mnemonics,
colors, layers, insulation codes, and assigned Auto-Selection files that you
selected for a piping project.
• Auto-Selection Files—Contain all pipes, fittings, bends, miters, and assembly

fittings that you selected for a piping project. Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from
the Master Catalog (MCAT) files.
• Insulation Directory Files—Contain all insulation files, insulation codes, and

colors that you selected for a piping project. Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from
the Master Catalog (MCAT) files.
56
The Fitting Category Map Files are Project Data files in which you assign fitting
categories to Fitting Category buttons in the Insert Fitting and Insert Group
Fitting dialog boxes. These buttons allow you to easily access all fittings for the
selected pipeline specification during fitting insertion.
How Project Data Files Work

As you design a piping project and select piping specifications, Pro/PIPING uses the
Project Data files to retrieve the piping data that you assigned to each specification
and dynamically populates the current dialog box. This simplifies the piping design
process.
For example, before you begin designing your piping project, you set up
Specification-Driven Piping. You assign piping data to piping specification records
A7A, 12A, and 14C. Pro/PIPING retrieves the data from the Master Catalog (MCAT)
files and saves the records in the Project Data files. As you create the pipeline or
insert a fitting for specification 12A, only the piping data that you assigned to the
specification 12A record becomes available and populates the dialog box. All other
data remains archived.
Note: Pro/PIPING saves all Project Data files in one directory. You can change this
directory by setting the piping_project_data_dir configuration option.
About Specification Directory Files

Specification Directory files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all piping
specifications for a piping project. You create Specification Directory files when you
set up Specification-Driven Piping for each piping project.
To create a Specification Directory file, you define all piping specification records by
assigning the following data using the Define Piping Specification dialog box:
• Specification—All project specification names for a piping project.
• Mnemonic—Fluid or piping system assigned to each specification.
• Color—Color assigned to each specification. Pro/PIPING retrieves colors from the

Piping Appearance Map Master Catalog (MCAT) file.
• Layer—Layer assigned to each specification.
• Auto-Selection File—Auto-Selection file assigned to each specification. Auto-

Selection files store all pipe, fitting, and assembly fitting data that you assigned
for each specification record.
• Insulation Code—Insulation code assigned to each specification. The insulation

code points to the Insulation Directory file. This file stores the insulation data that
you assigned to a specification.
57
How Specification Directory Files Work

Pipeline Creation
After you open the Create Pipeline dialog box (PIPING > Pipeline >
Create/Route), Pro/PIPING retrieves all piping specifications from the Specification
Directory file. You select a specification and Pro/PIPING retrieves the specification
name, mnemonic, color, and layer from the Specification Directory file for the
selected specification. This file also directs Pro/PIPING to the Auto-Selection and
Insulation Directory files where Pro/PIPING retrieves the pipe, fitting, and insulation
data that you assigned to the specification. Pro/PIPING populates the Create
Pipeline dialog box with this data.
You select the piping data needed and click to create the pipeline. Pro/PIPING
copies the selected piping data to the linestock and insulation features, and opens
the ROUTE PIPE submenu. You can begin to route the pipeline.
Fitting Insertion
After you select a pipeline and insertion point, Pro/PIPING retrieves the piping data
from the Specification Directory file. This data includes the specification name and
the pipe size from the pipeline. The piping data directs Pro/PIPING to the Auto-
Selection file where Pro/PIPING retrieves the fittings that you assigned to the
specification. Pro/PIPING populates the appropriate fitting insertion dialog boxes with
this data.
You select a fitting with the Fitting Category buttons. After you click a button,
Pro/PIPING retrieves only the fittings (in the category) that you assigned to the
Auto-Selection file for that specification.
For example, you click PIPING > Fitting > Insert and select the pipeline for
specification 12A. You select the valve fitting category button to select a valve fitting.
Pro/PIPING retrieves all valve fittings that you assigned to the specification 12A
Auto-Selection file (12a_asfile.ptd). After you select the valve fitting, click to
insert it.
The following table describes the Specification Directory file format:
Field Name Description Required
SPEC Specification name. YES
MNEMONIC Mnemonic name (system or fluid). NO
COLOR Color name. YES
LAYER Layer name - Maximum 31 NO

characters.
AUTO_SELECT_FILE Auto-Selection File name assigned to YES

each specification. Points to the Auto-
Selection File.
58
Field Name Description Required
INS_CODE Insulation code assigned to each NO

specification. Points to the Insulation
Directory File.
Note: You can define the Specification Directory file name by setting the
piping_spec_dir_file configuration option (default is piping_spec_dir.ptd).
Example: Specification Directory File

Default Path:
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/sample_project/piping_specs_dir.ptd
SPEC MNEMONIC COLOR LAYER AUTO_SELECT_FILE INS_CODE
A7A WC YELLOW a7a_layer a7a_asfile ES
B7A HC BLUE b7a_layer b7a_asfile EH
D2B MAGENTA d2b_layer d2b_asfile EK
To Create a Specification Directory File

Note: Because Pro/PIPING requires that you select an Auto-Selection file for each
specification record (in the Specification Directory file), you must create the Auto-
Selection files before you define the specification records.
1. Create or open a piping an assembly.
2. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu appears.
3. Click Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens.
4. Click to create a new file. The New File dialog box opens.
5. Under Type, select Spec Directory File and enter a file name. This file will
contain all specifications for the entire piping project. It is recommended that you
use a descriptive file name such as project_name_specs.ptd.
6. Click to open the file. Pro/PIPING displays the file name in the border next to
Specification Directory File. You can begin to define a specification record.
7. Under Define Record, enter a piping specification name (required). The

Specification box lists all specification records in the current Specification
Directory file.
8. Type a mnemonic (optional). The Mnemonic box lists each mnemonic assigned
to a specification record in the current Specification Directory file. If you assign a
mnemonic, Pro/PIPING assigns the selected color to both the specification and
the mnemonic.
59
9. Type a layer name in the Layer box for specification and mnemonic (optional).
10. Select a color (required). Colors can be assigned to the specification and
mnemonic. The Color box lists all colors stored in the Piping Appearance Map
(MCAT) File. You can define new colors (View > Color and Appearance).
11. Select an Auto-Selection file (required). Click to open the Select Auto
Selection File dialog box. Select an Auto-Selection file and double-click. The
selected file populates the Auto Selection box. The current directory is based on
the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option.
12. Do one of the following:
o Select the Insulation Code check box to assign an insulation code to the
current specification record (optional). The Insulation Code box lists all
insulation codes in the Insulation Directory Project Data file.
o Clear the Insulation Code check box and make the insulation codes
unavailable to the specification.
13. Click to add the new specification record to the Specification Directory file.
Pro/PIPING lists the record under Select Record.
14. Click to save the file. The current directory is based on the directory path in
the piping_project_data_dir configuration option.
15. Click File > Exit.
About Auto-Selection Files

Auto-Selection files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store subsets of data that you
select from the Master Catalog (MCAT) files. You create an Auto-Selection file for
each project specification record (Specification Directory file) by using the Define
Piping Specification dialog box.
Auto-Selection files allow Pro/PIPING to retrieve only the piping data that you
assigned to a specification. Each Auto-Selection file contains the following data:
• Pipe Data—Pipe categories, sizes, schedules, end types, material codes, Pipe
MCAT file names, and stock numbers. Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from the
appropriate MCAT files and saves it in pipe records that you define.
• Fitting Data—Fitting selection names, categories, sizes, end types, ratings,

material codes, bolt nut codes, fitting MCAT file names, and stock numbers.
Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from the appropriate MCAT files and saves it in
fitting records that you define.
• Assembly Fitting Data—Assembly fitting selection names, sizes, configurations,

and stock numbers. Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from the appropriate MCAT
files and saves it in assembly fitting records that you define.
60
Note: After you create an Auto-Selection file, you must assign it to the
corresponding specification record (in the Specification Directory file) using the
Define Piping Specification dialog box (Auto-Selection box).
For example, you assign the Auto-Selection file created for specification 11C
(11c_asfile.ptd) to the specification 11C record in the Specification Directory file.
This allows the Specification Directory file to direct Pro/PIPING to the correct Auto-
Selection file.
How Auto-Selection Files Work

After you select a specification for pipeline creation or select a pipeline for fitting
insertion, Pro/PIPING retrieves the specification data from the Specification Directory
file. The Specification Directory file also directs Pro/PIPING to the appropriate Auto-
Selection file to retrieve the pipe, fitting, and assembly fitting data.
Pro/PIPING retrieves the Auto-Selection piping data from the pipe, fitting, and
assembly fitting records that you defined for each specification. This data populates
appropriate dialog boxes.
Auto-Selection Files simplify the piping process and reduce design error by making
available only a subset of the Master Catalog file piping data.
The following table describes the Auto-Selection File format:
CATEGORY Pipe or fitting category
SNAME Fitting selection name
SIZE Pipe or fitting inlet nominal size
NSIZE Fitting outlet nominal size
BSIZE Fitting branch outlet nominal size
SCH_RATE Pipe schedule or fitting rating
MATL_CODE Pipe or fitting material code
MCAT_FILE Master Catalog (MCAT) file name
STOCKNO Pipe or fitting stock number
MCCS_CODE Pipe or fitting Material Classification Code
CODE Fitting code—Indicates how a certain fitting is to be

inserted
BOLT_NUT_CODE Bolt and Nut Code for the fitting
61
Example: Auto-Selection File

Default Path:
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/sample_project/ms_asfile.ptd
CATE- S SIZE N B SCH_ MATL_ MCAT_ STOCK MCCS_ CODE BOLT_

GORY NAME SIZE SIZE RATE CODE FILE NO CODE NUT_
CODE
PIPE 10A 40 AB pipe/p PIPEA 311A PIPE

ipe_st B40PE B4001
eel -010 0

ipe_st B40PE B4001
eel -015 5

ipe_st B40PE B4002
eel -020 0

ipe_st B40PE B4002
eel -025 5

ipe_st B40PE B4003
eel -032 2

ipe_st B40PE B4004
eel -040 0

ipe_st B40PE B4005
eel -050 0

ipe_st B40PE B4006
eel -065 5

ipe_st B40PE B4008
eel -080 0

ipe_st B40PE B4010
62

CODE
eel -100 0

ipe_st B40PE B4012
eel -125 5

ipe_st B40PE B4015
eel -150 0

ipe_st B40PE B4020
eel -200 0

ipe_st B40PE B4025
eel -250 0
BEND 40 AB bend/ BEND

bend_
steel
MITER 40 AB miter/ MITE

miter_ R
steel
BRAN BRA 15 40 AA fitting/ BRAN 357A BRAN

CH N A tee_st AA40B A4001 CH
raight W-015 5
_bw_s
teel

raight W-020 0
_bw_s
teel

raight W-025 5
_bw_s
teel
63

CODE
BRAN BRA 32 20A 40 AA fitting/ BRAN 357A BRAN

CH N A tee_re AA40B A4003 CH_R
ducin W- 2020 EDU
g_bw 032X0 CING
_steel 20

CH N A tee_re AA40B A4005 CH_R
ducin W- 0040 EDU
g_bw 050X0 CING
_steel 40

CH N 0A tee_re AA40B A4015 CH_R
ducin W- 0080 EDU
g_bw 150X0 CING
_steel 80
BRAN OLE 20 15A 5 AA fitting/ OLETA 357A BRAN

CH_ T A weldol A5BW- A5020 CH_L
LET et 015 ET

LET et 015 ET

LET et 020 ET
ELBO ELB 50 40 AA fitting/ ELBO 351A ELBO

W OW4 A elbow W45LR A4005 W
5LR _45lo AA40B 0
ng_b W-050
w_ste
el

W OW4 A elbow W45LR A4006 W
5LR _45lo AA40B 5
ng_b W-065
w_ste
el
64

CODE

W OW9 0A elbow W90LR A4020 W
0LR _90lo AA40B 0
ng_b W-200
w_ste
el
FLAN NEC 15 30 AA fitting/ NECK 33AA FLAN CFA

GE KFL A flange FLANG 30015 GE
ANG _neck EAA30
E _rf FLRF-
015
FLAN NEC 20 30 AA fitting/ NECK 33AA FLAN CFA

GE KFL A flange FLANG 30020 GE
ANG _neck EAA30
E _rf FLRF-
020
FLAN SLIP 10 20 AA fitting/ SLIPFL 33AA FLAN CFB

GE FLA A flange ANGE 20010 GE
NGE _slip AA20F
LRF-
010

GE FLA A flange ANGE 20015 GE
NGE _slip AA20F
LRF-
015

GE FLA 0A flange ANGE 20200 GE
NGE _slip AA20F
LRF-
200

GE FLA 0A flange ANGE 20250 GE
NGE _slip AA20F
LRF-
250
GENE BFL 10 5 AA fitting/ BFLAN 33AA INLIN CFC

ANG flange GEAA5
65

CODE
RAL E A _blan FLFF- 5010 E

k 010
GENE BFL 15 5 AA fitting/ BFLAN 33AA INLIN CFC

RAL ANG A flange GEAA5 5015 E
E _blan FLFF-
k 015
GASK GAS 10 20 AG fitting/ GASK 34AG GASK

ET KET A gaske ETAG2 20010 ET
t_slip 0GKFF
-010
GASK GAS 15 20 AG fitting/ GASK 34AG GASK

ET KET A gaske ETAG2 20015 ET
t_slip 0GKFF
-015
REDU CRE 20 15A 40 AA fitting/ CRED 356A INLIN

CER D A red_c AA40B A4002 E_RE
oncen W- 0015 DUCI
tric_b 020X0 NG
w_ste 15
el
REDU CRE 25 15A 40 AA fitting/ CRED 356A INLIN

CER D A red_c AA40B A4002 E_RE
oncen W- 5015 DUCI
tric_b 025X0 NG
w_ste 15
el
REDU ERE 25 200 40 AA fitting/ ERED 356A INLIN

CER D 0A A red_e AA40B A4025 E_RE
ccentr W- 0200 DUCI
ic_bw 250X2 NG
00
VALV GAT 50 20 AA fitting/ GATE 322A INLIN CFD

E E A vl_gat AA20F A2005 E
e_flrf LRF- 0
050

vl_gat AA20F A2006
66

CODE
E E A e_flrf LRF- 5 E
065

E E A vl_gat AA20F A2008 E
e_flrf LRF- 0
080
JOINT COU 25 40 AA fitting/ COUP 354A INLIN

PLIN A coupli LINGA A4002 E_JOI
G ng_sw A40S 5 NT
_steel W-025

G ng_sw A40S 2 NT
_steel W-032

G ng_sw A40S 0 NT
_steel W-040
ANGL ANG 15 10 AA fitting/ ANGL 322A COR CFL

E_VAL LE_ A vl_an E_VAL A1001 NER
VE VAL gle_flf VEAA1 5
VE f 0FF-
015
ANGL ANG 20 10 AA fitting/ ANGL 322A COR CFL

E_VAL LE_ A vl_an E_VAL A1002 NER
VE VAL gle_flf VEAA1 0
VE f 0FF-
020
ASSE DRA 15A BRAN DRAIN ASSE

MBLY IN_A ,NIPP _A-015 MBLY
LE,G
ATE,
NIPPL
E
ASSE DRA 20A BRAN DRAIN ASSE

MBLY IN_A ,NIPP _A-020 MBLY
LE,
67

CODE
GATE
,NIPP
LE
To Create an Auto-Selection File

Note: Because Pro/PIPING requires that you select an Auto-Selection file for each
specification record (in the Specification Directory file), you must create Auto-
Selection files before defining the specification records. You must also create at least
one Auto-Selection record in order to create an Auto-Selection file.
5. Under Type, select Auto-Selection File and type a file name. This file will
contain all pipe and fitting data assigned to one piping specification. It is highly
recommended that you use a file name that includes the file descriptor. For
example, <specification or mnemonic name>_asfile.ptd.
Auto-Selection File.
7. Under Auto-Selection File, select the Pipe, Fitting, and Assembly (fitting)
tabs to define these records for each specification.
To Create an Auto-Selection Pipe Record

Note:
• You must read To Create an Auto-Selection File to follow the steps below.
• The Pipe tab (Define Piping Specification dialog box) allows you to define all
pipe records for Auto-Selection files. You assign an Auto-Selection file to a piping
specification in the Specification Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the Auto-
Selection file pipe data to create pipelines.
To define an Auto-Selection pipe record, select pipe data from the boxes under
Define Record.
1. Under Select Pipe, select a pipe category (required). The Category box lists all
pipe categories retrieved from the Piping Master Catalog (MCAT) Directory file.
68
2. Select a Pipe MCAT file (required). The Master Catalog box lists all Pipe MCAT
files assigned to the selected pipe category in the Piping MCAT Directory file.
Pro/PIPING retrieves the file names from the Piping MCAT Directory file.
3. Select a pipe material code (required). The Material Code box lists all pipe
material codes assigned to the selected Pipe MCAT file and defined in the Piping
Material MCAT file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the material codes from the Piping
Material MCAT file.
4. Select a pipe schedule (required). The Schedule box lists all pipe schedules
assigned to the selected Pipe MCAT file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the schedules from
the Pipe MCAT file.
5. Select a pipe end type (required). The End Type box lists all pipe end types
assigned to the selected Pipe MCAT file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the end types from
the Pipe MCAT file.
a. You can confirm or change the pipe sizes assigned to the selected Pipe
MCAT file (optional).Click next to Sizes. The PIPE Size Table dialog
box opens. Pro/PIPING lists all pipe sizes assigned to the selected Pipe
MCAT file. Each pipe size contains a check box to indicate selection status.
Pro/PIPING selects all sizes by default. Clear each check box to make a pipe
size unavailable from the pipe record. You can click to reset the list to
the Pro/PIPING default selections.
b. Click to save all changes. The PIPE Size Table dialog box closes.
6. Select a stock number format for the pipe record (required). The Select Stock
Number Format box lists the stock number formats defined for the pipe records
in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING displays the pipe stock number
during information reporting.
Under Select Stock Number Format, perform the following tasks to select the
pipe stock number format:
a. Select the stock number format keywords. You can select Pro/PIPING
format keywords from the Keyword box, enter words or ASCII characters
required by your project, or choose a combination of both.
b. Select a delimiter. A delimiter separates areas in a listing. You can select a
delimiter from the Delimiter box or enter a new delimiter. Note that
delimiters must be enclosed with commas omitting any white space (,-,).
7. Select a material classification code (MCCS) format for the pipe record (optional).
The Select Material Classification Code Format box lists all material
classification code formats defined for the pipe records in the current Auto-
Selection file.
69
Under Select Material Classification Code Format, select an MCCS format as

follows:
a. Select the MCCS format keywords. You can select Pro/PIPING format
keywords from the Keyword box, enter words or ASCII characters required
by your project, or choose a combination of both.
8. Select either one or both of the following pipe corner type check boxes for the
pipe record (optional):
o Allow Bend—Enables corner bends for the selected pipe.
o Allow Miter—Allows mitered corners for the selected pipe.
9. Click to add the new pipe record to the Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING lists
the record under Select Record.
10. Click to save the Auto-Selection file. The current directory is based on the
directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option.
11. Repeat the above steps to define additional pipe records.
or
Click the Fitting tab to define all fitting records for the current Auto-Selection
file.
or
Click File > Exit.
To Create an Auto-Selection Fitting Record

Note:
• The Fitting tab (Define Piping Specification dialog box) allows you to define
all fitting records for Auto-Selection files. You assign an Auto-Selection file to a
piping specification in the Specification Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the
Auto-Selection file fitting data during fitting insertion.
To define an Auto-Selection fitting record, select the fitting data from the boxes
under Define Record.
1. Under Select Fitting, select a fitting category (required). The Category box lists
all fitting categories retrieved from the Piping Master Catalog (MCAT) Directory
file.
70
2. Select a Fitting MCAT file (required). The Master Catalog box lists all Fitting
MCAT files assigned to the selected fitting category in the Piping MCAT Directory
file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the file names from the Piping MCAT Directory file.
3. Select a fitting material code (required). The Material Code box lists all fitting
material codes assigned to the selected Fitting MCAT file and defined in the Piping
Material file.
4. Select a fitting rating (required). The Rating/Schedule box lists all fitting
ratings available in the selected Fitting MCAT file.
5. The End Type boxes list the first and second end type values available for the
selected fitting and defined in the respective master catalog file.
Note: The selection in the End Type boxes is based on the following:
o If the fitting master catalog specifies only one value for the first or the
second end type or both end types, the appropriate end type box displays
an end type value that you cannot modify.
o If the fitting master catalog specifies more than one value for the first,
second, or both end types, the appropriate end type boxes display a list of
the end type values. Select the required end types from the list.
o If the fitting master catalog does not specify any value for either the first or
the second end type, you cannot select any value for the corresponding end
type.
6. The Bolt Nut Code box lists the bolt nut codes available in the Bolt-Nut Selection
file. Select the bolt nut code to be assigned to the fitting from the list. Pro/PIPING
assigns the default bolt nut code that is specified to the selected fitting in the
Piping MCAT Directory File.
7. You can select the fittings based on their sizes from the selected Fitting MCAT file
(optional).
a. Click adjacent to Sizes. One of two Size Table dialog boxes opens
according to the type of fitting selected from the Master Catalog box.
Pro/PIPING lists all fitting sizes assigned to the selected Fitting MCAT file.
Each fitting size contains a check box to indicate selection status.
Pro/PIPING selects all sizes by default. Clear each check box to make a
fitting size unavailable from the fitting record. You can click to reset
the list to the Pro/PIPING default selections, which is based on all the
available sizes in the selected fitting MCAT file.
b. Click to save all changes. The Size Table dialog box closes.
8. Select a stock number format for the fitting record (required). The Select Stock
Number Format box lists all stock number formats defined for the fitting
records in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING displays the fitting stock
number during information reporting.
71
Under Select Stock Number Format, perform the following tasks to select the
fitting stock number format:
9. Select a material classification code (MCCS) format for the fitting record
(optional). The Select Material Classification Code Format box lists all material
classification code formats defined for the fitting records in the current Auto-
Selection file.
Under Select Material Classification Code Format, perform the following

tasks to select an MCCS format:
keywords from the Keyword box, enter new keywords unique to your
project, or choose a combination of both.
10. Under Specify Selection Name, enter a fitting selection name (required). The
Specify Selection Name box lists all selection names defined for the fitting
records in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING uses the fitting selection
names to populate the Selection Name boxes in the Insert Fitting and Insert
Group Fitting dialog boxes during fitting insertion.
Note: You can select or specify a new value using the Specify Selection Name
list only if the required fitting selection name is not specified in the Piping MCAT
Directory file.
11. Click to add the new fitting record to the Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING lists
the record under Select Record.
13. Repeat the above steps to define additional fitting records.
or
Click the Assembly tab to define all assembly fitting records for the current
Auto-Selection file.
or
Click File > Exit.
72
To Create an Auto-Selection Assembly Fitting Record

Note:
• The Assembly tab (Define Piping Specification dialog box) enables you to
define all assembly fitting records for Auto-Selection files. You assign an Auto-
Selection file to a piping specification in the Specification Directory file.
Pro/PIPING retrieves the Auto-Selection file assembly fitting data during fitting
insertion.
• An assembly fitting is a group of fittings that are inserted as one unit.
To define an assembly fitting record, select assembly fitting data from the boxes
under Define Record.
1. Under Select Assembly, select the fittings that make up an assembly fitting
(required). From the Fitting Selection Name box, select each fitting name
according to its sequence in the assembly, beginning with the branch fittings. For
example, BRAN, NIPPLE, GATE, NIPPLE. The Fitting Selection Name box lists
all fittings in the fitting records (Fitting tab) for the current Auto-Selection file.
Pro/PIPING populates the Configuration box with the assembly fitting

configuration (the fitting names and assembly sequence). The Configuration
box lists all configurations defined for the assembly fitting records.
2. You can confirm or change the assembly fitting sizes (optional). Note that
Pro/PIPING determines assembly fitting sizes according to the pipe sizes defined
in the pipe records (Pipe tab) for the current Auto-Selection file.
a. Click next to Sizes. The Size Table dialog boxes opens. Pro/PIPING
lists all pipe sizes assigned to the pipe records (Pipe tab). Pro/PIPING
retrieves the pipe sizes from the current Auto-Selection file. Each pipe size
contains a check box to indicate selection status. Pro/PIPING selects all
sizes by default. Clear each check box to make a size unavailable from the
assembly fitting record. You can click to reset the list to the
Pro/PIPING default selections.
b. Click to confirm all changes. The Size Table dialog box closes.
3. Select a stock number format for the assembly fitting record (required). The
Select Stock Number Format box lists all stock number formats defined for the
assembly fitting records in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING displays
assembly fitting stock numbers during information reporting.
Under Select Stock Number Format, perform the following tasks to select an
assembly fitting stock number format:
73

4. Select a material classification code (MCCS) format for the assembly fitting
record (optional). The Select Material Classification Code Format box lists all
material classification code formats defined for the assembly fitting records in the
current Auto-Selection file.
Under Select Material Classification Code Format, perform the following

tasks to select an MCCS format:
keywords from the Keyword box, enter words or ASCII characters required
by your project, or choose a combination of both.
5. Under Select Selection Name, enter an assembly fitting selection name
(required). The Select Selection Name box lists all selection names defined for
the assembly fitting records in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING uses
the assembly fitting selection names to populate the Selection Name boxes in
the Insert Fitting dialog box.
6. Click to add the new assembly fitting record to the Auto-Selection file.
8. Repeat the above steps to define additional assembly fitting records.
or
Click File > Exit.
Preview Fitting Graphics

You can preview selected fittings as you define a fitting record (Fitting tab) for the
current Auto-Selection file. After you select a Fitting Master Catalog file, click the
Preview Fitting Graphics band located at the bottom of the Define Piping
Specification dialog box. The preview panel expands and displays the selected
fitting. You can spin, zoom, and move the fitting in the panel. Pro/PIPING displays
each fitting selection dynamically as you make selections.
Pro/PIPING Component Window

You can also preview fittings in the Component Window. Select the Preview in
Separate Window check box in the preview panel and Pro/PIPING displays the
fitting (and the file name) in the Component Window.
74
Note: You must clear the Preview in Separate Window check box to close the
window. Clicking File > Exit from the separate window closes Pro/ENGINEER.
Size Tables
Pro/PIPING uses size tables to list all pipe and fitting sizes in the selected Pipe or
Fitting Master Catalog (MCAT) file. You select an MCAT file (in the Define Piping
Specification dialog box) to define a pipe or fitting Auto-Selection file record.
Pro/PIPING opens two different size tables according to the following selections:
Pipes and Standard Fittings
Size Table for a Pipe Size Table for a Flange Fitting
The Size Table format is discussed in the next table.
Left Section Right Section
Lists all sizes defined in the MCAT Displays the size selection status
file that you selected. with a check box. Pro/PIPING
selects all sizes by default. You can
clear a check box to make the size
unavailable.
Size Transitional Fittings (Reducers, Branch Reducer Fittings, and so on)
75
The following table describes the Size Table format above:
Left Section Right Section
Lists all main sizes defined in the Displays the branch or new size
MCAT File that you selected. selection status with a check box.
Pro/PIPING selects all branch or
new sizes by default. You can clear
a check box to make the size
unavailable.
In the above example, there are

two reducer fitting sizes with the
main size 32A:
• 32A (main size) to 20A (new size)
• 32A (main size) to 25A (new size)
Format Keywords
The following tables describe the stock number and material classification code
(MCCS) format keywords for pipes, fittings, and assembly fitting records in the Auto-
Selection files.
76
Pipes
Keywords Description
MATL_CODE Pipe material code
MCAT_FILE Pipe Master Catalog file name
END_TYPE Pipe end type
COMBINED_SIZE_CODE Combined size code for a size combination
SIZE_CODE Size code for pipe nominal diameter
Fittings
SNAME Fitting selection name
MATL_CODE Fitting material code
MCAT_FILE Fitting Master Catalog file name
SCH_RATE Fitting rating
END_TYPE Fitting inlet end type
NEND_TYPE Fitting outlet end type
SIZE Fitting inlet size
NSIZE Fitting outlet size
BSIZE Fitting branch outlet size
SIZE_CODE Size code for fitting inlet size
NSIZE_CODE Size code for fitting outlet size
BSIZE_CODE Size code for fitting branch outlet size
77
Assembly Fittings
SNAME Assembly fitting selection name
SIZE Assembly fitting size
SIZE_CODE Size code for the assembly fitting size
About Insulation Directory Files

Insulation Directory files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all insulation data for
a piping project. To create an Insulation Directory file, define insulation records by
assigning the following insulation data using the Define Piping Specification dialog
box:
• Insulation codes—All insulation codes assigned to a piping project. Pro/PIPING
retrieves these codes from the Insulation Directory file and uses them to identify
each insulation type during the insulation modeling and reporting process. You
assign each code to an Insulation Master Catalog (MCAT) file.
• Insulation MCAT file names—All Insulation file names stored in the Piping
MCAT Directory file. These file names point to the Insulation MCAT files.
Pro/PIPING retrieves insulation data for pipe and fittings from these files.
• Insulation colors—Color name for each quilt representation of insulation. You

can assign a color to each insulation code. Pro/PIPING retrieves colors from the
Piping Appearance Map (MCAT) File.
After you create an Insulation Directory file, you can assign an insulation code to
each project specification record (Specification Directory file) using the Define
Piping Specification dialog box (Insulation Code box).
How Insulation Directory Files Work

After you select a specification for pipeline creation, Pro/PIPING retrieves the
specification data including the insulation code from the Specification Directory file.
The insulation code directs Pro/PIPING to the appropriate insulation record (in the
Insulation Directory file) where Pro/PIPING retrieves the insulation color and the
Insulation MCAT file name.
The Insulation file name points Pro/PIPING first to the Piping MCAT Directory file and
then to the Insulation MCAT file. Insulation data is retrieved from both files.
Pro/PIPING copies the insulation data to the insulation features for insulation
modeling and reporting.
78
The following table describes the Insulation Directory file format:
INS_CODE Insulation code.
Pro/PIPING uses these codes to identify each insulation

type during the insulation modeling and reporting process.
INS_FILE Insulation MCAT file name.
COLOR Color name for each quilt representation of insulation.
Note: You can define the Insulation Directory file name by setting the
piping_insulation_dir_file configuration option.
Example: Insulation Directory File

Default Path
<Pro/E load point>/text/piping_data/sample_project/

piping_insulation_dir.ptd
INS_CODE INS_FILE COLOR
ES insulation/general_fitting Aqua
EH insulation/exhaust Violet
EN insulation/general_fitting Wheat
EK insulation/general_fitting Wheat
EC insulation/sweat Cyan
To Create an Insulation Directory File

5. Under Type, select Insulation Directory File and type a file name. This file will
contain the insulation data for the entire piping project. It is recommended that
you use a descriptive file name such as project_name_insulation_dir.ptd.
Insulation Directory File. Begin defining an insulation record.
79
7. Under Define Record, type an insulation code (required). The Insulation Code
box lists all insulation codes assigned to the insulation records in the current
Insulation Directory file.
8. Select an Insulation Master Catalog (MCAT) file (required). This step assigns an
Insulation file to an insulation code. The Insulation File box lists all Insulation
files defined in the Piping MCAT Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves all insulation
data from both MCAT files.
9. Select a color for the solid representation of the insulation (required). The
Insulation Color box lists all Pro/PIPING colors stored in the Piping Appearance
Map (MCAT) file. You can define new colors.
10. Click to add the new insulation record to the Insulation Directory file.
11. Click to save the Insulation Directory file. The current directory is based on
Note: To assign an insulation record to a project specification, select an insulation

code when you define a specification in the Specification Directory file.
To Modify Project Data Files

Note: Project Data files (Specification Directory, Auto-Selection, and Insulation
Directory files) contain piping records that you defined for specific piping projects.
You can modify these records using the following steps:
4. Click . The Open File dialog box opens. The current directory is based on
5. Double-click one of the following Project Data Files:
o Specification Directory file
o Auto-Selection file
o Insulation Directory file
Pro/PIPING displays the file name in the border next to the file type.
6. Under Select Record, select a record to modify. Note that for Auto-Selection
files, you must select the appropriate tab (Pipe, Fitting, or Assembly) before
selecting a record.
7. Under Define Record, modify the data in the appropriate boxes.
80
8. Click to add the changes to the selected record. Pro/PIPING either creates a
new record or modifies the existing record and displays all changes under Select
Record.
9. Click to save the file. The current directory is based on the directory path in
the piping_project_data_dir configuration option.
Deleting a Record
Under Select Record, select the record to delete. Click and follow steps 9 and
10 above.
About the Fitting Category Map File

The Fitting Category Map file is a Pro/TABLE (ASCII) file that maps each fitting
category to a fitting category icon file. Mapping the icon file enables you to select a
fitting category (icon) button in the Insert Fitting and Insert Group Fitting dialog
boxes and retrieve a list of fittings for the selected category and specification.
Pro/PIPING provides seven fitting category icons. You can design as many fitting
category icons as you need.
The Fitting Category Map file contains the following data:
• Icon Number—Orders the fitting category (icon) buttons under Fitting
Selection in the Insert Fitting and Insert Group Fitting dialog boxes. The
order begins from left to right beginning with the number 1.
• Icon Bitmap—Points Pro/PIPING to the icon graphics file.
• Fitting Category—Points Pro/PIPING to the Auto-Selection file to retrieve fitting

selection names.
Note: If the bitmap file is not of .bif extension, you must specify the appropriate
filename extension for that file in the fitting category map file.
• Valve Number—Specifies whether a valve number is required for the fittings

whose categories are specified under the FITTING_CATEGORY column in the
Fitting Category Map file.
You can assign and reassign fitting categories to icons at any time by mapping each
fitting category to an icon bitmap file and assigning an order number.
Note: Pro/PIPING groups all unmapped fitting categories in the General category
and icon.
81
How the Fitting Category Map File Works

After you select a pipeline and an insertion point for fitting insertion (PIPING >
Fitting > Insert), Pro/PIPING retrieves the specification data including the
specification name and pipe size from the pipeline. The specification name points
Pro/PIPING to the Auto-Selection file that you assigned to the specification (in the
Specification Directory file) and retrieves the data.
After Pro/PIPING populates either the Insert Fitting or Insert Group Fitting dialog
boxes with the data, you select a fitting category icon button to select all fitting
categories assigned to this icon (in the Fitting Category Map file). Pro/PIPING
retrieves the list of fitting selection names. This list contains only those fittings that
were assigned to those fitting categories in the Auto-Selection file for that
specification. You created this Auto-Selection file during Specification-Driven Piping
setup. You select a fitting and insert it.
For example, you click Fitting > Insert on the PIPING menu and select the
specification 12A pipeline and insertion point. Pro/PIPING populates the boxes under
Pipeline Selection. You select the valve category button under Fitting Selection.
Pro/PIPING retrieves the list of all valves for specification 12A and populates the
Selection Name box. This list was retrieved from the Auto-Selection file that you
created for specification 12A (12a_asfile.ptd). You select a fitting and click to
insert it.
The following table describes the Fitting Category Map file format:
Field Name Field Type Description
ICON_NUMBER Integer Icon number.
Icons are ordered from left to right under

Fitting Selection in the fitting insertion
dialog boxes. Ordering begins with the
number 1.
If more than 14 icons are displayed, a

scroll bar appears.
ICON_BITMAP Character Icon bit map file name
FITTING_CATEGORY Character Fitting category.
You can assign multiple categories using a

comma (,) as delimiter.
VALVE_NUMBER Character Valve number for the fitting category.

YES—Specifies that a valve number is
required for the fitting categories specified
using the FITTING_CATEGORY field.
NO—Specifies that a valve number is not
required for the fitting categories specified
using the FITTING_CATEGORY field.
82
Note: You can define the Fitting Category Map file name by setting the
piping_fitt_category_map_file configuration option.
Example: Fitting Category Map File

The following table describes the Pro/PIPING default Fitting Category Map file. Note
that the Fitting Category Icon column is for illustrative purposes only.
Default Path
<ProE load point>/text/piping_data/sample_project/

piping_fitt_category_map.ptd
ICON_NUMBER ICON_BITMAP FITTING_CATEGORY VALVE_NUMBER
1 fit_valve VALVE, YES

ANGLE_VALVE,
RELIEF_VALVE
2 fit_flange FLANGE NO
3 fit_elbow ELBOW NO
4 fit_branch BRANCH, NO
BRANCH_LET,
ELBOW_LET
5 fit_red REDUCER NO
6 fit_general GENERAL, GASKET NO
7 fit_assembly ASSEMBLY NO
To Map an Icon File

1. Locate the piping_fitt_category_map.ptd file. The Pro/PIPING default path is
<Pro/E load point>/text/piping_data/sample_project/
piping_fitt_category_map.ptd.
2. Open the file in a text editor.
3. Type the following data:
o Icon Number—Pro/PIPING orders the fitting category icons in two rows

containing seven icons per row. Ordering is from left to right beginning with
the number 1.
o Icon Bitmap—Bitmap file name for the fitting category icon.
o Fitting Category—Fitting category associated with the icon bitmap file.
Note: If the bitmap file is not of .bif extension, you must specify the
appropriate filename extension for that file in the fitting category map file.
83
4. Save the file.
Note: If you are mapping a new icon bitmap file, store the file in the Pro/PIPING
resource directory before you map it.
Fitting Categories
Pro/PIPING uses fitting categories for data retrieval. You can define Pro/PIPING
fitting categories as needed. Note that you must add each new fitting category to the
Piping Master Catalog (MCAT) Directory file and the Fitting Category Map (Project
Data) file. Refer to these topics for more information.
Pro/PIPING provides the following fitting categories:
Fitting Category Description
VALVE Valve, such as gate valve, globe valve, and

so on
ANGLE_VALVE Angle valve
RELIEF_VALVE Relief valve
FLANGE Flange
GASKET Gasket
ELBOW Elbow
ELBOW_LET Elbow olet
BRANCH Branch
BRANCH_LET Branch olet
GENERAL General fitting
ASSEMBLY Assembly fitting
Creating Fitting Category Icons

Pro/PIPING allows you to create new fitting category icons as needed. You can create
new icons with any graphics application that supports GIF or PCX formats. The
following Pro/PIPING icon conventions must be maintained:
File File File Icon Resource Location (Icon

Type Format Extension Size File Library)
(pixels)
Bitmap GIF, PCX .gif, 24 x 24 <ProE installation

.pcx path>/text/resource
84
After you create the icon files, store the files in the Pro/PIPING resource location and
map them to their appropriate fitting categories in the Fitting Category Map file. For
more information about mapping fitting category icon files, refer to the Fitting
Category Map file topics.
Fitting Library Files
About Fitting Library Files

Pro/PIPING supports fitting libraries for industrial piping based on the Japanese
Industrial Standard (JIS) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). The
various library parts and assemblies are created using the standard Pro/ENGINEER
features. However, these parts and assemblies are created based on a set of specific
library creation rules.
To Set Up a Library Component

The supplied fitting library is based on the Family Table parts.
1. You can expand the supplied library based on the library creation rules.
2. You can edit and expand the Master Catalog to include the Master Catalog
Directory (MCAT) information that is required by the library parts that you add.
3. You can generate a fitting library based on either the Family Table Parts or Family
Table Parts with associated accelerator parts or standalone parts.
Fitting Library Creation
About Creating Library Fitting Parts

Follow the general process when creating library fitting parts:
1. Create the fitting geometry.
2. Create the fitting ports.
3. Specify the inlet port.
4. Orient the stem axis.
5. Assign the fitting parameters.
6. Specify the mating plane
Fitting Library Creation Rules

The following are rules to follow when creating a library fitting:
• Rule 1—Create a fitting with a minimum of one or more ports.
• Rule 2—Make sure that the positive z-axis direction of every port in a fitting is
perpendicular to the fitting face at the respective port and oriented to point
outward from the fitting.
85
This rule applies to all fittings.
• Rule 3
o For In-line fittings, if there are two or more ports, the z-axes of two of the
ports must be collinear with the fitting local z-axis.
o For In-line Eccentric fittings, if there are two or more ports, they must be
parallel to the local z-axis. The inlet port should be located on the local z-
axis, and the outlet port should be offset along the local y-axis with its z-
axis parallel to the local z-axis.
o For Corner fittings, if there are two or more ports, you must include an
angle equal to the vertex angle where the fitting is inserted. The inlet port
should be located on the local z-axis.
• Rule 4—For Lateral fittings, the y-axis of the inlet port and the z-axis of the
lateral outlet port must include an angle equal to the lateral angle of the fitting.
o Locate the inlet port on the local z-axis.
o Locate the outlet port along the lateral axis that lies on the local z-y plane
of the fitting.
Local Coordinate System
A fitting local coordinate system is a conceptual coordinate system you use to define
and create a library part. The coordinate system of the inlet port of a library part
represents the fitting local coordinate system.
The local z-axis represents the fitting axis that is aligned with the pipeline segment
The local positive z-axis is perpendicular to the inlet face of the fitting and is oriented
to point outward of the fitting at the inlet port.
The local y-axis is used to define the Fitting Stem or Stem Axis. The Fitting Stem or
Stem Axis is an imaginary axis that is parallel to the local y-axis. The local y-axis is
the axis along which special graphical details are created for certain fittings during
their library part preparation.
The local positive y-axis is used to determine the default stem orientation of a fitting
Rules and Naming Conventions to Create Library Parts

• The system of units for a library part is determined based on the fitting library
standard. Ensure that all the library parts for a given standard are created using
the same system of units.
• Prepare template parts for each of the piping standards. Use these template parts
to create individual library parts for the respective piping standards.
• Delete all redundant features from the library part to create the geometry
efficiently.
86
• Follow the rules given below to define a Family Table for library parts:
o Insert the SIZE column after the Instance Name column.
o Insert the NEW_SIZE or the BRANCH_SIZE column, whichever is applicable,

after the SIZE column.
o All other columns that represent linear dimensions of the fitting must follow
the above columns in the Family Table.
o Create relations wherever possible to minimize the number of columns in

the Family Table.
o If the values remain constant in a particular column, delete such redundant

columns.
o Assign a descriptive name to all the Family Table column headings and
name it consistently across library parts.
o Create a fitting with consistent and uniform orientation.
o Optionally, create bolt holes for fitting libraries. To achieve a proper bolt hole
alignment between the various flanged fittings,
o The first bolt hole in all the flanged fittings must be located at the same
angular location with reference to the positive y-axis of the inlet port.
o Bolt holes on the flanged end must be symmetric about the y-axis of the
inlet port.
o Save the library part in the default view.
To Create a Template for a Library Part

1. Activate a new Pro/ENGINEER part.
2. Specify the required system of units.
3. Create the default datum planes.
4. Set the default orientation of the part to Isometric.
5. Create the FITTING_GEOMETRY, FITTING_DATUM, and FITTING_PORTS layers.

Make the FITTING_GEOMETRY and FITTING_DATUM layers invisible and the
FITTING_PORTS layer visible.
During the creation of the actual library part, the fitting solid features are
associated with the FITTING_GEOMETRY layer. The fitting inlet, fitting outlet, and
the branch ports are associated with the FITTING_PORTS layer. All other datum
features are associated with the FITTING_DATUM layer.
Tip: Creating Library Parts

The following are some best practices to accurately create library parts:
• Study the drawings and details accurately before you start modeling.
87
• Understand the design intent before you plan your work.
• Use a common configuration file to create different library parts.
• Use function keys to achieve consistency and speed.
• Copy features or use existing patterns instead of creating additional individual

features.
• Minimize the feature count as much as possible.
• Avoid creating solids that do not have any association with other solids during
any intermediate step of part creation.
• Avoid saving library parts with suppressed features.
• Group various features together and name the group accordingly.
• Ensure that no errors or warning messages appear when a feature is

regenerated.
Fitting Geometry
About Fitting Geometry
Fitting Geometry is created either as a part or an assembly of parts. The geometry of

the required fitting is created using the basic modeling features of Pro/ENGINEER.
The library fittings are created with sufficient geometric details to distinguish them
from each other.
Example: Fitting Geometry
The following example shows a simple geometry created for a gate valve using the
basic Pro/ENGINEER functions. The figure below shows details like the port
directions, and the fitting axis.
88
Fitting Ports
About Fitting Ports
A fitting port is a standard Pro/ENGINEER coordinate system feature (CSYS) on the

fitting. Its origin represents:
• The location at which a pipe is physically welded to a fitting, as in butt-welded or
branchlet fittings.
• The location up to which the pipe extends into the fitting, as in socket-welded
and screwed fittings.
• The location up to which the pipe extends inside a fitting, as in flange fittings.
• The location of a flange face that mates with another flange face.
89
To Create Fitting Ports
Fitting Port Creation for Branch Outlet Fittings
The branch outlet fitting must have an inlet port and outlet ports as shown in the
following figures.
The inlet port of the fitting is aligned with the surface of the main pipe segment as
follows:
• The z-axis of the outlet port of the fitting is aligned with the branch pipe
segment, if an existing junction is identified for the fitting insertion.
• In orthogonal branch outlet fittings, the z-axes of inlet and outlet ports are
parallel to each other. The non-orthogonal branch outlet fittings such as latrolets,
have an angle between the z-axes of the inlet and the outlet ports. Based on this,
lateral fittings are distinguished from other branch outlet fittings.
90
Port Location for Fittings with Butt Welded/Flanged Ends
In the following graphic, the arrow shows the pipe contact location.
For butt-welded fittings, the pipe is welded to the butt-welded ends of the fitting.
The fitting ports are located at the butt-welded ends as shown in the figure. If a
butt-welded fitting has two butt-welded ends along its local z-axis, then either end
can be defined as the inlet port.
For flanged fittings, the flanged face of the fitting mates with a matching gasket or a
suitable flanged face of another fitting. The fitting ports must be located at the
flanged face as shown in the figure. If a flanged fitting has two flanged ends along its
local z-axis, then either end can be defined as the inlet port. The positive z-axes of
the inlet and outlet ports are pointing outward of the fitting and are aligned to the
fitting local z-axis.
Note: The two ports need not be created in any particular sequence and their names
are user-definable. Of the two ports, one must be defined as the inlet port. By
convention, the port with the SIZE parameter is defined as the inlet port.
91
Port Location for Fittings with socket Welded/Threaded Ends
For fittings with socket-welded or threaded ends, the pipe extends up to the origin of
the port that represents the end of the socket or the threaded hole. The arrow in the
following figure points to the pipe contact location.
92
In the following figure, PORT1 is located on the inside face of the socket, and PORT0
(a flanged end) is located on the outside flange face. For threaded fittings, the pipe
is threaded up to the origin of the port that represents the end of the threaded hole
or socket.
Mandatory Port Requirements
Based on the fitting code, the mandatory port requirements for the various fittings
are as summarized:
Fitting Code Inlet Outlet Branch Typical Fitting

Port Port Port
INLINE YES YES NO Fittings with the

same inlet and
outlet sizes
(valves)
INLINE_REDUCING YES YES NO Inline fittings with

different inlet and
outlet sizes
(reducers)
93
Fitting Code Inlet Outlet Branch Typical Fitting

Port Port Port
INLINE_JOINT(i) YES YES NO Coupling
FLANGE(ii) YES YES NO Any flange
GASKET(ii) YES YES NO Any gasket
CORNER YES YES NO Any valve
CORNER_REDUCING YES YES NO Reducing elbows
CORNER_LET YES YES NO Any elbowlet
ELBOW(iii) YES YES NO Any elbow
BRANCH YES YES YES Straight tee
BRANCH_REDUCING YES YES YES Reducing tee
BRANCH_LET YES YES NO Weldolet
The following points must be noted about fitting codes and their insertion behavior:
• The INLINE_JOINT is a special fitting code that has the same fitting insertion
behavior as the INLINE code. Joint fittings such as couplings and sleeves must be
assigned this code. The code is used by the automatic joint fitting selection
functionality.
• The FLANGE and GASKET are special fitting codes that have the same fitting
insertion behavior as the INLINE code. Flange and gasket fittings such as a
weldneck flange, slip-on flange, or any type of gasket, must be assigned their
respective codes. The FLANGE and GASKET codes are used in the respective
automatic flange and gasket fitting selection functionality.
• The ELBOW is a special fitting code that has the same fitting insertion behavior as
the CORNER code. Elbow fittings such as 90 degree long/short radius and 45
degree long/short radius, must be assigned this code. This fitting code is used to
automatically select an elbow fitting and insert it as a trimmed elbow or, insert
elbows at all vertices of a pipeline with a single operation.
• The BRANCH_LET is a special fitting code for special branch outlet fittings (olet
fittings and half couplings). The library part model of a branch outlet fitting must
have a string value of BRANCH_LET in the string parameter FIT_TYPE.
Fitting Insertion Location and Alignment Considerations
A fitting is aligned to the selected insertion point on the pipe segment using pre-
defined reference locations on the fitting library part.
Based on the general piping design and pipe modeling practices, preferred locations
such as NEAR, FAR or CENTER on a fitting are used to constrain the fitting. The
94
Fitting Insertion functionality provides the option to choose one of these alignment
options during fitting insertion.
The Fitting Insertion functionality aligns the specified NEAR, FAR or CENTER locations
with the placement point location specified on the pipe segment. A parametric
dimension is created up to the placement/alignment location. You can modify this
dimension and reposition the fitting along the inserted pipeline segment.
NEAR, FAR, and CENTER Alignment Locations Based on Fitting Ports
For fittings with NEAR or FAR alignment locations that coincide with the respective
inlet and outlet port locations, such as butt-welded and flanged fittings, you are not
required to provide any additional information during library part creation.
For such fittings, the NEAR/FAR alignment locations are automatically determined to
be at the inlet/outlet port origins. The CENTER location is determined as the midpoint
of the NEAR and FAR locations.
1 NEAR location (inlet port origin)
2 CENTER location
3 FAR location (outlet port origin)
95
By default, the NEAR option aligns the fitting inlet port with the selected insertion
point on the pipe segment. Similarly, the FAR option aligns the fitting outlet port
with the selected insertion point on the pipe segment. The CENTER option aligns the
midpoint between the fitting inlet and outlet to the selected insertion point on the
pipe segment.
NEAR, FAR, and CENTER Alignment Locations Based on Fitting Ports and an OFFSET
Parameter
For fittings with NEAR/FAR alignment locations that do not coincide with the
respective inlet/outlet port locations as in the case of socket-welded and screwed
fittings, you can still use the inlet/outlet port locations as default NEAR/FAR
alignment locations. The CENTER location is determined as the midpoint of the NEAR
and FAR locations. Alternatively, you can use an optional OFFSET parameter
associated with either or both of the ports to specify an offset location from the
inlet/outlet ports. Refer the following figure for details.
1 Optional NEAR location (20.0mm from inlet port)
2 Default NEAR location (inlet port with offset of 20.0mm)
96
3 Automatic CENTER location
4 Default FAR location (outlet port with offset of 20.0mm)
5 Optional FAR location (20.0mm from outlet port)
Using the OFFSET parameter and the ability to enable/disable it during fitting
insertion, you can apply the desired NEAR and FAR alignment locations as required
by your design. By this, you will be able to offset a fitting port to a desired location
and align that location to the point on the pipe segment where it is inserted. You can
create your linear parametric dimensions up to this point on the pipe segment. Using
the OFFSET parameter and appropriate offset value, you can optionally create your
linear dimensions up to a fitting face (specified by the offset value from the
respective port) for socket-welded and threaded fittings.
Inlet Ports
About Inlet Ports
If a fitting has two or more ports, the z-axes of at least two of the ports must be
aligned along the local z-axis of the fitting or parallel to the local z-axis of the fitting.
Corner fittings and lateral branchlet fittings are the exceptions. One of the two ports
must be specified as the fitting's inlet port. This applies to corner and branchlet
fittings as well.
Specify the inlet port during the library part creation by attaching the SIZE
parameter to an appropriate port of the fitting.
To Specify an Inlet Port
You can specify an inlet port by attaching the SIZE parameter to an appropriate port
of the fitting during library part creation.
During fitting insertion, the Fitting Insertion functionality automatically aligns the
local z-axis of the fitting with the pipe segment on which the fitting is inserted. By
default, the fitting is inserted using the NEAR option, which aligns the fitting inlet
port with the specified insertion location on the pipeline. The fitting outlet port is
placed downstream in the direction of flow of the inlet port.
The concept of the inlet port is especially important for direction-specific fittings such
as check valves and special types of globe valves.
You can change the default behavior of the fitting insertion functionality by using the
Flip option on the Orientation tab of the Insert Fitting dialog.
Inlet Port Alignment for Branch Outlet Fittings
The inlet port of the branch outlet fittings can be aligned either with the outer or
inner surface of the main pipeline.
The inlet port of the neck outlet fitting is always aligned with the outside surface of
the main pipeline.
97
Nozzle outlet fittings and weldolet fittings are always aligned with the inner surface
of the main pipe segment.
In certain cases, the inlet port of the fitting is aligned at a distance from either the
inlet or the outlet surface of the main pipe segment.
Stem Axis Direction

About the Stem Axis of a Fitting
The stem axis of a fitting is an imaginary axis that is parallel to the local y-axis of the
fitting.
It is applicable only to certain fittings and it represents the following:
• The branch direction of a junction fitting along the positive stem axis.
• The hand wheel direction of a valve along the positive stem axis.
• The eccentric offset direction of a reducer along the positive or negative stem
axis.
• The reference axis for bolt hole straddling of a flange (straddling is done with
reference to the positive stem axis).
98
For fittings involving the above graphical details, you must create the appropriate
geometry either with reference to or along the stem axis directions specified, to
achieve a consistent default orientation during fitting insertion.
Example: Stem Axis Direction
In the above figure, axis A_3 of the cone is created along the positive stem axis
direction of the fitting, parallel to the local positive y-axis of PORT0 (the inlet port
that has the SIZE parameter). The fitting insertion functionality aligns the local z-axis
of the fitting with the pipe segment and automatically orients the local y-axis to its
default direction, based on the orientation rules defined in the fitting insertion
functionality. The default direction of the fitting is the fitting stem, since it is created
parallel to the local y-axis. During fitting insertion you can further rotate the stem
about the pipe segment using the Rotation Angle option.
Fitting Parameter
About Fitting Parameters
The fitting parameters of a pipe are the non-graphic data associated with the library
components during their design phase.
You can associate fitting parameters to the library components using the standard
Pro/ENGINEER parameter feature. Fitting parameters provide the details of the
modeling automation while inserting fittings, checking design rules, and reporting.
To Assign User-Defined Parameters
1. Open a generic part, for example, a fitting.
2. Click Tools > Family Table. The Family Table dialog box opens.
99
3. Click Insert > Columns. The Family Items, Generic dialog box opens.
4. Select Parameter to open the Select Parameter dialog box.
5. Select Alternate Mass Properties from the list at the bottom of the dialog box.
6. Add all the required <user_ALT_parameters> to the family table and close the
Family Table dialog box.
7. Click Edit > Setup > Mass props. The Setup Mass Properties dialog box
opens.
8. Select Geometry and Parameters. Click Generate Report and click Ok.
9. Open a piping assembly and click Edit > Regenerate.
You can display all the values assigned to the user-defined parameters using the
Report Pipeline dialog box.
Fitting Parameters Based on Fitting Code
The fitting code specifies the insertion behavior of the fitting. It is assigned to a
fitting generic part as a string parameter denoted as FITTING_CODE. Fitting codes are
pre-defined and cannot be changed. Each library fitting is associated with a fitting
code and is designed in accordance with the rules as applicable for the associated
fitting code.
The following table lists the fitting parameters for the various fitting codes:
Fitting FITTING_ S NEW_ BRANCH_ END_ Y_ECCEN- FLOW_CONS OFF

Codes CODE I SIZE SIZE TYPE TRICITY TRAINED SET
Z
E
INLINE YES Y NO NO YES Optional Optional Opti

E onal
S
INLINE_ YES Y YES NO YES Optional NO Opti

REDUCI E onal
NG S
INLINE_ YES Y NO NO YES NO NO Opti

JOINT E onal
S
FLANGE YES Y NO NO YES NO NO Opti

E onal
S
GASKET YES Y NO NO YES NO NO Opti

E onal
S
100
Fitting FITTING_ S NEW_ BRANCH_ END_ Y_ECCEN- FLOW_CONS OFF

Codes CODE I SIZE SIZE TYPE TRICITY TRAINED SET
Z
E
CORNER YES Y NO NO YES NO Optional NO

E
S
CORNER YES Y YES NO YES NO NO NO

_REDUC E
ING S
CORNER YES Y NO NO YES NO NO NO

_LET E
S
ELBOW YES Y NO NO YES NO Optional NO

E
S
BRANCH YES Y NO NO YES NO NO NO

E
S
BRANCH YES Y Option YES YES YES NO NO

_REDUC E al
ING S
BRANCH YES Y NO NO YES NO NO NO

_LET E
S
Fitting Branch Size Parameter
The branch size parameter must be inserted on the branch port of a fitting. It is a
string type feature parameter denoted as BRANCH_SIZE. This parameter accepts any
valid pipe nominal diameter value. Insert this parameter only if the branch port size
of a fitting is different from its inlet port size.
You can define a single reducing tee fitting by inserting the SIZE parameter on the
inlet port and the BRANCH_SIZE parameter on the branch port. Similarly, you can
define a double reducing TEE fitting by inserting the SIZE parameter on the inlet port
and the NEW_SIZE parameter on the outlet port and the BRANCH_SIZE parameter on
the branch port.
Flow Constrained Fitting Parameter
The FLOW_CONSTRAINED parameter is an integer type Part parameter. Insert

FLOW_CONSTRAINED on the library part for flow direction specific fittings such as a
Check Valve and unidirectional angle valves.
101
The FLOW_CONSTRAINED parameter is used as a status flag by the flow direction

reversal functionality for flipping the fitting during flow reversal. Because this integer
parameter is used as a status flag, its value is ignored by the software.
The assignment of a value for an integer parameter is mandatory. You must assign
an integer value (such as 1) consistently, but it is not used by the software.
Latrolet Fitting Orientation
Latrolet is a non-orthogonal branch outlet fitting. Latrolets can be placed in either of

the two orientations as shown.
Orientations of Latrolet (Left to Right: 0 degrees and 180 degrees)

If the branch pipe segment already exists, the fitting is automatically aligned. If the
angle of the latrolet does not match with the existing branch angle, the insertion of
such a fitting is not allowed. The tolerance angle for such a check must be specified
in the configuration option variable PIPE_FITT_ANGLE_TOLERANCE. If this variable is
not specified, the default tolerance angle of 1.5 degrees on either side is used for
checking.
To achieve this orientation, create the inlet port of the fitting with its positive y-axis
aligned with the 0 degree orientation of the fitting, so that the latrolet orientation is
created by default. Use the Flip option to change to the 180 degree orientation.
Fitting Inlet Size Parameter
The Fitting Inlet Size parameter is inserted only on one of the ports of a fitting. It is
a string type feature parameter denoted as SIZE. A fitting port that has the SIZE
parameter is designated as the inlet port of the fitting. This parameter accepts any
valid pipe nominal diameter value. The size values assigned to this parameter must
match the size values that you have specified in various master catalog files.
Fitting Outlet Size Parameter
The fitting outlet size parameter is inserted on the outlet port of a fitting. It is a
string type feature parameter denoted as NEW_SIZE. This parameter accepts any
valid pipe nominal diameter value. Insert this parameter only if the outlet port size of
a fitting is different from its inlet port size.
102
Fitting End Type Code Parameter
The end type parameter must be inserted on the inlet port of a fitting with
appropriate end type values. It is a string type feature parameter denoted as
END_TYPE. It is mandatory to insert this parameter on the inlet ports of all the
fittings.
If all the ports of a fitting are of the same end types, you need not assign this
parameter to all the ports. It is sufficient if you assign the END_TYPE parameter to
the inlet port. If a fitting does not have an END_TYPE parameter in its outlet or the
branch ports, the system automatically assigns the END_TYPE parameter specified for
the inlet port to all the other unspecified ports. However, if a fitting has different end
types for its inlet, outlet and branch ports, an END_TYPE parameter needs to be
inserted with appropriate values at the inlet, outlet or the branch ports. The system
uses these specified end types for the respective ports.
The end type values that are used for fitting end types in the supplied library and the
fitting MCAT files are as listed:
• BW – Butt Welded
• SW – Socket Welded
• SC – Screwed
• FLFF – Flanged Flat Face
• FLRF – Flanged Raised Face
• FLRJ – Flanged Ring Joint
• FLTG – Flanged Tongue end of Tongue and the Groove mating
• FLGR – Flanged Groove end of Tongue and Groove mating
Note: Though the end type codes are user definable you must use the following
rules:
1. The flanged end-types must start with the character "F".
2. The screwed end-types must start with the character "SC".
3. Use the same end type values in the End Type Compatibility file that will be used
for the end type compatibility checking.
The END_TYPE parameter is used while inserting fittings for performing automatic end
type checking between the adjoining fittings. It is also used for automatically
inserting mating flanges and gaskets when you insert flanged fittings.
Fitting Eccentricity Parameter
The fitting eccentricity parameter must be inserted on a library part of an eccentric

fitting and is applicable only for a fitting that has either the inlet or the outlet port
eccentricity along the local y-axis of the fitting. It is an integer type part parameter
denoted as Y_ECCENTRICITY. This parameter generally behaves like a status flag and
its value is not relevant.
103
The Y_ECCENTRICITY parameter behaves like a status flag while inserting eccentric
fittings, for enabling the centerline offset.
Fitting Alignment Offset Parameter
The fitting alignment offset parameter is an optional parameter and can be inserted
on any selected port of a fitting with an appropriate offset value. It is a real type
feature parameter denoted as OFFSET. The value of the OFFSET parameter must be
the distance between a port and its corresponding face. It is mainly used for socket-
welded and screwed fittings. The following figure shows a screwed valve:
The fitting insertion functionality provides an additional option to enable alignment

based on the OFFSET parameter. If you enable this option during fitting insertion, the
NEAR/FAR alignment locations are determined using the respective port and the
OFFSET parameter on it. The OFFSET parameter is also used for interference checking
between two adjacent fittings.
The following points must be noted while assigning offset parameter values to a
fitting:
• Assign only positive values. The system ignores negative values, and in this case
an absolute value is used as the offset.
• When you use the offset value that is associated with a given port, the optional
alignment location for the port is offset along its positive z-axis.
104
• If a port has the same end type and offset value as the inlet port, specify the
OFFSET parameter only for the inlet port.
• If a port has a different end type as the inlet port, you must specify an OFFSET
parameter for that port and assign appropriate values depending on the end type
of that port. When the end types are different, the offset value specified for the
inlet port will not be applicable to the other port.
Surface Area Parameter
The surface area is assigned directly to a fitting library part using the real value
parameter PRO_MP_ALT_AREA. Specify a value for the PRO_MP_ALT_AREA parameter in
the same system of unit for area, as specified for the fitting library part.
The surface area of a fitting library part is calculated when you perform the model
analysis of a pipeline assembly using the Model Analysis dialog box. If you have
specified the value PARAMETERS for the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter, Pro/ENGINEER
uses the value that you have specified for PRO_MP_ALT_AREA for the fitting, and
relates it to the analysis parameter PRO_MP_AREA, to calculate the surface area. If
you do not specify any value for PRO_MP_ALT_AREA, or if you specify the value
GEOMETRY for the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter, the geometry of the fitting library part
is used for surface area calculations.
Center of Gravity Parameters
You can directly assign the center of gravity for a fitting library part using the real
parameters, PRO_MP_ALT_COGX, PRO_MP_ALT_COGY, and PRO_MP_ALT_COGZ. The
values that you assign for PRO_MP_ALT_COGX, PRO_MP_ALT_COGY, and
PRO_MP_ALT_COGZ are used for center of gravity calculations if you specify the value
PARAMETERS for the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter. If you do not specify any values for
the center of gravity parameters, or if you specify the value GEOMETRY for the
PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter, the geometry of the fitting library part is used for center
of gravity calculations.
Pro/PIPING automatically updates the center of gravity information when you modify
or replace a fitting.
The Report Pipeline dialog box reports the center of gravity information if you
select COG_X, COG_Y, or COG_Z as the columns in the Report Format dialog box.
In case of fittings, if you assign PRO_MP_ALT_COGX, PRO_MP_ALT_COGY, and
PRO_MP_ALT_COGZ parameters to a fitting, Pro/PIPING transforms these parameters
with respect to the start location of the pipeline and reports the center of gravity
information. The x-, y-, and z- coordinates of the center of gravity of pipe segments
and fittings are reported in the linear units of the piping assembly.
Weight Parameter
You can assign the PRO_MP_ALT_MASS parameter to library parts for weight
calculation. The Model Analysis feature uses this parameter along with other user-
defined parameters for the appropriate model analysis calculations.
If you have set the value of the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter to PARAMETERS, Model
Analysis uses the associated value for mass property calculations. If the value for the
PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter is set to GEOMETRY, or if you have not assigned values
105
for other parameters, Model Analysis uses the geometry of the part for model
analysis calculations.
Note: If the mass_property_calculate configuration option is set to automatic,
regenerating the piping assembly assigns the Mass Property parameters to all fittings
in the assembly.
Valve Number Fitting Parameter
The valve number parameter is assigned to a fitting component feature. It is a string

type parameter denoted as VALVENUMBER.
Mating Plane
Specifying a Mating Plane
A mating plane is used to mate a fitting with other fittings. You can use a datum
plane or a solid surface as a mating plane if it satisfies the following conditions:
• The datum plane or the solid surface aligns with the x-y plane of the related port.
• The normal of the datum plane or the solid surface is in the same direction as the
z-axis of the related port.
Note: You cannot use a quilt as a mating plane.
The ANSI Standard
About the ANSI Standard

The ANSI pipe fitting library conforms to the ANSI standards. Each fitting in the
library needs to have a fitting generic part created in association with it.
For more information on creating a generic part for each fitting in the ANSI pipe
fitting library, see the topic Fitting Library Creation Rules.
Each fitting and pipe in the ANSI library also needs Master Catalog Files, which you
create in the Piping Specification Database.
Fitting Component End Types

The end type codes for the various fitting components that are used in the ANSI
fitting library are as given:
Code End Type
BE Beveled End
PE Plain End
BW Butt Welded
SW Socket Welded
106
Code End Type
SC Screwed
FLFF Flanged Flat Face
FLRF Flanged Raised Face
FLRJ Flanged Ring Joint
FLTG Flanged Tongue end of Tongue and Groove mating
FLGR Flanged Groove end of Tongue and Groove mating
Example: List of ANSI Pipes and Fittings in the Library

The following table lists the ANSI pipes and fittings in the ANSI Pipe Fitting Library:
Fitting Category: VALVE
Fitting End- Rating Size Model Standard Fitting

Name Type Range in Name Code
Inches
Ball BW 600# 1/2~12 vl_ball ANSI INLINE

Valve _bw B16.10
Ball 900# 1 ~ 12 ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
Ball FLPF 150,300# ½ ~ 12 vl_ball ANSI INLINE

Valve _flff B16.10
Ball FLRF 150,300,600# ½ ~ 12 vl_ball ANSI INLINE

Valve _flrf B16.10
Ball 900# 1 ~ 12 ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
Ball FLRJ 150# 1 ~12 vl_ball ANSI INLINE

Valve _flrj B16.10
Ball 300,600,900# 1/2 ~ 12 ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
Ball FLTG 600# 1/2 ~ 12 vl_ball ANSI INLINE

Valve _fltg B16.10
Ball 900# 1"~12" ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
107

Inches
Check BW 150# 1/8"~36" vl_che ANSI INLINE

Valve ck_bw B16.10
Swing
Type
Check 300# 1/2"~36" ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
Swing
Type

Valve B16.10
Swing
Type

Valve B16.10
Swing
Type
Check FLPF 150# 1/2"~24" vl_che ANSI INLINE

Valve ck_flff B16.10
Swing
Type
Check 300# 1"~24" ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
Swing
Type
Check FLRF 150# 1/2"~24" vl_che ANSI INLINE

Valve ck_flrf B16.10
Swing
Type
Check 300# 1"~24" ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
Swing
Type

Valve B16.10
Swing
Type
108

Inches
Check FLRJ 150,300# 1"~24" vl_che ANSI INLINE

Valve ck_flrj B16.10
Swing
Type

Valve B16.10
Swing
Type

Valve B16.10
Swing
Type
Check FLTG 600# 1/2"~24" vl_che ANSI INLINE

Valve ck_fltg B16.10
Swing
Type

Valve B16.10
Swing
Type
Gate BW 150,300# 1/8"~36" vl_gat ANSI INLINE

Valve e_bw B16.10
Gate 600# 1/2"~24" ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
Gate 900# 1"~24" ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
Gate FLPF 150,300# 1/2"~24" vl_gat ANSI INLINE

Valve e_flff B16.10
Gate FLRF 150,300,600# 1/2"~24" vl_gat ANSI INLINE

Valve e_flrf B16.10
Gate 900# 1"~24" ANSI INLINE

Valve B16.10
Gate FLRJ 150# 1"~24" vl_gat ANSI INLINE

Valve e_flrj B16.10
Gate 300,600# 1/2"~24" vl_gat ANSI INLINE

Valve e_flrj B16.10
109

Inches
Gate 900# 1"~24" vl_gat ANSI INLINE

Valve e_flrj B16.10
Gate FLTG 600# 1/2"~24" vl_gat ANSI INLINE

Valve e_fltg B16.10
Gate 900# 1"~24" vl_gat ANSI INLINE

Valve e_fltg B16.10
Globe BW 150# 1/8"~36" vl_glo ANSI INLINE

Valve be_bw B16.10
Globe 300# 1/2"~36" vl_glo ANSI INLINE

Valve be_bw B16.10

Valve be_bw B16.10

Valve be_bw B16.10
Globe FLPF 150,300# 1/2"~6" vl_glo ANSI INLINE

Valve be_flff B16.10
Globe FLRF 150,300,600# 1/2"~6" vl_glo ANSI INLINE

Valve be_flrf B16.10

Valve be_flrf B16.10
Globe FLRJ 150# 1"~6" vl_glo ANSI INLINE

Valve be_flrj B16.10
Globe 150,300# 1/2"~6" vl_glo ANSI INLINE


Globe FLTG 600# 1/2"~6" vl_glo ANSI INLINE

Valve be_flt B16.10
g

Valve be_flt B16.10
g
Plug BW 600,900# 1"~12" vl_plu ANSI INLINE

Valve g_bw B16.10
110

Inches
Plug FLPF 150,300# 1"~12" vl_plu ANSI INLINE

Valve g_flff B16.10
Plug FLRF 150,300,600,90 1"~12" vl_plu ANSI INLINE

Valve 0# g_flrf B16.10
Plug FLRJ 150,300,600,90 1"~12" vl_plu ANSI INLINE

Valve 0# g_flrj B16.10
Plug FLTG 600,900# 1"~12" vl_plu ANSI INLINE

Valve g_fltg B16.10
Example: List of JIS Fittings
Fitting Fitting End- Rating Size Part Name Fitting

Category Name Type Range Code
Valve Angle FLFF 5K,10K,16K 15- Vl_angle_flff Corner

Valve 400
FLRF 10K,20K, 32- Vl_angle_flrf Corner

200
30K,40K
SC 10K 10- Vl_angle_sc Corner

100
Valve Hose FLFF 5K,10K 15-65 Vl_angle_hoff Corner

Connectio
n
Angle
Valve
Valve Lift Check FLFF 5K, 16K 15- Vl_l_chk_ang Corner

Angle 200
Valve
Valve Emergency FLFF 10K 25- Vl_em_soff_a Corner

Shut 100
Off Angle
Valve
Valve Self FLFF/SC 25-50 Vl_se_cls_ang Corner

Closing
111

Angle
Valve
Valve Screw FLFF 5K, 10K, 15- Vl_sd_chk_ang_ff Corner

Down Stop 16K 400
Check
Valve
(angle)
FLRF 20K 32- Vl_sd_chk_ang_rf Corner

250
Valve Gate Valve FLFF 5K, 10K, 15- Vl_gate_flff Inline

16K 600
FLRF 10K, 20K 50- Vl_gate_flrf Inline

300
SC 5K, 10K 15-80 Vl_gate_sc Inline
Valve Globe FLFF 5K, 10K, 15- Vl_gb_flff Inline

Valve 16K 400
FLRF 10K, 20K, 323- Vl_gb_flrf Inline

30K, 250
40K
SC 5K, 10K 10- Vl_gb_sc Inline

100
Valve Hose FLFF 5K, 10K 15-65 Vl_gb_ho_ff Inline

Connectio
n
Globe
Valve
Valve Lift Check FLFF 5K, 16K 15- Vl_l_chk_gb Flow_

Globe 150 Constra
ined
Valve
Valve Emergency FLFF 10K 25- Vl_em_soff_gb Flow_

Shut 100 Constra
ined
Off Globe
Valve
112

Valve Swing FLFF 5K, 10K 25- Vl_swg_chk_flff Flow_

Check 250 Constra
ined
Valve
FLRF 10K, 20K 50- Vl_swg_chk_flrf Flow_

300 Constra
ined
Valve Self FLFF 25-50 Vl_se_cls_gb Flow_

Closing Constra
Globe ined
Valve
Valve Screw FLFF 5K, 10K, 15- Vl_sd_chk_gb_ff Flow_

Down Stop 16K 400 Constra
ined
Check
Valve
(Globe)
FLRF 20K 32- Vl_sd_chk_gb_rf Flow_

250 Constra
ined
Branch Reducing BW 10, 40, 70, 15- Tee_reducing_bw Branch

Tee 140, 900 _
reducin
80, 160,
g
SPP,
12Y, 79Y,
95Y,
5S, 10S,
20S
SW 10, 40, 70, 6-100 Tee_reducing_sw Branch

140, 80, _
160 reducin
g
SW 10, 40, 70, 10- Tee_red_grd_sw Branch

140 100 _
reducin
g
113

Branch Straight BW 10, 40, 70, 15- Tee_straight_bw Branch

Tee 140, 80, 300
160, SPP
SW 10, 40, 70, 6-100 Tee_straight_sw Branch

140, 16,
40, SPP
SC TMP 4-40 Tee_bite_sc Branch
Union SC 10, 40, 70, 4-40 Tee_union_bite_sc Branch

(Bite Type 140, 80,
160, SPP
Tee)
Elbow Elbow 45 BW 10, 40, 70, 25- Elbow_45_bw Elbow

Degree 140, 80, 2600
160, 12Y,
(Butt-
Welding 79Y, 95Y,
SPP
Type)
Elbow 90 BW 10, 40, 70, 25- Elbow_90_bw Elbow

Degree 140, 80, 2600
160, 12Y,
(Butt-
Welding 79Y, 95Y,
SPP
Type)
Elbow 45 SW 10, 40, 70, 10- Elbow_45_sw Elbow

Degree 140 100
(Socket-
Welding
Type)
Elbow 90 SW 10, 40, 70, 10- Elbow_90_sw Elbow

Degree 140 100
(Socket-
Welding
Type)
114

Elbow 90 SC 10, 40, 70, 4-40 Elbow_90_b_sc Elbow

Degree 140, 80,
160, SPP
(Bite
Type)
Flange Blank FLFF 5K 10- Flange_blank Flange

Flange 900
(Flange
Type)
Corrosion FLFF 5K, 10K 50- Corrosion Flange

Flange 600
Composite FFRF/SO 5K, 10K 50- Composite_alloy Flange

Flange 600
(Alloy)
Composite FLRF/SO 5K, 10K 50- Composite_copper Flange

Flange 100
(Copper)
Slip-on FLFF/SO 5K, 10K, 10- Flange_slip_ff Flange

Flange for 16K 1000
Flat Face
Type
Slip-on FLRF/SO 20K, 30K, 10- Flange_slip_rf Flange

Flange for 40K 600
Raised
Face Type
Solid FLFF/SO 5K, 10K 15-40 Solid_braz_aly_fl Flange

Brazing
Type
Slip-on
Flange
(Alloy)
115

Solid FLFF/SO 5K, 10K 10-40 Solid_braz_cpr_fl Flange

Brazing
Type
Slip-on
Flange
(Copper)
Socket FLFF/SW 280K 15-80 Socketweld_fl Flange

Welding
Flange
FLRF/BW 30K 15- Flange_neck_rf Flange

400
General Boss BW/SC 6-40 Boss_bw Branch

Let
Expansion SO 40- Exp_cpl_so Joint

Joint 800
(General
Type)
Sleeve BW 10- Sleeve_bw Joint

Joint 500
Socket SW 5-100 Socket_sw Inline
Coupling SW 6-100 Coupling_sw Joint

Joint for
Copper
Pipe
Suction SW 50- Suction_a_sw Inline

Mouth "A" 200
Type
Suction SW 150- Suction_b_sw Inline

Mouth "B" 650
Type
Cap BW 15- Cap_bw Inline

500
116

Gasket for GKFF 30K 15- Gasket_neck Gasket

neck 400
Gasket for GKFF 30K 15- Gasket_neck_steam Gasket

neck 400
steam
Gasket for GKFF 5K, 10K, 10- Gasket_slip Gasket

slip 16K, 20K, 1000
30K
Gasket for GKFF 5K, 10K, 10- Gasket_slip_steam Gasket

slip 16K, 20K, 1000
30K, 40K
Steam
Sea Water FLFF 10K 15- Strainer_ff Inline

Strainer S 350
Type
Steam FLFF 15-50 Trap_piston Inline

Trap
Reducer Concentric BW 15- Red_concentric_bw Inline_

Reducer 600 Reducin
g
SW 6-100 Red_concentric_sw Inline_

Reducin
g
Eccentric BW 15- Red_eccentric_bw Inline_

Reducer 500
Reducin
g
Update Model
About Update Model

Pro/PIPING allows you to change piping data in the Project Data, the Master Catalog
(MCAT) Specification Database files, or both and then update the piping model data
in your current piping project. You can stay current with industry standards and
change piping specifications, and update the active assembly information and/or line
stock by using the Update Model dialog box (PIPING > Set Up > Update Model).
Pro/PIPING applies the new data to all subsequent modeling.
117
You can change the following piping data and update the current model:
• Color
• Corner types
• Material code
• Stock number format
• Outside diameter (OD)
• Wall thickness
• Material density
• Miter parameters
• Bend parameters
• Bend machine parameters
To Change and Update Colors

You can change piping colors in a specification and update the current model with
the changes.
1. Modify the specification. Click Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping
Specification dialog box opens.
3. Double-click the Specification Directory file that contains the specification that
you want to modify. The Open File dialog box closes. In the Define Piping
Specification dialog box, the file name appears in the border next to
Specification Directory File.
4. Under Select Record, select the specification record that you want to modify.
5. Under Define Record, select a new piping color from the Color box. You can
define new colors (View > Color and Appearance).
6. Click to insert the changes to the selected record. Pro/PIPING modifies the
existing record and displays the changes under Select Record.
7. Click to save the changes to the file. The current directory is based on the
8. Click File > Exit. The Define Piping Specification dialog box closes.
9. Update the model. Click Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box
opens.
118
10. Under Assembly, click and select the assembly to which you want to apply
the changes.
11. Under Model Information, select the Color check box.
12. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the
update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly
information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area.
13. Verify the changes. Click PIPING > Info. In the Report Pipeline dialog box,
select Type > Segment.
14. Click and select a pipe segment in the graphics window. Note that the
segment must be from the updated assembly. Pro/PIPING displays the pipeline
information in the Information Window.
To Change and Update Corner Types

You can change piping corner types in a specification and update the current model
with the changes.
1. Modify the specification. Click PIPING > Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping
3. Double-click the Auto-Selection file that is associated with the specification that
Specification dialog box, the file name appears in the border next to Auto-
Selection File.
5. You can change corner types in the following ways:
o Bend and Miter Corner Types—Under Define Record, check the Allow
Bend or Allow Miter or both to accept bend or mitered corner types or
both the corner types. Clear the check boxes to make these corner types
unavailable to the specification.
o Fitting Corner Types—Select the Fitting tab on the Define Piping

Specification dialog box. To add a corner fitting, either add a corner fitting
to an existing fitting record or create a new fitting record that contains a
corner fitting. You can delete a fitting records that contain corner fittings to
make them unavailable to the specification.
existing record and displays the changes under Select Record.
7. Click to save changes to the file. The current directory is based on the
119
opens.
10. Under Select Assembly, click and select the assembly to which you want to
apply the changes.
11. Under Model Information, select the Corner Types check box.
13. Click PIPING > Regenerate to apply the changes to the piping model displayed
14. Verify the changes. Click PIPING > Route > Pipe Envrnmt > Corner Type.
The Corner Type menu lists the allowed corner types (Fitting, Bend, Miter) for
the active assembly.
To Change and Update Material Codes

You can change pipe and fitting material codes in a specification or line stock and
update the current model with the changes.
1. Modify the Piping Material Master Catalog (MCAT) file. Open the Piping Material
file using a text editor and modify the material code for the selected pipe or
fitting MCAT file. Save all changes.
Selection File.
6. Select the Pipe or Fitting tabbed pages for the material code type. Pro/PIPING
displays the updated material code in the Material Code box under Define
Record.
7. Click to insert a new record that contains the changes. Pro/PIPING adds the
record and displays the changes under Select Record. Note that you must
delete the existing record before Pro/PIPING can insert the record with the new
material code.
120
opens.
apply the changes.
12. Under Model Information, select the Material Data check box.
14. Regenerate (PIPING > Regenerate) to apply the changes to the piping model
displayed in the graphics window.
To Change and Update Stock Number Formats

You can change the pipe and fitting stock number formats in a specification and
Selection File.
5. Select the Pipe, Fitting, or Assembly (fitting) tabs for the type of stock number
format to change.
6. Under Define Record and Select Stock Number Format, select new format
keywords from the Keyword box or enter unique keywords. You can delete any
keyword to make it unavailable to the specification.
121
record and displays the changes under Select Record.
opens.
apply the changes.
12. Under Model Information, select the Stock Number check box.
15. Verify the changes. To display the stock number in the updated format, click
PIPING > Info. In the Report Pipeline dialog box, select Type > Segment.
information in the INFORMATION WINDOW.
To Change and Update Outside Diameters

You can change pipe outside diameters (OD) in a specification or line stock and
1. Locate the Pipe Outer Diameter (OD) Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected
pipeline or line stock. The default path for these files is <ProE load
directory>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/pipeod/. Each Pipe Outer
Diameter file is named for a line stock material type (for example,
od_steel.ptd.)
2. Use a text editor and change the outside diameter value for a selected line stock.
Save all changes.
3. Update the model. Click PIPING > Set Up > Update Model. The Update
Model dialog box opens.
apply the changes.
5. Under Model Information, select the Outer Diameter check box.
122
To Change and Update Wall Thickness

You can change pipe wall thickness in a specification or line stock and update the
current model with the changes.
1. Locate the Pipe Thickness Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or
line stock. The default path for these files is <ProE load
directory>/text/piping_data/ master_catalog/pipethk/. Each Pipe
Thickness file is named for a line stock material type (for example,
thk_steel.ptd.).
2. Use a text editor and change the wall thickness value for a selected line stock.
Save all changes.
apply the changes.
5. Under Model Information, select the Wall Thickness check box.
123
To Change and Update Material Density

You can change pipe material density in a specification and update the current model
with the changes.
1. Locate the Piping Material Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or
line stock. The default path for this file is <ProE load
directory>/text/piping_data/master_catalog/.
2. Use a text editor and change the material density value for the selected pipeline
or line stock. Save all changes.
apply the changes.
5. Under Model Information, select the Density check box.
8. Verify the changes. Click Analysis > Model Analysis. In the Model Analysis
dialog box, retrieve a solid part density.
To Change and Update Miter Parameters

You can change pipe miter parameters in a specification and update the current
model with the changes.
1. Locate the Miter Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or line stock.
The default path for these files is <ProE load directory>/text/piping_data/
master_catalog/miter/. Each Miter file is named for a line stock material type
(for example, miter_steel.ptd.)
2. Use a text editor and change the miter parameter value for the selected pipeline
apply the changes.
5. Under Model Information, select the Miter Parameters check box.
124
7. Click PIPING > Regenerate to regenerate and apply the changes to the piping
model displayed in the graphics window.
To Change and Update Bend Parameters

You can change pipe bend parameters in a specification and update the current
1. Locate the Bend Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or line stock.
The default path for these files is <ProE load directory>/text/piping_data/
master_catalog/bend/. Each Bend file is named for a line stock material type
(for example, bend_steel.ptd.).
2. Use a text editor and change the bend parameter value for the selected pipeline
apply the changes.
5. Under Model Information, select the Bend Parameters check box.
7. Click PIPING > Regenerate to regenerate and apply the changes to the piping
model displayed in the graphics window.
8. Verify the changes. Click Set Up > Design Rules. The Define Design Rules
dialog box opens.
o Under By Segment, click and select a pipe segment.
o Under By Parameters, select a linestock.
10. Click . The Design Rule Parameters dialog box opens and displays the
updated bend parameters.
125
To Change and Update Bend Machine Parameters

You can change bend machine parameters in a specification and update the current
1. Locate the Bend Machine Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or
line stock. The default path for these files is <ProE load
directory>/text/piping_data/ master_catalog/bend_machine/.
2. Use a text editor and change the bend parameter value for the selected pipeline
apply the changes.
5. Under Model Information, select the Bend m/c Parameters check box.
Tip: Updating Multiple Changes

You can use the Update Model dialog box to apply multiple changes to the Project
Data and MCAT files and save time.
1. Complete any changes and save them.
2. Click PIPING > Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens.
apply the changes.
4. Under Model Information, select all check boxes that correspond to the
modified data.
Note: To quickly apply the changes to another assembly, click under Select
Assembly in the Update Model dialog box and select another assembly. Then,
repeat the last three steps above.
126
Design Rule Parameters
About Design Rule Parameters (Spec-Driven)

In Pro/PIPING, Design Rule parameters are line stock parameters that check selected
pipelines to ensure that the pipes stay within their limitations. If there are any
violations, this is considered a Line Stock violation. The system compares the
characteristics of a selected pipeline with the values of the Design Rule parameters.
If there are any violations, the pipeline is highlighted, which gives you the
opportunity to correct the pipeline parameters.
Pro/PIPING uses Design Rule parameters for both the Non Specification-Driven and
the Specification-Driven Pro/PIPING modes.
To Define Design Rule Parameters (Spec-Driven)

You use design rule parameters to verify whether the parameters of a routed pipe
are within limitations.
1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Design Rules. The Define Design Rules dialog box
opens.
2. Under By Segment, click and select a pipe segment. This allows you to
assign design rule parameters to a pipe segment.
or
Under By Parameters, select a linestock. This allows you to assign Design Rule
parameters to an entire line stock.
3. Click . The Design Rule Parameters dialog box opens.
4. Type the Design Rule parameter values in any of the following boxes and ENTER.
A highlighted dot at the bottom of the dialog box confirms the entry.
o Max Overall Length—Maximum allowable overall length of a continuous

pipe segment.
o Min Segment Length—Minimum allowable length of a continuous pipe

segment.
o Max Segment Length—Maximum allowable length of a continuous pipe

segment.
o Max Bends Number—Maximum allowable number of bends in a

continuous pipe segment.
o Min Bend Separation—Minimum allowable distance, in assembly units,

between bends in one continuous pipe segment.
o Start/End Clamp Length—Minimum allowable distance, in assembly

units, from a pipe end to the next bend or endpoint.
127
o Min Bend Radius—Minimum allowable bend radius, in assembly units, for

a pipe segment.
o Max Bend Radius—Maximum allowable bend radius, in assembly units, for

a pipe segment.
o Min Bend Angle—Minimum angle of the bend, in assembly units, for a

o Max Bend Angle—Maximum angle of the bend, in assembly units, for a

o Bend Arc Threshold— Angle at which Pro/PIPING defines the

dimensioning scheme for large angle bends, such as 180 degrees (Default
value in degrees: 165. You can enter a value between 0 and 360.)
o Min Branch Separation—Minimum separation distance between two

branches in a continuous pipe segment.
o Min Branch Angle—Minimum allowable angle between a branch and the

main.
o Bend Table Name—Assign a bend table to the line stock. You can create a
bend table at any time (Default value: NO_TABLE).
5. Click to apply the design rule parameters and close the Design Rule
Parameters dialog box.
6. Click to close the Define Design Rules dialog box.
Note: All bend radius and bend angle boxes are unavailable. Pro/PIPING retrieves
this bend data from the Specification Database Bend Master Catalog (MCAT) file.
Bend Arc Threshold (Spec-Driven)

The Bend Arc Threshold is a design rule parameter that appears in the Design
Rule Parameters dialog box (Specification-Driven Piping). The Bend Arc Threshold
is the angle at which Pro/PIPING defines the dimensioning scheme for large angle
bends such as 180 degrees.
The dimensioning scheme for the bend refers to how the bend is located along the
pipe. Pro/PIPING can locate the bend by either the Theoretical Intersection Point or
the Bend Arc Center Point.
• Bend angles that are larger than or equal to 180 degrees get dimensioned based
on the Bend Arc Center Point.
• Bend angles that are smaller than 180 degrees get dimensioned based on the
Theoretical Intersection Point of the bend.
For a 180 degree bend, one bend value is reported for the location of the center of
the arc of the 180 degree bend.
128
Example: Bend Arc Threshold (Spec-Driven)

IF BEND_ARC_THRESHOLD = 165 (default)
Then
Route a 180-degree bend—Gets reported as one 180-degree bend from the arc
center of the bend.
IF BEND_ARC_THRESHOLD = 180
Then
Route a 180-degree bend—Gets reported as one 180-degree bend from the arc
center of the bend.
IF BEND_ARC_THRESHOLD = 181
Then
Route a 180-degree bend—Gets reported as two 90-degree bends from the
theoretical intersection points.
Design Rules Checking
About Design Rules Checking

You can enable or disable the design rule check during the pipe modeling process.
When you enable the design rule check, the location of violations can be displayed
and you can rectify them at an early stage. The modeling process then proceeds with
greater accuracy.
Use the design rule checking functionality to:
• Select the design rules to check whenever violations can occur due to a specific
pipe modeling operation. You can select all design rules or only a few design
rules.
• Indicate the location of a design rule violation.
Note: To enable the checking of design rules for piping assemblies that are created
using versions of Pro/ENGINEER earlier than Wildfire, set appropriate values to the
piping_wildfire_convert configuration option.
To Check for Design Rule Violations (Spec-Driven)
1. Click . The Design Rules Check dialog box opens.
Note:
o The Design Rules Check dialog box opens only when an active assembly
contains a pipeline for which you can check design rules.
129
o If you are working with a piping assembly that is created using versions of
Pro/ENGINEER earlier than Wildfire, set the piping_wildfire_convert
2. Under Setup, select one or more of the following design rules to check.
o Missing Fitting—Checks for missed fittings and gaskets. Under Design

Rules Tree, click a missed fitting type to display the violation information
under Violation Details.
o Segment Violations—Checks for violations in segment length. Under

Design Rules Tree, click a segment violation type to display the violation
information under Violation Details.
o Bend Violations—Displays the bend violation results for a pipeline. Under

Design Rules Tree, click a bend violation type to display the violation
o Branch Violations—Displays the branch violations in a pipeline. Under

Design Rules Tree, click a branch violation type to display the violation
o Flow Violations—Checks for conflicts in the flow direction. Under Design

Rules Tree, click Flow Violations to display the name of the datum point
feature at the location of flow conflict under Violation Details.
o End Type Compatibility—Checks for conflicts in the end type for two
mated fittings. Under Design Rules Tree, click End Type Compatibility
to display the first end type and rating and the second end type and rating
under Violation Details.
o Invalid Pipeline Label Size—Checks for conflicts when the pipe pieces do
not have the same size as specified in the pipeline label. Under Design
Rules Tree, click Invalid Pipeline Label Size to display the invalid
pipeline label size under Violation Details.
The number of violations is displayed in parentheses adjacent to the appropriate

tree node under Design Rules Tree.
Note: If you do not want to check for any of the previous design rule violations,
clear the appropriate design rule from the Setup list.
3. If required, click Tree and select one of the following:
o Expand All—Expands all the tree nodes.
o Expand One—Expands only the selected tree node and not its component
child nodes.
o Expand Branch—Expands the selected tree node and all its component
child nodes.
o Collapse All—Collapses all the tree nodes.
o Collapse One—Collapses only the selected tree node or a child node of a

tree node.
130
o Collapse Branch—Collapses the selected tree node and all its component
child nodes.
Note: A tree node and its child nodes represent design rules in all the above
cases.
4. Click or to select a record under Violation Details.
5. Click to display the design rule violation information in the Information

Window.
Displaying Missing Fitting Violations

Missed fitting types are displayed under Design Rules Tree in the Design Rules
Check dialog box as follows:
• Corner Fitting—Displays violation results for missing corner fittings.
• Flange-Gasket—Displays violation results for missing gaskets and flanges. The

following columns are displayed under Violation Details:
o Sname—The selection name of the fitting that has the missing flange and
gasket.
o Location—The upstream, downstream, or the branch stream location

where the violation has occurred.
Displaying Segment Violations

Segment violation types are displayed under Design Rules Tree in the Design
Rules Check dialog box as follows:
• Min Segment Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment
with a length shorter than the minimum segment length.
• Max Segment Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment

with a length greater than the maximum segment length.
The violation results are displayed in the following columns under Violation
Details when you click Min Segment Length or Max Segment Length:
o Stockno—The stock number of the pipe.
o Current—The current segment length.
o Required—The required minimum or maximum segment length.
• Total Segment Length—Displays violation results if you create pipe segments

of a pipe in the active assembly where the pipe segments have length greater
than the total pipe length. The violation results are displayed in the following
columns under Violation Details:
o Stockno—The stock number of the pipe.
131
o Current—The total segment length.
o Required—The required total segment length.
Displaying Bend Violations

Bend violation types are displayed under Design Rules Tree in the Design Rules
• Max Bend Numbers—Displays violation results if you create bends on a pipe
segment greater than the specified maximum bend number value.
• Start Clamp Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment

with its start clamp length less than the specified value.
• Middle Clamp Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment

with its middle clamp length less than the specified value.
• End Clamp Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment with
its end clamp length less than the specified value.
• Min Bend Radius—Displays violation results if you create a pipe bend with its
radius less than the specified value.
• Max Bend Radius—Displays violation results if you create a pipe bend with its
radius greater than the specified value.
• Min Bend Angle—Displays violation results if you create a pipe bend with its
angle less than the specified value.
• Max Bend Angle—Displays violation results if you create a pipe bend with its
angle greater than the specified value.
In all the previous cases, the violation results are displayed in the following columns
under Violation Details:
• Stockno—The stock number of the pipe.
• Current—The current bend number, start clamp length, middle clamp length,
end clamp length, bend radius, or the bend angle.
• Required—The required bend number, start clamp length, middle clamp length,
end clamp length, minimum bend radius, maximum bend radius, minimum bend
angle, or the maximum bend angle.
Displaying Branch Violations

Branch violations are displayed under Design Rules Tree in the Design Rules
• Min Branch Separation—Displays violation results if you create branches on a
pipe segment with the distance between the branches less than the specified
minimum branch separation.
132
• Min Branch Angle—Displays violation results if you create a branch with the
angle between the branch and the main less than the specified minimum branch
angle value.
In the previous cases, the violation results are displayed in the following columns
under Violation Details:
• Stockno—The stock number of the pipe.
• Current—The current branch separation or the branch angle.
• Required—The required minimum branch separation or the minimum branch

angle.
Checking Design Rules

Pro/PIPING determines whether any design rule check has been enabled at the end
of each of the pipe modeling operations as discussed in the following table. Use the
Define Design Rules dialog box to change the default values specified in the table
below.
Design Rule Where to Define Where to Store in the Check

in the SpecDB Model After
Missing
Fitting
Corner Route Pipe,

fitting Modify
Corner
Type,
Delete
Fitting
Flange and Insert

gasket Fitting,
Delete
Fitting,
Replace
Fitting
Segment
violations
Minimum MIN_LEN column MIN_SEGMENT_LENGTH line Route Pipe,

segment of the Pipe stock parameter Modify
length Manufacture Dimension,
Directory file Modify
Pipe,
Modify
Corner
Type,
133

Insert
Fitting,
Replace
Fitting,
Redefine
Fitting, Cut
Pipe
Maximum MAX_LEN column MAX_SEGMENT_LENGTH line Route Pipe,

segment of the Pipe stock parameter Modify
length Manufacture Dimension,
Directory file Modify
Pipe,
Modify
Corner
Type,
Insert
Fitting,
Delete
Fitting,
Replace
Fitting,
Redefine
Fitting,
Delete Cut
Total MAX_OVERALL_LEN MAX_OVERALL_LENGTH line Route Pipe,

segment column of the stock parameter Modify
length Pipe Manufacture Dimension,
Directory Modify
file Pipe,
Modify
Corner
Type,
Insert
Fitting,
Delete
Fitting,
Replace
Fitting,
Redefine
Fitting,
Delete Cut
Bend
violations
134

Maximum MAX_BENDS MAX_NUMBER_BENDS line Route Pipe,

bend column of the stock parameter Modify
numbers Pipe Manufacture Corner
Directory file Type,
Delete
Fitting,
Delete Cut
Start clamp START_CLAMP_LEN The first element of the Route Pipe,

length column of the MIN_STRAIGHT_LENGTH_EN Modify
Bending Machine D line stock parameter Dimension,
file Modify
Pipe,
Modify
Corner
Type,
Insert
Fitting,
Replace
Fitting,
Redefine
Fitting, Cut
Pipe
Middle clamp MID_CLAMP_LEN MIN_BEND_SEPARATION Route Pipe,

length column of the line stock parameter Modify
Bending Machine Dimension,
file Modify
Pipe,
Modify
Corner
Type
End clamp END_CLAMP_LEN The second element of Route Pipe,

length column of the the Modify
Bending Machine MIN_STRAIGHT_LENGTH_EN Dimension,
file D line stock parameter Modify
Pipe,
Modify
Corner
Type,
Insert
Fitting,
Replace
Fitting,
Redefine
Fitting, Cut
135

Pipe
Minimum MIN_RADIUS MIN_BEND_RADIUS line Modify

bend radius column of the stock parameter Corner
Bend file Type,
Update
Bend
Parameters
Maximum MAX_RADIUS MAX_BEND_RADIUS line Modify

bend radius column of the stock parameter Corner
Bend file Type,
Update
Bend
Parameters
Minimum MIN_ANGLE MIN_BEND_ANGLE line Route Pipe,

bend angle column of the stock parameter Modify
Bend file Dimension,
Modify
Corner
Type,
Update
Bend
Parameters
Maximum MAX_ANGLE MAX_BEND_ANGLE line Route Pipe,

bend angle column of the stock parameter Modify
Bend file Dimension,
Modify
Corner
Type,
Update
Bend
Parameters
Branch
violations
Minimum MIN_BRANCH_SEPARATION Route Pipe

branch line stock parameter Branch To,
separation Route Pipe
The default value is 50
Branch
mm or its equivalent in From,
the pipeline assembly
Modify
length unit.
Dimension
136

Minimum MIN_BRANCH_ANGLE line Route Pipe

branch angle stock parameter Branch To,
Route Pipe
The default value is 30
Branch
degrees. From,
Modify
Dimension
Flow conflict Route Pipe,

Modify
Pipeline,
Extension
or Series
Flow
Direction
End type The End Type Delete

compatibility Compatibility file Fitting,
Replace
Fitting
Invalid Route Pipe,

pipeline Modify
label size Pipe,
Modify
Pipeline
Label
Bend Tables
About Bend Tables (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING uses bend tables to accurately calculate the length of straight pipe
(developed length) required to make a bend of a specific bend radius and angle.
The developed pipe length for the same bend can differ due to different materials
and pipe outside diameters (OD).
Bend tables are normalized for 90 degree bends. For other than 90 degree bends,
Pro/ENGINEER takes those values and multiplies them by A/90, where A represents
the specific bend angle in degrees.
137
Bend Table Menu

The Bend Table menu allows you to access all Pro/PIPING bend tables for creation
and modification.
From the BEND TAB menu (PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow), you can perform
the following tasks:
• Define—Creates Pro/PIPING bend tables.
• Delete—Deletes Pro/PIPING bend tables.
• Edit—Modifies Pro/PIPING bend tables. You can update a bend table at any time.
• Show—Displays Pro/PIPING bend tables. You can confirm bend table data.
• Read—Reads a bend table from a file to a part.
• Write—Writes a bend table from a part to a file.
To Define a Bend Table (Spec-Driven)

1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Define.
2. Type a bend table name and click . A Pro/TABLE window opens containing an
table outline.
3. Enter the data in the table.
or
Select File > Read to use an existing bend table as a baseline. The Read File
dialog box opens.
Enter the name of the existing bend table file and click OK. The system reads the
file data and writes it to the current bend table file. Modify the bend table data, if
needed.
4. Click File > Save and Exit to save and close the bend table. You must now
assign the new bend table to a pipe segment or line stock to use it.
Defining Bend Tables (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING allows you to define new bend tables. You define bend tables for 90
degree bends. For other than 90 degree bends, Pro/ENGINEER takes those values
and multiplies them by A/90 where Α represents the specific bend angle in degrees.
You do not have to insert a bend allowance value (A) in every cell in a bend
allowance table. If you leave a particular cell blank, the system calculates the length
value using interpolation.
138
The following table describes the Pro/PIPING bend table format:
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 …
FORMULA
equation
...
ENDFORMULA
!
CONVERSION
equation
...
START MATERIALS
MATERIAL
...
END MATERIALS
!
TABLE
radius radius radius radius radius
outside diameter bend allow bend bend ...

allow allow
outside diameter ... ... ... ...
Note:
• Enter the words FORMULA, END FORMULA, CONVERSION, END CONVERSION,
START MATERIALS, END MATERIALS and TABLE exactly as shown.
• The following definitions apply for the above bend table format:
o FORMULA—An equation for the developed length.
o TABLE— A combination of pipe outer diameter (OD) and bend radius table
data that will never be encountered in your pipe assembly. For example,
0.25 bend radius with an OD of 0.5 inches.
• Comment lines can appear anywhere in a bend table. Each comment line in the
table must start with an exclamation point (!).
139
To Modify a Bend Table (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING allows you to modify bend tables. You can edit only those bend tables
created in the current assembly or applied to the current assembly. To modify a
bend table within Pro/PIPING, do the following:
1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Edit. The TBL NAMES menu appears.
2. Select the bend table to modify from the TBL NAMES menu. This menu lists all
bend tables that were applied to the assembly or were created when the
assembly was currently in session.
3. A Pro/TABLE window opens and displays the selected table.
4. Modify the bend table.
5. Click File > Save or Exit. Pro/PIPING saves the bend table in the current
directory.
Note: You must assign a bend table to a pipe segment or line stock to use it.
To Delete a Bend Table (Spec-Driven)

1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Delete.
2. Select the bend table to delete from the TBL NAMES menu. This menu lists all
assembly was currently in session. Pro/PIPING deletes the selected bend table.
To Show a Bend Table (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING allows you to show or view a bend table. Note that if you select to show
a table, you cannot modify it. To show a bend table, follow these steps:
1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Show.
2. Select the bend table to show from the TBL NAMES menu. This menu lists all
assembly was currently in session.
3. A Pro/TABLE window opens and displays the selected bend table.
4. After viewing the table, click File > Exit. The Pro/TABLE window closes.
To Read a Bend Table to a Model (Spec-Driven)

You can read a bend table from a bend table (.bnd) file into a model. Pro/PIPING
creates a bend table from the file data and applies it to the current model.
1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Read. The DATA FILES menu
appears.
2. Select a bend table name. Pro/PIPING lists all saved bend tables. If you select
Names, the Open dialog box opens in which you select a bend table (.bnd) file
to read. The Pro/ENGINEER Message Area confirms the action.
140
To Write a Bend Table to a File (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING saves each bend table that you define to the current model. If you want
to save a bend table to a separate file, you can write it to a bend table (.bnd) file.
1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Write. The TBL NAMES menu
appears.
2. Select the bend table to modify from the TBL NAMES menu. This menu lists all
assembly was currently in session. The Pro/ENGINEER Message Area confirms the
action.
Bend Table Data (Spec-Driven)

The table data (A) represents the developed bend lengths or allowances (with the
presence of the CONVERSION formula) for specific bend radii and pipe outer
diameters (T). The table data and the conversion equation are used together, so
make sure that the two together give you the correct results.
Observe the following points when using bend table data:
• Create your bend tables for 90 bends. For other than 90 bends, Pro/ENGINEER
takes those values and multiplies them by A/90, where A is the specific bend
angle in degrees.
• You do not have to insert a bend allowance value (A) in every cell in a bend
allowance table.
• If you leave a particular cell blank, the system uses interpolation to calculate the
length value.
• For bend radii and outside diameters (OD) between the values in adjacent cells, a
linear interpolation is used.
Note: The values in the bend tables are independent of the model units. They do not
change if you change the model units.
For example, you originally create a pipe assembly with the model units set to
inches. The outside diameter is 0.25 and the bend radius is 0.5. The system looks up
the bend table to find the developed length at the ordinates (0.25, 0.5). If you
change the model units to centimeters and keep the model the same size, the pipe
OD becomes 0.625 and the bend radius 1.270. The system looks up the table to find
the developed length at the ordinates (0.625, 1.270).
Formula Equations (Spec-Driven)

Formula is an equation used to calculate the developed length for any radius or
outside diameter (OD) that falls outside the range of the table data. Pro/PIPING
provides the following variables for use in the table:
• L—Developed straight length of the bend.
• R—Bend radius.
141
• T—Pipe outer diameter (OD).
• ANGLE—Bend Angle (in degrees).
Formula Equation Rules

Follow these rules when you enter the formula equation in a bend table:
• The formula must be the first equation in the table.
• The formula must begin with the descriptor FORMULA, in the first column.
o If an equation is simple, write it in the second column on the same line as

the descriptor, as in the following examples:
FORMULA L = (0.55*T) + (PI*R)/2.0
FORMULA L = (ANGLE*PI/180)*(R+T/2)
o If the formula is more complex and/or contains some logic statements, then
the FORMULA descriptor must precede the actual formula on its own line.
The formula must also be concluded by the descriptor END FORMULA, on its
own line and in the first column. The following example illustrates this
process:
FORMULA
IF (R/T) < 1.10 | (R/T) > 1.83
L = (PI*R*T)/2.0
ELSE
L = (PI/2)*(R + (T*0.35))
END FORMULA
In a multi-statement formula like this, you can enter the statements in columns
other than column one.
Conversion Equations (Spec-Driven)

The conversion equation tells the system how table data (A) is related to the
developed length (L). If no conversion equation is defined, the system assumes that
the table data equals the required length (L = A). For example, if the table data
represents the bend deduction value, the equation might look like the following:
L = 2*(T + R) - A
Note: L must never be negative.
142
Conversion Equation Variables

You can use the following variables in a conversion equation:
• L—Developed straight length of stock.
• R—Bend radius.
• T—Material thickness.
• ANGLE—Bend Angle (in degrees).
• A—Bend allowance value contained in the table data section.
Conversion Equation Rules

Follow these rules when you enter the conversion equation in a bend table:
• Only use a conversion equation when the developed length L is not equal to your
table values A.
• The conversion must begin with the descriptor CONVERSION, in the first column.
o If the equation is a simple one, then it can be written in the second column
on the same line as the descriptor, as in this example:
CONVERSION L = 2*(T +R) - A
o If the formula is more complex and/or contains some logic statements, then
the CONVERSION descriptor must precede the actual formula on its own line
and the formula must be concluded by the descriptor END CONVERSION,
again on its own line and in the first column.
To Assign a Bend Table (Spec-Driven)

Note: Pro/PIPING allows you to assign a bend table at any time in the design
process.
1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Design Rules. The Define Design Rules dialog box
opens.
2. Select the line stock by doing one of the following:
o Under By Segment, click and select pipe segment from the graphics
window.
o Under By Parameters, select a line stock name from the Model Tree or
Piping System Tree.
3. Click . The Design Rule Parameters dialog box opens.
4. Select a bend table from the Bend Table Name box (Default value: NO_TABLE).
This box lists all bend tables defined for the pipe segment or line stock.
143
5. Click to apply the bend table. The Design Rule Parameters dialog box
closes.
6. Click to close the Define Design Rules dialog box.
Set Display
About Setting Display Options

The Set Display dialog box opens after you click the Set Display option in the PIPE
SETUP menu. The Set Display dialog box allows to set the action options related to
pipelines, pipeline labels, spool labels, flow direction, pipe solid, valve numbers, and
insulation.
To Set Display Options

1. Click PIPING > Set Up. Click Set Display in the PIPE Setup menu. The Set
Display dialog box opens.
2. Click to select the pipeline in the Pro/ENGINEER window.
3. In the Display Options area, select any of the options.
o Pipeline—Show or hide an entire pipeline
o Pipeline Label—Create, show, hide or delete a pipeline label
o Spool Label—Show or hide a pipeline spool label
o Flow Direction—Show or hide the flow direction arrows of a pipeline
o Pipe Solid—Show or hide the solid representation of a pipeline
o Valve Number—Show or hide the valve number of a valve fitting
o Insulation—Show or hide the solid representation of a insulation.
4. In the Action Options area, select the appropriate option.
5. Click to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies
About Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING organizes all pipelines, fittings, and equipment for a piping system in
assemblies and subassemblies. Pro/PIPING creates piping assemblies after you
create pipelines. All subsequent modeling occurs within the currently active
assembly. Pro/PIPING allows you to do the following:
• Change active assemblies at any time in the piping design process by selecting a
pipeline in the graphics window.
144
• Convert existing piping assemblies created in one piping design mode to the
other mode on-the-fly using the User-Driven piping design mode.
To Make a Piping Assembly Active (Spec-Driven)

You can change the currently active assembly at any time in the piping design
process.
2. Click Applications > PIPING. The PIPING menu appears.
3. Click PIPING > Active Asm.
4. Select a pipeline from the graphics window. The assembly associated with the
selected pipeline becomes the active assembly. Pro/PIPING displays the active
assembly name in the graphics window.
You can also select an assembly from the Model Tree or the Piping System Tree.
About Converting Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven)

The User-Driven piping design mode allows you to convert piping assemblies at any
time in the piping design process using the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING
menu. You can convert existing Non Specification-Driven or Specification-Driven
piping assemblies to the other design mode on-the-fly and continue designing your
piping system.
After setting piping_design_method configuration option to the User-Driven mode,
the following actions occur:
• If a piping assembly is not open, Pro/PIPING defaults to the Non Specification-
Driven design mode. Select the Spec Driven check box to switch to the
Specification-Driven design mode.
• If an existing piping assembly is open or after you open an existing piping

assembly, Pro/PIPING switches to the piping design mode in which the assembly
was created. The Spec Driven check box indicates the design mode. You can
always convert the assembly to switch design modes.
Assembly Conversion Processes

Pro/PIPING executes two different piping assembly conversion processes based on
the piping assembly type.
Assembly Type Conversion Process
Specification-Driven to Non Clear the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING
Specification-Driven menu. After this process, Pro/PIPING considers all
pipelines as Non Specification-Driven.
All existing fittings will remain Specification-Driven.
Non Specification-Driven to Select the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING
145
Assembly Type Conversion Process
Specification-Driven menu. You must assign specification-specific data in

the Convert Pipeline dialog box for each pipeline
in the active assembly. After entering this data, the
Pro/ENGINEER message area displays each pipeline
and its conversion status. All pipelines must be
converted to Specification-Driven.
All existing fittings will remain Non Specification-

Driven.
Note:
• The piping assembly conversion processes occur on a pipeline basis only. Fittings
are not converted.
• Mixed models are not allowed. Non Specification-Driven and Specification-Driven

pipelines cannot be included in the same piping assembly.
• Mixed assemblies are allowed. Non Specification-Driven and Specification-Driven

assemblies and subassemblies can be grouped.
• All existing line stocks are automatically deleted. The Non Specification-Driven
mode permits different line stock assignments to each pipe segment.
• Pipe solids failure can occur due to pipeline size changes.
To Convert Non Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies (Spec-

Driven)
You can convert Non Specification-Driven Piping assemblies to Specification-Driven
Piping assemblies. This allows you to use existing pipe systems in the Specification-
Driven Piping design mode.
1. Configure Pro/PIPING for the User-Driven piping design mode.
2. Create or open a Non Specification-Driven piping assembly to convert.
3. Click Active Asm on the PIPING menu and select a piping assembly from either
the Piping System Tree or the graphics window.
4. Select the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING menu. The Convert Pipeline
dialog box opens. Pro/PIPING displays the active assembly under Active
Assembly.
5. If you have set the piping_schematic_driven configuration option to yes, the

Schematic Driven option will be available under Pipeline. To convert a pipeline
using the schematic information, perform the following steps:
a. Check the XML File option under Schematic Driven to make active.
146
b. Click and select an XML file from the directory path specified by the
piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option or your current working
directory. You can browse to any required directory to select the XML file.
c. The Schematic Label option under Schematic Driven lists all the eligible
pipelines for conversion, based on the information in the specified XML file.
Select a pipeline from the eligible list.
d. Click the Label tab. The Specification, Size, Schedule, Mnemonic,
Number, and Insulation boxes get updated.
e. Click the Parameters tab. The Oper. Pressure, Oper. Temperature,
Design Pressure, and Design Temperature boxes get updated if the
schematic information contains the respective operating and design pipeline
parameters.
f. Click the Defined tab. The User Defined Parameters get updated.
Note: To convert a pipeline without the schematic information, clear the XML
File option and perform the following steps.
6. Select a pipeline to convert from the Select Pipeline box. If only one pipeline is
available, Pro/PIPING displays its name beside Pipeline.
7. Click the Label tab. Under Pipeline Label, do the following:
o Select a specification, size, and schedule for the selected pipeline.
o If applicable, select mnemonic, number, and insulation. Note that a pipeline

number uniquely identifies a pipeline and it is needed for the Piping System
Tree to organize pipelines (by their number) in a piping system.
8. If applicable, type pipeline parameter values. Click the Parameters tab. Under
Pipeline Parameters, enter the parameter values. By default, Pro/PIPING
makes the pipeline parameters unavailable.
9. If applicable, type user-defined pipeline parameters. Click the Defined tab.

Under User Defined Parameters, do one of the following:
o Type a parameter name in the Name box (must begin with a letter) and a
corresponding value in the Value box. Click to add the parameter to
the pipeline.
o Retrieve existing user-defined pipeline parameters from a file. Click .

The Open dialog box opens. Select the file to retrieve and double-click.
Pro/PIPING displays the user-defined parameters.
10. Click to save the parameters to a file.
11. Click to accept all pipeline data and begin the conversion process.
The Pro/ENGINEER Message area displays the pipeline conversion status.

Pro/PIPING generates new line stocks based on the assigned specification.
147
Note:
• You must perform this conversion process each time you switch from the Non
Specification-Driven to the Specification-Driven design mode.
• You must select each assembly to convert. Mixed assemblies are allowed.
• Every pipeline in the active assembly must be converted.
• All existing fittings remain Non Specification-Driven.
• All existing line stocks are automatically deleted.
To Convert Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven)

You can convert Specification-Driven Piping assemblies to Non Specification-Driven
Piping assemblies. This allows you to use the existing pipe systems in the Non
Specification-Driven piping design mode.
1. Configure Pro/PIPING for the User-Driven piping design mode.
2. Create or open a Specification-Driven piping assembly to convert.
3. On the PIPING menu, clear the Spec Driven check box. Pro/PIPING considers
all pipelines as Non Specification-Driven.
Note:
• Every pipeline in the active assembly must be converted because the Non
Specification-Driven mode permits different line stock assignments for each pipe
segment.
• All existing fittings remain Specification-Driven. So, if you convert the pipeline to
Specification-Driven, Pro/PIPING selects and inserts all Specification-Driven
fittings according to the pipeline specification.
Converting Piping Assemblies to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Format

When you work with pipeline assemblies that are created in versions of Pro/PIPING
earlier than Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire, the piping data stored in the assembly must be
updated or converted to the Wildfire format. Otherwise, you cannot check design
rules, display flow direction, or perform an automatic reordering of the piping model.
If parameters such as STOCKNUMBER and MATERIALDATA are stored in the fitting
component features that are created in versions of Pro/PIPING earlier than
Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire, then these parameters must be converted to appropriate
parameters in the Wildfire format. For example, STOCKNUMBER must be converted to
STOCKNO and MATERIALDATA must be converted to MATERIALCODE and MATERIALDESC
in the Wildfire format.
When you specify automatic as a value for the piping_wildfire_convert
configuration option, piping assemblies are automatically converted when you invoke
148
the Pro/PIPING application. If you set the piping_wildfire_convert configuration

option to manual, you can use the Piping Assemblies Conversion dialog box and
select one of the following conversion types to convert pipeline assemblies. The
Piping Assemblies Conversion dialog box opens when you click Applications >
Piping.
• Automatic—Automatically converts all the piping assemblies in the current
Pro/PIPING session.
• Never—Piping assemblies are not converted in the current Pro/PIPING session.
• Manual—Selects the piping assemblies to be converted from the Select Piping

Assemblies to Convert list. All the assembly names are selected by default.
You can select any assembly that you want to convert from the list.
Note: When you convert piping assemblies, the assembly revision number is
updated automatically.
Specification-Driven Pipelines
About Specification-Driven Pipelines

You begin designing specification-driven piping systems by creating specification-
driven pipelines using the Create Pipeline dialog box (PIPING > Pipeline >
Create/Route). You create each pipeline in a piping assembly by using the OPER
PIPE LINE menu.
The OPER PIPE LINE menu allows you perform the following pipeline tasks:
• Create/Route—Creates a pipeline and provides you with the ROUTE PIPE
menu to route the pipeline immediately.
• Delete—Deletes the selected pipeline and provides you with the option of
deleting or suspending all associated children.
• Rename—Renames the selected pipeline.
• Merge—Merges the selected pipeline components into another pipeline.
• Spec Break—Changes the specification between the selected pipe segments or

fittings.
• Suppress—Suppresses the selected pipeline and all associated children.
• Resume—Resumes suppressed pipelines by name.
To Create a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)

1. Create or open a Specification-Driven piping assembly.
3. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Create/Route. The Create Pipeline dialog box
opens.
149
Note: To create a pipeline without the schematic information proceed to step 5.
4. If you have set the piping_schematic_driven configuration option to yes the

Schematic Driven option will be available under Pipeline. To create a pipeline
using the schematic information, perform the following steps:
b. Click and select an XML file from the directory path specified by the
directory. You can browse to any required directory to select the XML file.
c. The Schematic Label option under Schematic Driven lists all the eligible
pipelines for creation, based on the information in the specified XML file.
d. Click the Label tab. The Specification, Size, Schedule, Mnemonic,
Number, and Insulation boxes get updated.
e. Click the Parameters tab. The Oper. Pressure, Oper. Temperature,
Design Pressure, and Design Temperature boxes get updated if the
schematic information contains the respective operating and design pipeline
parameters.
f. Click the Defined tab. The User Defined Parameters get updated.
Note: To create a pipeline without the schematic information, clear the XML File
option and perform the following steps.
5. Click the Label tab. Under Pipeline Label, do the following:
a. Select a specification, size, and schedule for the selected pipeline.

b. If applicable, select mnemonic and number.
Note: A pipeline number uniquely identifies a pipeline and it is needed for
the Piping System Tree to organize pipelines (by their number) in a piping
system.
c. Click the Insulation check box to select or clear the Insulation box. The
Insulation box displays the default insulation type that is defined for the
selected specification in the Piping Specification Directory file. Specify
another value by selecting from the Insulation list.
Note: The Insulation list displays all the values that are specified in the
Insulation Directory file.
6. Under Pipeline Assembly, click and select an active assembly for the new
pipeline to be created with the Create Sub Assembly option from the Model
Tree. Pro/PIPING displays the selection in the Select Assembly box. Pro/PIPING
selects the top assembly (or last assembly selected) by default.
7. Choose one of the following tasks:
o Create a subassembly for the new pipeline. Under Create SubAssembly,

select the Name check box and select or type a subassembly name.
150
Pro/PIPING creates all pipeline features for the new pipeline in this
subassembly.
o Clear the Name check box. A new subassembly is not created. Pro/PIPING
creates all pipeline features for the new pipeline in the active assembly
displayed in the right bottom corner of the graphics window.
8. If applicable, enter pipeline parameter values. Click the Parameters tab. Under
Pipeline Parameters, type the pipeline parameter values. By default,
Pro/PIPING makes the pipeline parameters unavailable.
9. If applicable, type user-defined pipeline parameters. Click the Defined tab.

Under User Defined Parameters, do one of the following:
o Enter a parameter name in the Name box and a corresponding value in the
Value box. Note that all parameter names must begin with a letter. Click
to add the parameter to the pipeline.
o Retrieve existing user-defined pipeline parameters from a file. Click .

The Open dialog box opens. Select the file to retrieve and double-click.
Pro/PIPING displays the user-defined parameters in the list boxes.
10. Click to save the user-defined parameters to a file.
11. Click to accept all pipeline data and create the pipeline. The ROUTE PIPE
menu appears. Begin routing the pipeline.
Note: The pipeline_assembly_name_format and pipeline_label_format

configuration options set the pipeline label and assembly name formats respectively.
To Delete a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)

1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Delete.
2. Select the pipeline to delete from the graphics window. The CONFIRMATION
menu appears.
3. Click Confirm. The CHILD OPTS menu appears.
4. Select one of the following menu commands:
o Delete All—Deletes all highlighted children. The CONFIRMATION menu

appears. Click Confirm.
o Suspend All—Suspends all highlighted children. The children remain

o Child Info—Displays all information about the children to be deleted or

suspended in the Information Window.
151
To Rename a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)

1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Rename.
2. Select the pipeline to rename.
3. Enter a new name for the pipeline and click . Pro/PIPING confirms the status
of this task in the Message Area.
Specification-Driven Pipeline Merging
About Merging Pipelines

In complex piping projects that involve multiple design changes and revisions, large
piping systems are initially modeled as a single pipeline without considering the
various connected pipelines. At a later stage in the design process, you can split the
components of the large pipeline progressively into individual pipelines. This method
of pipeline design provides flexibility and improves productivity.
You can also separate different portions of a single pipeline into multiple pipelines.
This is possible when you create the required pipelines using the Create Pipeline
dialog box. You can then use the merge feature to select and merge the required
connected portion of the pipeline to the respective pipeline.
Note:
• When merging pipelines, Pro/PIPING does not perform automatic propagation of
the pipelines.
• Connected pipelines remain connected even after the merge operation.
To Merge Pipelines
1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Merge. The Merge Pipeline dialog box opens.
2. Under Select From Pipeline, select a pipeline from the graphics window or the
Model Tree.
3. Under Select Start Segment/Fitting, select the start pipe segment or fitting.
By default, an arrow is displayed along the downstream flow direction of the
pipeline at the selected pipe segment or fitting. This indicates that all of the
connected portion along the downstream portion of the pipeline is selected if you
do not specify any additional end pipes or fittings.
4. Under Select End Segment/Fitting(s), select one or more pipes or fittings to

end the selection bounds.
5. Click to add a pipe or a fitting, or click to remove a pipe or a fitting

from the end bounds.
6. Under Select To Pipe Line, select the pipeline on which the components of the
From Pipeline are merged.
152
7. Click to merge the components from the From Pipeline to the To Pipeline
or
Click to repeat the merge pipeline operation by selecting a different pipeline.
Workflow for Creating a New Pipeline by Merging Pipelines

The following figure shows how two pipelines have been modeled with the required
pipeline specifications and fittings.
The yellow circles in the previous figure represent the following modeling steps
performed to achieve the required pipeline configuration:
1. Create the AA-1002-100A pipeline using the Create Pipeline dialog box. The
specification AA has components with the rate 10K.
2. Route the entire pipeline from the location 2A to the location 2B as shown in the
previous figure.
3. Insert a 10K gate valve with automatic10K flange and gasket.
4. Insert an elbow fitting at the vertex.
5. Insert a 10K globe valve along the vertical segment.
6. Create a new pipeline using the Create Pipeline dialog box. Specify AA as the
specification, 1001 as the number, and 100A as the size.
7. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Merge, and select the pipeline that you have
created in step 6 as the To Pipeline in the Merge Pipeline dialog box.
153
8. Select the segment that you created in step 1 as the start segment under Select
Start Segment/Fitting. Specify the upstream flange of the gate valve as the
end segment under Select End Segment/Fittings(s).
9. Click . All the selected components, other than the flange, are merged to the
selected To Pipeline as shown in the following figure.
154
Workflow for Merging Pipelines

The following figure shows two pipelines that have been modeled with the required
pipeline specifications and fittings:
To merge pipelines:
1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Merge.
2. Select the trajectory that starts from the gasket in the Merge Pipeline dialog
box. Pro/PIPING highlights the selected components.
Pro/PIPING selects all the components of the AA 1002-100A pipeline located

downstream to the gasket indicated by the red arrow and associates them with the
AA-1001-100A pipeline when you click .
Selecting End Components

When merging pipelines, Pro/PIPING selects the end components based on the
following:
• If you do not specify end components when merging pipelines, all the
components located in the downstream direction of the specified start pipe
segment or fitting are associated with the selected To Pipeline during the merge
operation.
• The start and the first end piping components that you specify are used to check
the validity of the subsequent end components.
155
• Though you can select a break fitting as a bound when merging pipelines, the
merge operation starts from the adjacent fitting or pipe segment within the
selected boundary. Therefore, the From Pipeline retains the break fitting in this
case.
Pro/PIPING highlights the connected portion of the pipeline with a larger point size.
This point size is displayed until the pipeline is merged, or until you select a new
start segment or a fitting, or until you end the session.
Considerations for Merging Pipelines

• The configuration of the pipeline that you want to merge does not change during
the merge operation, that is, the merged pipes and fittings do not change in size,
specification, schedule, and dimensions.
• You can separate pipes and fittings merged from a pipeline and merge them back
only to the original pipeline that contained these pipes and fittings. Pro/PIPING
does not allow nested merge operations. All the pipes and fittings in the From
Pipeline, including the ones that are not merged from the original pipeline, are
merged back to the original pipeline. The bound selection and the To Pipeline
selection are not required.
• If the original pipeline is deleted, suppressed, or the original pipeline assembly is

not retrieved in the current session, you cannot separate the pipeline
components.
• You cannot select a suppressed pipeline as a From Pipeline. Therefore, you

cannot merge the pipes and fittings of a suppressed pipeline with other pipelines.
• You cannot select a pipeline as a To Pipeline if:
o The selected pipeline already has pipes and fittings that are merged from
another pipeline.
o Part of the selected pipeline has already been merged to another pipeline.
• If the To Pipeline already has pipes and fittings merged from one pipeline, you
cannot merge pipelines to it from another pipeline.
• You can merge different parts of a pipeline to one or more pipelines.
• The insulation assigned to the selected pipes and fittings of the From Pipeline
within the selected bounds is merged to the To Pipeline during the merge
operation. The insulation assigned to the From Pipeline beyond the selected
bounds is not merged to the To Pipeline.
• Pipe spools and spool labels that contain the selected pipes and fittings of the
From Pipeline are deleted from the From Pipeline after the merge operation.
• The pipeline label attached to the selected pipes of the From Pipeline are deleted
after the merge operation.
156
• You cannot perform a merge operation if the piping features of the From Pipeline
are included in the user-defined group. Ungroup the piping features before you
proceed.
Specification Break
About Specification Break

The specification break functionality changes the specification of a pipeline at a
specified location to accommodate the piping design requirements, such as changing
material at a location on a pipeline, changing the pressure rating at a location on a
pipeline, and so on. For example, you can change the material of a pipeline from
stainless steel to carbon steel, or you can change the pressure rating from #150 to
#300 at the required location on the pipeline.
To Insert a Specification Break

1. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu opens.
2. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Spec Break. The Specification Break dialog box
opens.
3. Under Select Start Segment/Fitting, select a fitting or pipe segment on the

pipeline to start the specification break.
4. Under Select End Segment/Fitting(s), select one or more pipe segments or

fittings on the same pipeline where you specified the start for the specification
break. Pro/PIPING ends the specification break at this selection. The selected end
segments or fittings appear in the Select End Segment/Fitting(s) box.
Note:
o If you want the new specification that you have selected to be propagated
till the end of the pipeline, do not use the Select End Segment/Fitting(s)
option.
o If the pipeline that you selected has one or more branch segments in the
downstream direction of the segment or the fitting that you selected to
start the specification break, select more than one fitting or pipe segment
to stop the specification change along each branch of the pipeline.
5. Under Select Specification, the various specifications for the selected fitting or
the pipe segment are displayed. If required, select a different specification name
from the list.
6. Click to propagate the selected specification for the pipeline components

between the start and end locations that you specified.
157
Example: Inserting a Specification Break

In the following example, the downstream flange is selected as the start fitting. The
elbow fitting and the check valve on the branch side of the TEE fitting are selected as
the end fittings. The specification displayed in Select Specification in the
Specification Break dialog box is A7K.
1 A3A
2 Start fitting
3 End fittings
The pipeline specification after propagation changes as shown in the following figure:
1 A3A
2 A7K
Note: In the previous example, if you do not select the check valve as one of the
end fittings, all the fittings and segments in the branch side of the TEE fitting change
to the new specification, A7K.
Suppressing Pipelines
To Suppress a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)

1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Suppress.
2. Select the pipeline to suppress. The CONFIRMATION menu appears.
158
3. Click Confirm. Pro/PIPING suppresses the selected pipeline and all of its
highlighted children.
To Resume a Suppressed Pipeline (Spec-Driven)

1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Resume. The SEL MENU appears and lists all
suppressed pipelines by name.
2. Select a suppressed pipeline. Pro/PIPING resumes the pipeline. You can view the
resumed pipeline in either the Model Tree, the Piping System Tree, or the
graphics window.
Piping Layers
About Piping Layers (Spec-Driven)

You can use layers in a model or a layout as an organizational tool. By associating
items with a layer, you can collectively manipulate them such as to delete, reorder,
suppress, or show or blank them selectively.
Pro/PIPING creates three piping layers after you create a pipeline. These layers are
located in the active pipe assembly and use the naming convention established in the
Specification Database during piping setup.
Pro/PIPING creates the following three types of layers:
• ROUTE—Contains all routing features in piping assembly
• FITTING—Contains all fitting components for the subassembly
• SOLID—Contains all pipe solids for subassembly
To View Piping Layers (Spec-Driven)

3. If you create a new assembly, you must create a pipeline to view the piping
layers. From the PIPING menu, click Pipeline > Create/Route and create a
pipeline. Pro/PIPING automatically creates piping layers after pipeline creation.
4. Click , or click Show > Layer Tree to view the piping layers.
Specification-Driven Pipeline Routing
About Specification-Driven Pipeline Routing

Specification-driven pipeline routing is available to piping designers who work in
large industrial environments. The piping specification database is the architecture
that supports the specification-driven functions such as specification-driven routing
or specification-driven fitting insertion. This database must be in place before you
159
can use specification-driven pipeline routing or any of the other specification-driven

functions.
Specification-driven pipeline routing gives you the ability to access and route only
those pipelines that have been set up previously in the specification-driven database.
About Setting a Start Point

You must set a start point before you can route a pipe segment from one point to
another, extend a pipe segment, or branch a segment into a pipeline at a specified
point.
Use the Define Start dialog box to set a start point. The set start function allows
you to perform the following actions:
• Set a start point using an existing point, an entry port, a pipe segment, or a pipe
end.
• Set a start point from the corner of a pipe segment that has a corner of type
fitting.
• Use the set start features of point type or entry port type to route a pipe segment
by aligning the edge of the pipe segment to the edge of an existing pipe segment
or to an existing plane.
• Route a pipeline from the free port of a valid pipe fitting, such as a branch fitting
or an inline fitting. The size of the pipe segment that is routed on a free port
depends on the size of the fitting end that is free.
Note:
o When you select fitting ports to route a pipeline, you can select only those
free fitting ports that are not mated.
o The set start point that is created is the projection of the port on the main
segment. It is similar to setting a branch start point, but takes parameters
from the fitting port automatically. The next route will appear to be from
the center of the fitting itself. If the route segment is aligned with the fitting
port it becomes a placement constraint for the fitting.
Note: You can route a pipeline from a set start feature only when you create it.
Route Pipe Menu

The following commands are available on the ROUTE PIPE menu to route and
manipulate line segments:
• Pipe Envrnmt—Sets the default shape and corner type, depending on the
pipeline being routed.
• Set Start—Sets a start point or create a branch start point.
• Extend—Creates a new pipe segment by extending a pipeline in the specified

direction.
160
• To Pnt/Port—Creates a pipe piece from the current start point to the selected
point, port, or pipe end.
• Follow—Creates a pipeline by following an axis, curve, existing pipeline, or

sketched path.
• Connect—Connects entry ports or connects individual unconnected segments of

the same pipeline or connects both.
• Branch—Creates a section that taps into a pipeline at the point you have
specified.
• Insert Point—Inserts a point in the previously routed pipe segment.
• Insert—Inserts a selected pipeline or a portion of it into the active pipeline.
• Delete Last—Deletes the last routing operation.
• Redefine—Redefines the references of the routing operation.
• Suppress—Suppresses the pipe segments.
• Resume—Resumes the suppressed pipe segment.
• Modify Dim—Changes the dimensions of any piping features or assembly

components.
• Replace—Replaces selected pipeline segment with a routing operation.
These commands are available in both the Non Specification-Driven and

Specification-Driven modes.
To Set a Start Point

1. Click PIPING > Route > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens. Select
a start point from the following options on the menu and then select a location on
the pipe segment:
o Any—Selects any point on the pipe segment.
o Corner—Selects a valid corner for specifying the branch point. Available

corners on the active pipeline are indicated by a crosshair.
o End—Selects a pipe segment end.
o Point—Selects a datum point.
o Port—Selects an entry port for equipment or a free port for a fitting.
o Segment—Selects a point on the pipe segment.
Note: If the pipe segment is not in the active assembly, you can route the
branch pipeline from the main pipeline that is not in the active assembly.
Note: Pro/PIPING automatically selects one of the previously specified start

points based on any selection that you make on the graphics screen, even if you
do not use the previously cited options.
161
2. Under Select Parameters, select the specification, size, and the schedule.
Note: When you select the free port of a fitting, Pro/PIPING updates the pipe
parameters depending on the fitting. You cannot edit the Specification, Size,
and Schedule boxes if you select the free port of a fitting.
3. Click to define the start part and close the dialog box.
To Route a Pipe in Specification-Driven Mode

1. Set a start point using PIPING > ROUTE PIPE > Set Start.
2. Create segments using either the To Pnt/Port, Extend, or Follow menu

commands. You can create individual unconnected pipe segments.
3. Connect individual segments of the same pipeline using ROUTE PIPE > Connect
> Define.
4. Create other pipelines to add branches to the main pipeline. Then create
branches using ROUTE PIPE > Branch.
To Route a Pipeline by Referencing a Pipe Edge

1. Click PIPING > ROUTE PIPE > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens.
2. Select a start point of type Port.
3. Under Select Parameters, the Specification, Size, and the Schedule boxes
display the default values. Select another value from the specification, size, and
schedule lists, if required.
4. Under Align Pipe Edge, select the pipe edge or the plane that you want to
reference. Based on your selection, specify one of the following:
o If you select a plane, under Select Pipe/Plane, click one of the following
to specify the offset for the pipe segment that is to be routed with reference
to the selected plane:
—Specifies the offset from the selected plane to the nearest edge of
the pipe that is to be routed.
—Specifies the offset from the selected plane to the farthest edge of
the pipe that is to be routed.
o If you select a pipe segment, click one of the following to specify the offset
for the pipe segment that is to be routed, with reference to the selected
pipe edge:
—Specifies the offset between the left edge of the existing pipe and
the left edge of the pipe that is to be routed.
162
—Specifies the offset between the left edge of the existing pipe and
the right edge of the pipe that is to be routed.
—Specifies the offset between the right edge of the existing pipe and
the left edge of the pipe that is to be routed.
—Specifies the offset between the right edge of the existing pipe and
the right edge of the pipe that is to be routed.
—Specifies the offset between the top edge of the existing pipe and
the top edge of the pipe that is to be routed.
—Specifies the offset between the top edge of the existing pipe and
the bottom edge of the pipe that is to be routed.
—Specifies the offset between the bottom edge of the existing pipe
and the top edge of the pipe that is to be routed.
—Specifies the offset between the bottom edge of the existing pipe
and the bottom edge of the pipe that is to be routed.
Note: The green circle represents the pipe that is to be routed, while the
black circle represents the selected pipe that you are referencing.
5. Under Specify Offset Distance, specify the required offset distance from the
selected pipe edge or plane. Click to flip the offset direction, if required.
6. Click to route the pipeline along the required pipe edge.
163
Reference Edges for Routing

When the reference pipe segment is not along the z-axis of the Global Csys, the left,
right, top, and bottom edges are defined as shown in the following figure.
The plane ACBD that passes through the pipe segment AB and parallel to the y-z
plane is the base for the left and the right edges of the pipe segment AB. The plane
ABEF that passes through the pipe segment AB and perpendicular to the plane ACBD
is the base for the top and bottom edges of the pipe segment AB.
When the reference pipe segment is not along the z-axis of the Global Csys, the left,
right, top, and bottom edges are defined as shown in the following figure.
The plane ABCD that passes through the pipe segment AB and perpendicular to the
x-y plane is the base for the left and the right edges of the pipe segment AB. The
plane EFGH that passes through the pipe segment AB and perpendicular to the plane
ACBD is the base for the top and bottom edges of the pipe segment AB.
164
Associativity Between the Routed Pipeline and the Reference

Pipeline
The offset that you specify for the Set Start of a new pipe segment that is to be
routed, is calculated from a reference pipe segment that has the biggest outer
diameter in that pipe run.
Note: Pro/PIPING does not consider the insulation diameter for offset calculations.
When you change the biggest outer diameter of the reference pipe segment by either
using the Modify Pipe dialog box or by inserting a reducer on the reference pipe
segment, the actual distance is changed between the reference pipe segment and
the new pipe segment created after routing. This maintains the offset that you
specified earlier.
In the following figure, the pipe segment in black is the reference pipe segment and
the pipe segment in green is the new pipe segment created after routing. Before a
reducer is inserted on the reference pipe segment, the distance between the
reference pipe segment and the new pipe segment created after routing is as shown:
1 Original centerline distance
2 Original offset distance
165
After a reducer is inserted on the reference pipe segment, the distance between the
reference pipe segment and the new pipe segment created after routing is updated
as shown in the following figure:
1 Changed centerline distance
2 Original offset distance maintained
Routing Flexible Hoses
About Routing Flexible Hoses in Specification-Driven Piping

You must include a category FLEX_PIPE, in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file to enable
routing of flexible pipes in specification-driven piping.
To Enable Routing of Flexible Hoses in Specification-Driven Piping

1. Specify a new category, FLEX_PIPE, in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file and save it.
2. Click Set Up > SpecDB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens.
3. Create a new auto selection file using the FLEX_PIPE category.
4. Open the piping_spec_dir.ptd file.
166
5. Create a new specification using the newly created auto selection file. If the auto-
selection file is not available in the Auto Selection box, click to browse to
the location where the file is stored.
6. Click to insert the new specification under Select Record.
7. Click . The specification is now available while creating a pipeline.
To Use the PIPE ENV Menu

The PIPE ENV menu is available for both straight and flexible pipelines.
If you create a pipeline is using a specification that has PIPE as the category, you
can change only the corner type of that pipeline using the PIPE ENV menu.
1. In the ROUTE PIPE menu, click Pipe Envrnmt. The PIPE ENV menu appears.
2. Click Corner Type to open the CORNER TYPE menu.
3. Under the CORNER TYPE menu, Bend, Fitting, or Miter are available for
selection, depending on the size and specification of the pipeline.
4. Select the required corner type and click Done.
If you create a pipeline using a specification that has FLEX_PIPE as the category, the
Line Shape option is available in the PIPE ENV menu.
1. In the ROUTE PIPE menu, click Pipe Envrnmt. The PIPE ENV menu appears.
2. Click Line Shape to open the LINE SHAPE menu.
o Click Flexible and Free Length to determine the length of the flexible pipe
segment.
o Click Flexible and Set Length to specify a length for the flexible pipe after
creating each segment.
o Click Straight to route using straight pipelines.
Note: Free Length and Set Length are available only when you select Flexible
in the LINE SHAPE menu.
4. Click Done.
Specification-Driven Routing with Extend
About Specification-Driven Routing with Extend

You can route a new pipe segment by extending the segment in a selected direction.
To extend a pipe segment, use one of the following reference coordinate systems:
• Any coordinate system in the active assembly or any other assembly
167
• The global coordinate system in the active assembly
• The routing coordinate system
By default, Pro/PIPING uses the reference coordinate system that was used for the
previous extend operation in the active assembly. If an extend operation was not
performed earlier in the active assembly, the global coordinate system is used by
default.
To Extend a Pipeline Using a Csys Reference

1. Click PIPING > Route > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens.
2. Specify the start point for the pipeline extension and close the Define Start
dialog box.
3. Click PIPING > Route > Extend. The Extend dialog box opens.
4. Under Select Reference, do the following:
o Under Selection, click to select the reference coordinate system for

the pipe segment to be routed.
or
Select one of the following from the list adjacent to to specify the
reference coordinate system:
Global Csys—Selects the global coordinate system as the reference

coordinate system.
Route Csys—Selects the routing coordinate system as the reference

coordinate system.
Other coordinate systems that you have used for the previous extend
operations in the same extend session.
o Under Type, select the extend type as Csys to specify that the pipe
segment will be extended to the given coordinates of the reference
coordinate system.
5. Under To Coordinates, select the following dimension options:
o Select the system as Spherical, Cylindrical, or Cartesian and use the

Angle box to specify which of the following formats the angle in the
selected system be given:
Degrees—Specifies the angle in the degrees format.
Gradient Ratio—Specifies the angle in the ratio format. For example, if

you want a 1:25 slope, you must specify 25. The end of the pipe segment
will drop 1 unit for every 25 units forward.
168
Gradient Percent—Specifies the angle in the percentage format. For

example, if you want a 1:25 slope, you must specify 4. The end of the pipe
segment will drop 4 percent of its total forward length.
Note: The Angle option is not applicable for the Cartesian system. The
angle dimension is always displayed in degrees irrespective of the format
specified in the Angle box.
o Select one of the following dimension types:
Relative—The extension of the end of the segment to be extended is with

reference to the start of the segment.
Absolute—The extension of the end of the segment to be extended is with

reference to the selected reference coordinate system.
o Under Locking Axes, select the extend directions along the x-, y-, or z-
axes, or along all three axes.
o Under Coordinates, type the coordinate values along the respective axes
in the available boxes or use the thumb wheel increments to specify the
values. You can also click and drag the pipe segment to the required
length. Pro/PIPING displays a preview of the pipe segment that is extended
using the drag operation, in the graphics window. Click to lock the
required coordinate boxes. The display changes to to indicate that the
boxes are locked.
Note: The coordinates displayed under Coordinates vary depending on

the selection that you make in the System box. If you select the system as
Spherical, the coordinates displayed are r, theta, and phi. If you select the
system as Cylindrical, the coordinates displayed are r, theta, and z. If you
select the system as Cartesian, the coordinates displayed are x, y, and z.
6. Click to extend the pipe segment to the specified coordinates.
To Extend a Pipeline Using a Csys Axis Reference

dialog box.

or
169

coordinate system.

coordinate system.
o Under Type, select the extend type as Csys Axis to specify that the pipe
segment will be extended along the selected axis of the reference
coordinate system.
5. Under Along Csys Axis, do the following:
a. Under Select Axis, select one of the reference coordinate system axes as
the reference axis.
b. Under Options, select one of the following to specify the length of the pipe
segment:
Length—Extends the pipe segment to the given length along the reference
axis. Specify a value for the length in the Value box.
Offset Fm Ref—Extends the pipe segment along the reference axis until its
end is at a given offset distance from another selected reference plane or
coordinate system. Do each of the following:
Under Select Plane/Csys, select the reference plane or coordinate

system.
Specify a value for the offset distance in the Value box or click and
drag the pipe segment to the required length. Pro/PIPING displays a
preview of the pipe segment that is extended using the drag operation, in
the graphics window.
If a coordinate system is selected, use the Projection list to specify an axis

as the projection axis. If you project the end of the pipe segment to the
selected projection axis, the corresponding coordinate value will be equal to
the given offset distance.
Note: The Projection box is not available if you select a plane under
Select Plane/Csys.
Note: The options Offset, Offset Edge, Offset Edge Fm Ref, and Stop At are
not available if you use the Csys Axis extend type.
6. Click to extend the pipe segment along the reference axis with the required
length.
170
To Extend a Pipeline by Referencing an Edge, Axis, or Segment

dialog box.

or

coordinate system.

coordinate system.
o Under Type, select the extend type as Axis/Edge/Segment to specify

that the pipe segment will be extended parallel to the selected axis, edge,
or a pipe segment.
o Select an axis, edge, or a pipe segment as the reference.
5. Under Parallel to Axis/Edge/Pipe Segment, select one of the following from

the Options list:
o Length—Extends the pipe segment to the given length along the reference
axis, edge, or pipe segment. Specify a value for the length in the Value
box.
o Offset Fm Ref—Extends the pipe segment along the reference axis, edge,
or a pipe segment till the end of the pipe segment is at a given offset
distance from another selected reference plane or coordinate system. Do
each of the following:

system.
171

Select Plane/Csys.
Note: The options Offset, Offset Edge, Offset Edge Fm Ref, and Stop At are
not available if you use an axis, edge, or pipe segment as a reference to extend
the pipeline.
6. Click to extend the pipe segment along the reference axis, edge, or pipe
segment with a required length.
To Extend a Pipeline by Referencing a Plane or a Point

dialog box.
3. Click PIPING > Route > Extend to open the Extend dialog box.

or

coordinate system.

coordinate system.
o Under Type, select the extend type as Plane/Point to specify that the
pipe segment will be extended up to the selected plane or a point.
o Select a plane or a point as the reference.
5. Under Upto Plane/Point, select one of the following from the Options list:
o Length—Extends the pipe segment to the given length up to a reference

plane or a point. Specify a value for length in the Value box.
172
o Offset—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point until

the end of the pipe segment is at a given offset distance from the reference
plane or point. By default, Pro/PIPING displays the distance between the
start of the pipe segment and the reference plane or point in the Value
box. Change this value if required.
o Offset Fm Ref—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane or

point until the end of the pipe segment is at a given offset distance from
another selected reference plane or coordinate system. Do each of the
following:

system.

Select Plane/Csys.
o Offset Edge—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point

until the end of the pipe segment is at a calculated offset distance from the
reference plane or point. Specify a value for the offset distance in the
Value box.
Note: Calculated offset distance = offset distance (+) or (-) 1/2 pipe outer
diameter, depending on the offset direction.
o Offset Edge Fm Ref—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane

or point until the end of the pipe segment is at a calculated offset distance
from another selected reference plane or pipe edge.
o Stop At—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point.
6. Click to extend the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point with the
required length.
173
Routing with Equipment Nozzles
About Equipment Nozzles

A nozzle is either a Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly that has a coordinate system
representing a connection port. The following feature level parameters must be
present in the port:
• SIZE—A string parameter that stores the nozzle size, which is used to set up the
default pipe size when a pipe routing starts from the port. It is also used for the
size match checking between a nozzle and its connected pipeline. Nozzle sizes
specified here must match those in the specification database.
• END_TYPE—A string parameter that stores the nozzle end type, which is used to
automate the fitting selection. It is also used for end compatibility checking
between a nozzle and its connected pipeline.
• RATING—A string parameter used to store the nozzle rating, which is used to
automate the fitting selection. It is also used for end compatibility checking
between a nozzle and its connected pipeline.
To Route a Pipeline from an Equipment Nozzle

1. Use the Pro/ENGINEER Assembly mode to assemble a nozzle into an assembly.
2. Click Applications > Standard > Edit > Setup > Name > Feature to assign a
name to the port of the nozzle, which will be used as the name of the nozzle.
3. Click Applications > Piping > PIPING > Info. The Report Pipeline dialog box
opens.
4. If a pipeline starts or ends at a nozzle, the nozzle name appears as the From or
To for the pipeline in the pipeline report. Generate this information, using the
Report Pipeline dialog box. This name appears in the Information Window.
If the assembly where the nozzle is assembled has a name and a FITTING_CODE
parameter with the value of EQUIPMENT assigned to it, then its name is used as
the equipment name. Output for the From or To is "Equipment_Name –
Nozzle_Name". For example, E7A-N2 means Heater Exchange E7A and Nozzle
N2.
Note: You have to assign a FITTING_CODE parameter with the value of

EQUIPMENT to an equipment part in order to designate the part as an equipment.
To Route from a Port

1. Click Route > Set Start and select an entry port if it has the Size parameter.
The Define Start dialog box updates to the nozzle port size.
2. If you continue to route, the routing is based on the port size.
3. You can change the port size in the Define Start dialog box and continue to
route.
174
To Route to a Port
1. Click the Route > To/Pnt Port command or the Route > Connect command.
2. Select a valid entry port in the piping assembly. The current pipe size may be
different from the selected port size. If so, a warning message appears with a
size mismatch message.
3. Using a reducer, you can change the size of the pipe or the port so that they
match.
An error message can appear when you modify the pipeline, and the port and
pipe become mismatched.
Checking Pipe and Port Sizes

The modified size of a pipe and the existing port size are checked against each other
in the Modify Pipeline dialog box. If the modified pipe size does not match with its
connected port size, warning messages appear.
Specification-Driven Routing with Follow
About Specification Driven Routing with Follow

You can create a pipeline that mirrors or follows an existing pipeline using the Route
with Follow functionality. You can follow a pipeline within the same assembly or in
other subassemblies. You can add to the path of an existing pipeline or create a line
segment coincident with an axis.
You can also sketch geometry for the pipeline to follow or select a chain of curves.
To Route a Pipeline with Follow

1. Click PIPING > Route > Follow. The PIPE FOLLOW menu appears.
2. You can route a pipe follow using anyone of the following methods. Select the
routing option and then click Done.
o Sketch—Create a segment based on sketched geometry.
The SETUP SK PLN and SETUP PLANE menus appear. Set up and specify
a new sketching plane. A sketching window opens. When you have
completed your sketch, exit the sketcher.
o Curve—Create a segment based on a curve. The CHAIN menu appears.

Select individual curves.
o Pipe Line—Create a line segment based on an existing pipeline. The

START/END menu appears, specify start end segments or select the entire
line. When the CONSTRAINT menu appears, specify a distance (click
DistInPlane), specify a start point (click Start Point and select a datum
point or pipe end) or specify a datum point for the new pipe to go through
(click Thru Point).
175
o Axis—Create a line segment coincident with an axis.
3. When the INT FOLLOW menu appears, select Done Follow to create the pipe
follow.
To Redefine Pipe Follow References

1. Click PIPING > Route > Redefine.
2. Select the follow segment you want to redefine. The INT FOLLOW menu
appears.
3. Click Change. The CHG FOLLOW menu appears.
4. Select the change follow condition you want to change:
o Pipe Line—To redefine the seed pipeline of the pipe follow feature (this
option appears if the original pipe follow feature is created by following a
pipeline).
o Sketch—To redefine the sketch of the pipe follow feature (this option
appears if the follow feature is created by following a sketch).
o Curve—To reselect the curve selected for the pipe follow feature (this
option appears if the follow feature is created by following a curve).
o Axis—To reselect the axis selected for the pipe follow feature (this option
appears if the follow feature is created by following an axis).
o Ends—To trim and extend the end of the current pipe follow segment.
o Start/End—To change the start and end segments of the current pipe
follow segment.
o Constraint—To change the offset constraint type of the current pipe follow
segment.
5. Make the changes to the pipe follow.
Branch Routing
About Branch Routing

Intersubassembly branch routing allows you to select a pipeline from another
subassembly to branch to or from the active piping assembly.
To Set a Branch Start Point

2. Under Type, select Segment or Corner and then select a location on the pipe
segment.
3. Under Select Parameters, select the specification, size, and the schedule.
176
Note: You cannot edit the Specification, Size, and the Schedule boxes if you
select the Type as Corner.
4. Under Select Placement, select one of the following placement location types:
o —Specifies the actual length along the pipe centerline.
o —Specifies the length ratio along the pipe centerline.
Note: For both of the above location types, by default, Pro/PIPING

considers the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment.
Click under Location Parameter to flip the location with reference to
the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes to to indicate a
change in the reference location.
o —Specifies the distance from the upstream corner to the point.
o —Specifies the distance from a plane to the point.
o —Specifies the distance from an upstream fitting to the point. Use

under Location Parameter to flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING
changes to to indicate a change in the reference port.
Note:
You can select another fitting on the same pipe run for reference, if
required.
You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting.
5. Under Location Parameter, specify a location parameter. Use the thumb wheel
to increase or decrease the offset distance or specify a value in the box adjacent
to the thumb wheel to change the offset distance.
6. Click the arrow to open the Offset From section of the dialog box.
Note: You cannot edit the Offset From section if the branch pipe size is equal to
the main pipe size.
Select from the following offset options:
o —Offsets from the centerline of the main pipe to the centerline of the
branch pipe.
177
o —Offsets from the top or bottom of the main pipe to the top or
bottom of the branch pipe.
o —Flips the direction of the offset.
7. Click to set the branch start point.
To Route a Branch to a Pipeline

1. Click PIPING > Route > Branch. The Branch Pipe dialog box opens.
2. Under Select Branch Location, select a point, a pipe segment, or a corner for
specifying the branch point.
3. If you specify the branch point on a segment or at a corner, under Select

Placement, select one of the following placement location types to place the
branch point:
o —Specifies the actual length along the pipe centerline.
o —Specifies the length ratio along the pipe centerline.
Note: For both the above location types, by default, Pro/PIPING considers
the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click
under Location Parameter to flip the location with reference to the end of
the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes to to indicate the change
in the reference location.
o —Specifies the distance from the upstream corner to the point.
o —Specifies the distance from a plane to the point.
o —Specifies the distance from an upstream fitting to the point. Use

under Location Parameter to flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING
changes to to indicate a change in the reference port.
Note:
You can select another fitting on the same pipe run for reference, if
required.
You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting.
178
4. Under Location Parameter, specify a location parameter. Use the thumb wheel
to increase or decrease the offset distance, or specify a value in the box adjacent
to the thumb wheel to change the offset distance.
5. If you are inserting an angle branch, select Control placement using angle
and use the slider or type a value to adjust the angles. If you select this option,
you can modify only the angle. You can control the angle to use by clicking Angle
Type at the top of the Branch Pipe dialog box and selecting one of the options:
o Angle To—The angle where the branching ends.
o Angle From—The angle where the branching starts.
6. Click the arrow to open the Offset From section of the dialog box.
Note: You cannot edit the Offset From section if the branch pipe size is equal to
the main pipe size.
Select from the following offset options:
o —Offsets from the centerline of the main pipe to the centerline of the
branch pipe.
o —Offsets from the top or bottom of the main pipe to the top or
bottom of the branch pipe.
o —Flips the direction of the offset.
7. Click to complete the branch and close the dialog box.
About Stub-in Branches

A stub-in branch is distinguished from a branch fitting because the stub-in branch
does not contain any solid fitting part. The pipe solid parts of a stub-in branch
intersect and are trimmed. The stub-in branch is either equal to or smaller in
diameter than the main pipe, and can be created at an angle to the main pipeline, or
offset from the top or bottom of the main pipe solid part.
Considerations for Creating a Point on a Pipe Segment From Either

End
If you insert a point on an extended segment and there is a bend at the end of the
segment, the point dimension is created with reference to the vertex. This is true
even though you have specified the location with reference to the end of the pipe
segment in the dialog box. Therefore, when you modify the dimension of the point,
the displayed value is the sum of the distance from the point to the segment and the
distance from the segment end to the vertex.
179
Points on a Segment
About Adding Points to Existing Routing

Use the Insert Point command in the ROUTE PIPE menu to add new points to an
existing pipe segment and change the shape of the pipe segment by moving these
points to new positions.
Note: You cannot use the Insert Point command on a pipe segment that is created
using the Follow or the Connect commands.
To Add Dynamic Points to Existing Routing

1. Click ROUTE PIPE > Insert Point.
2. Select a pipe segment with a bend to insert the points. The ends of the pipe
segment are highlighted.
3. Click Create and Dynamic in the CHOOSE POINT menu and click Done. An
additional point is highlighted between the ends of the pipe segment.
4. Select a point or a section on the pipe segment to move. Two points are
highlighted based on your selection.
5. Click No or Yes in the message area depending on whether you want to create a
single break point or two break points.
6. Define the motion plane using the SETUP PLANE menu.
7. Use the sliders in the MOVE DRAG SEGMENT thermo tool to move the break
point as well as the selected section of the pipe segment. You can move the
selected section of the pipe segment normal to the plane as well as normal to the
pipe segment. The new shape of the pipeline is displayed dynamically according
to the slider movement.
Use the sensitivity slider to control the step value of the slider movement.
Note: Set the sensitivity slider value to 100 before you use the other sliders to
move the point or the pipe segment.
A section of the pipe segment is marked between the highlighted points as

discussed in step 4.
After setting the slider values, left-click in the area above the first slider in the
MOVE DRAG SEGMENT thermo tool to display the new shape of the pipeline or
right-click to reset the MOVE DRAG SEGMENT thermo tool.
8. Use the Offset Surf or the Offset Csys commands in the OFFSET PNT menu to
define the dimensioning references of the datum point.
The original pipe segment is now replaced with new datum points and Pipe to
Point features.
180
To Add Static Points to Existing Routing

1. Click ROUTE PIPE > Insert Point.
2. Select a straight pipeline segment to modify.
3. To modify a free-length flexible pipe, go to Step 6. A theoretical bend intersection

point appears on the screen as 'x.'
4. Click Select in the CHOOSE POINT menu to select an existing datum point. The
pipe segment is reshaped to pass through the selected datum point.
or
Click Create and Static in the CHOOSE POINT menu and click Done. The
DATUM POINT dialog box opens. Create a datum point.
Note: To create a datum point using any other datum point creation tool, do the
following:
a. Open a datum point creation dialog box by clicking a datum point creation
tool. For example, open the Offset CSys Datum Point dialog box without
closing the DATUM POINT dialog box that you have opened earlier.
b. Create a datum point using the Offset CSys Datum Point dialog box.
c. Select the newly created datum point so that it appears as a reference in
the DATUM POINT dialog box and click Ok.
5. Use the Offset Surf or the Offset Csys commands in the OFFSET PNT menu to
define the dimensioning references of the datum point.
The selected pipe segment is replaced with new points and Pipe to Point features.
6. Select a free-length flexible pipeline. You can add, delete, and move interpolation
points as needed or move the control polygon points using the Modify Curve
dialog box.
Specification-Driven Pipeline Insertion and Modification
About Inserting and Modifying a Pipeline in Another Pipeline

Pro/PIPING allows you to insert a pipeline or a part of the pipeline into another
pipeline. This is useful to piping designers who work in large industrial environments
and frequently use certain pipeline configurations. These pipeline configurations can
be inserted into other pipelines and modified according to the requirement of
designers to achieve productivity gains in modeling.
The Insert Pipeline dialog box allows you to insert a selected pipeline, referred to
as the From Pipeline, into the active pipeline, referred to as the To Pipeline.
Use the Pipeline Insertion function to perform the following tasks:
• Copy a selected pipeline or a part of it and insert it on the To pipeline at the Set
Start location.
181
• Specify the first segment of the From Pipeline that is inserted into the To Pipeline.
• Specify the orientation of the first segment of the From Pipeline in the To Pipeline
assembly.
• Specify the rotation angle about the first segment to orient the inserted From
Pipeline.
• Propagate the inserted From Pipeline based on the size and the specification
information defined at the Set Start location on the To Pipeline.
To Insert and Modify a Pipeline in Another Pipeline

2. Select a starting location for the pipeline insertion referred to as the Set Start
location and close the Set Start dialog box.
3. Click PIPING > Route > Insert. The Insert Pipeline dialog box opens. The
Selection tab is selected by default.
4. Under Select Pipeline, to select the From Pipeline, do one of the following:
o Select a pipeline or any component of the pipeline from the current

Pro/PIPING session.
o Click and select a pipeline assembly using the Open dialog box.
Pro/PIPING displays the selected pipeline assembly in a separate preview
window.
Click to preview the selected From Pipeline in the preview window.
5. Under Select Start Segment/Fitting, select the pipe segment or fitting to start
the selection bound. By default, an arrow is displayed along the downstream flow
direction of the pipeline at the selected pipe segment or fitting. This indicates
that the entire connected portion along the downstream portion of the pipeline is
selected if you do not specify any additional end pipes or fittings.
6. Under Select End Segment/Fitting(s), select one or more pipes or fittings to
end the selection bounds. Click to add a pipe or a fitting or click to

remove a pipe or a fitting from the end bounds.
7. Under Select First Segment, click or to view the list of first

segments and select one of them.
Note: If you have not activated the preview window, Pro/PIPING automatically
activates the preview window so that you can select the bound segments or the
fittings.
8. Specify the orientation values for the inserted From Pipeline, if required, using
the options that are available when you click the Orientation tab.
Note: The Orientation tab is available only after you select the From Pipeline.
182
9. If required, under Rotation, specify the rotation angle of the selected first
segment in the Angle box, or use the thumb wheel to specify the orientation.
Specify any value between 0 and 360 degrees.
Pro/PIPING temporarily displays the trajectory of the inserted From Pipeline in

Selecting Pipeline Bounds

You can select an entire From Pipeline or a part of the pipeline for insertion into the
To Pipeline by selecting one or more bounding segments or fittings. The pipeline
bounds are selected as follows:
• If you select only the start segment or fitting and do not specify end segments or
fittings, Pro/PIPING selects the entire pipeline starting from the start component
to its downstream as the pipeline for insertion.
For example, in the following figure, segment S2 is the only bound that is
selected.
Pro/PIPING selects and highlights the From Pipeline based on the preceding
selection, as shown in the following figure:
• If you select more than one segment or fitting, Pro/PIPING selects the portion of
the pipeline between the selected components as the pipeline for insertion.
183
For example, in the following figure, the fitting F1 and the segment S4 have been
selected as the bounds.
Pro/PIPING selects and highlights the From Pipeline based on the preceding
selection, as shown in the following figure:
• If you select pipeline configurations with branch series, the part of the pipeline
between the selected bounds including the bounds is selected as the pipeline for
insertion.
For example, in the following figure, multiple pipeline bounds are selected along a
branched pipeline.
184
Pro/PIPING selects and highlights the From Pipeline as shown in the following
figure:
• If you select a TEE fitting as a pipeline bound, the entire branch side part of the
pipeline is selected as a pipeline bound. You can specify pipeline bounds on the
branch side and specify another location along the branch side to restrict the
bound. If you want to select pipeline components upstream or downstream of the
TEE fitting, specify additional pipeline bounds along the required direction.
Selecting the First Segment

You can insert and orient the From Pipeline using any of the pipe segments located
on it. The first segment is used to orient the inserted From Pipeline. The first
segment is selected based on the following:
• If the pipeline has three end segments, Pro/PIPING selects the segment that was
created first in the From Pipeline as the first segment.
• If an inline fitting is selected as one of the From Pipeline bounds, Pro/PIPING

selects the pipe segment on which the inline fitting is inserted as the first
segment.
• If a TEE fitting is selected as the start component, Pro/PIPING automatically

selects the branch segment of the TEE fitting as the first segment.
• If the first segment of the From Pipeline is a stubin branch with an offset from its
original main pipe, do one of the following to obtain the required offset for the
branch, on the To Pipeline:
o Set the branch offset appropriately when you create the branch Set Start in
the To Pipeline.
o After the From Pipeline is inserted, redefine the branch Set Start.
Propagating the Inserted From Pipeline in the To Pipeline

Assembly
Pro/PIPING updates the From Pipeline inserted into the To Pipeline, based on the size
and specification information that is defined at the Set Start location. During
propagation, if a fitting cannot be found with the required size and specification,
Pro/PIPING prompts you to either terminate the pipeline insertion or insert the
pipeline without that fitting.
185
Note:
• The From Pipeline becomes a part of the To Pipeline after it is inserted into the To
Pipeline.
• When you insert a From Pipeline into the To Pipeline, the trajectory of the From
Pipeline is copied into the To Pipeline assembly without any external references.
• You can use any of the Pro/PIPING functionality to modify pipelines that are
inserted into the To Pipeline.
• A stub-in with a center or tangent offset is not inserted with an offset value. The
offset value gets deleted after insertion.
Specification-Driven Piping Flow Direction
About Specification-Driven Piping Flow Direction

A pipeline has specific flow direction requirements based on the process flow
requirements of the fluid inside the pipeline, such as gas, water, or fuel. The flow
direction is usually specified in the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID). If a
P&ID link does not exist, a reasonable default flow direction assignment can occur
based on the modeling intent and predefined flow direction rules.
Pro/PIPING automatically assigns a default flow direction to each pipeline you create
during modeling. A set of Flow Direction Rules determine the direction of flow. You
can enable or disable the display of flow direction during the modeling of the pipeline
in the active assembly.
Using Piping Flow Direction, you can perform the following tasks:
• Display the currently assigned flow direction of the following:
o A specified pipeline series
o All series in a pipeline
o Specified extensions
• Reverse the assigned flow direction of a specified pipeline series and

automatically reverse the direction-specific fittings on the series. A direction-
specific fitting is identified by the FLOW_CONSTRAINED part parameter.
• Reverse the assigned flow direction of all series in the specified pipelines and
automatically reverse the appropriate direction-specific fittings.
• Reverse the assigned flow direction of specified pipeline extensions and

automatically reverse the direction-specific fittings on the series.
• Decide the NEAR and FAR placement locations during fitting insertion.
• Place flow-direction specific fittings during fitting insertion.
• Automatically replace fittings during automatic propagation.
• Generate from-to- reports during pipeline reporting.
186
To Create the Pipeline Model for a Pipeline with Branch Series

1. Create three pipe segments from the coordinate system ACSO in the Positive Z,
Positive Y, and Negative X directions The default flow direction is determined by
Flow Direction Rule 1.
2. Create a pipe segment from point APNT2 in the Negative Y direction.
3. Create a branch segment in the Negative Z direction from point APNT1. This
segment has a physical gap between itself and the segment created in Step 2.
See Step 4 for resolution. The default flow direction for the downstream series
that was created during branching at point APNT1, is determined by Flow
Direction Rule 2.
4. Connect the segments created in Step 2 and 3 in the direction shown in the
example. The default flow direction for the branch series is determined by Flow
Direction Rule 3.
Default Flow Direction Determination Rules

When you create a pipeline in any sequence, the flow direction function assigns
default flow directions automatically based on the following rules:
• Rule 1—The flow direction of a pipeline series is automatically determined by the
direction of the first pipe segment in the series.
Note: You can create a pipeline series by concatenating several independent

segments that were created with the Extend, Follow, and Connect commands.
Each of these commands can have opposing flow directions. When you connect
the segments to form a pipeline series, the flow direction of the series is assigned
based on the direction of the pipe segment that was created first.
If you create the first segment in the correct flow direction, this ensures the
correct flow direction for the entire series. Otherwise, you must reverse the
resulting series.
• Rule 2—The flow direction of a new series, which is split and created as a result
of inserting a branch fitting or stub-in, is the same as the original series from
which it is created.
• Rule 3—The flow direction of a branch series is the same as the flow direction of
the pipe segment in the branch line that was created first.
187
Example: Default Flow Direction for Pipeline with Branch Series
1 Numbered yellow boxes—Sequence in which pipe segments are created
2 Small arrows—Geometric direction of Extend features
3 Large arrows—Default flow direction
4 Green lines—Pipelines
188
To Create the Pipeline Model for a Pipeline with Loop Series

1. Create three pipe segments from the coordinate system ACSO in the directions,
Positive Z, Positive Y, and Negative X. The default flow direction for the series is
determined by Flow Direction Rule 1.
2. Create a branch segment in the Negative Z direction from point APNT1. This
segment ends within point APNT2 along the Negative Z direction. The default flow
direction for the downstream series created during branching at point APNT1 is
determined by Flow Direction Rule 2.
3. Create a pipe segment from point APNT2 in the Positive Y direction.
4. Connect the segments created in steps 2 and 3 as shown in the example. The
default flow direction for the branch series is determined by Flow Direction Rule
3.
Example: Default Flow Direction for Pipeline with Loop Series
189
To Display the Flow Direction of a Pipeline

1. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens.
2. Under Active Assembly select the active assembly.
3. Under Modify Options, click Flow Direction.
4. Under Flow Direction, select the flow unit you want to modify by selecting from
the list. The options are:
o PipeLine
o Extension
o Series
Select the unit. In the graphics window the flow direction is indicated by arrows
along the pipeline.
5. Under Flow Reversal, click to reverse the flow direction.
6. Click to close the dialog box.
Displaying or Hiding the Flow Direction of a Pipeline
• Click to switch between displaying and hiding the flow direction of the
pipelines in the active assembly.
• Click to display the Piping System Tree. Select a pipe segment in the
graphics window or a node from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A
shortcut menu appears. Click Flow > Show to display the flow direction of the
selected pipe series or pipeline.
• Use the Model Tree to display the flow direction of a pipeline.
Note: For piping assemblies from earlier releases of Pro/ENGINEER, appears

only if you have converted the piping assembly to the Wildfire format using the
piping_wildfire_convert configuration option.
190
Example: Displaying the Flow Direction of a Specified Pipeline

Series
Flow Direction Violations

You can view the flow direction violations in the Design Rules Check dialog box.
The location of flow violation is marked on the screen with a dot. The system
prompts you to confirm the violation. You can confirm the violation or override the
warning.
Any unresolved flow direction inconsistencies are captured by the reporting process
within pipeline routing, fitting insertion, and pipeline reporting.
You can encounter the following flow violations:
• Converging flow at a junction.
• Diverging flow at a junction.
• Converging pipelines (two different pipelines that share a physical connection

point but are opposed in direction.)
• Diverging pipelines (two different pipelines that share a physical connection point
but are opposed in direction).
• Pipelines with dead loops (loops that feed back into the pipeline and have no
outlet).
191
Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments
About Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments

When you route pipelines, you can suppress or resume one or more pipe segments
to modify the pipeline trajectory.
Note:
• The pipe segments that you want to suppress must belong to the same pipeline
that you are currently routing.
• When you suppress pipe segments you can also suppress the associated pipe
solids and insulation.
• Fittings of type break, cut, or elbow, that are placed on the ends of a suppressed
pipe segment are automatically changed to type "on end".
• All the suppressed components are resumed during the resume operation.
• You cannot resume a suppressed pipe segment if its end is used by a new
segment due to routing.
• You cannot suppress pipe segments that have insulation, branch points, pipeline
labels, or spools.
To Suppress and Resume Pipe Segments

1. Click PIPING > Route > Suppress.
2. Select the pipe segment to suppress. Pro/PIPING suppresses the selected pipe
segments and all the highlighted children.
3. Click PIPING > Route > Resume.
4. Select the suppressed pipe segments that you want to resume. Pro/PIPING
resumes all the suppressed segments and their associated components. If the
selected pipe segment cannot be resumed, it is highlighted.
192
Example: Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments

The original pipeline trajectory is shown in the next figure.
1. If you suppress segments #1 and #3, Pro/PIPING suppresses the associated

flanges and gaskets that are mated, as shown next.
2. If you click Resume, all the segments that were previously suppressed are
highlighted.
193
3. If you select segment #3, Pro/PIPING resumes segment #3, the flange, and the
gasket.
4. Pro/PIPING uses the free segment end for the new routing.
5. If you click Resume again, segment #1 is not resumed, because its end is
occupied by an elbow of type "on end."
194
Specification-Driven Fitting Insertion
About Specification-Driven Fitting Insertion

The specification-driven fitting insertion feature allows you to insert standard
assembly fittings into a pipeline. Use the fitting insertion feature to:
• Define and insert standard assembly fittings into a pipeline. A standard assembly
fitting is a group of fittings that represent a standard vent or drain assembly. You
do not need to create a large number of assemblies and their configurations in
the fitting library before insertion.
• Modify the orientation of a member fitting without changing other instances of

the same assembly fitting.
• Insert a fitting of a specification other than the pipe specification at the insertion
location. For example, you can insert a B3A Gate Valve on a A3A pipeline.
About Specification Override during Fitting Insertion

During fitting insertion, Pro/PIPING allows you to insert a fitting of a specification
that is different from the selected pipe specification. This overrides the specification
of the selected fitting.
You can also override specifications when you insert group fittings. In this case, use
the specification override feature individually for each fitting in the group. The
specifications of the fitting that you insert by overriding specification are not affected
by pipeline propagation during pipeline modification, reducer fitting insertion, or
specification break.
Pro/PIPING uses the SPECIFICATION string parameter to store the specification of a
fitting. The specification of the fitting with the overridden specification remains
unchanged when the pipeline or pipe segment specification changes during pipeline
propagation.
Note: The specification of a fitting is the same as specification of the pipe segment
on which you have inserted it as long as you do not override the fitting specification.
To Insert Fittings
1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert. The Insert Fitting dialog box opens with the
Selection tab selected.
2. Under Placement Type, do one of the following:
o Click Pipe Segment to select a pipe segment on which you want to insert
the fitting.
Under Pipeline Selection, select the pipe segment either from the active
assembly or from another assembly that is not active. The selected
assembly name appears in the Insertion Location box.
195
The Specification, Size, and Schedule boxes display values of the

selected pipe segment. To override the current specification, click the
Specification check box and select a different specification from the list.
Pro/PIPING selects the fitting again based on the specification that you
have selected.
Note: The Specification check box is not selected by default.
o Click Free Location to insert fittings without referencing a pipe segment.

You can then place the fitting anywhere in the piping model using the
Component Placement dialog box.
Under Assembly Selection, select an assembly. You can modify the

specification, size, or schedule of the pipeline, if required.
Note: To insert a fitting without the schematic information, skip step 3.

Schematic Driven option is available under Pipeline Selection. The XML file
associated with selected pipeline is also displayed. To insert a fitting using the
Schematic Driven option, perform the following step:
Select an active Fitting Category icon and then select a value in the Selection
Name list.
The Designator box displays the refdes value of the selected fitting. You cannot
edit this value.
The Specification, Valve Number, New Size, and Branch Size boxes are
automatically updated based on the schematic information of the selected fitting.
Note: To insert a fitting in the nonschematic mode, clear the XML File check box
and proceed to step 4.
4. Under Fitting Selection, select a fitting category. The options are:
—Inserts a valve.
—Inserts a flange.
—Inserts an elbow fitting.
—Inserts a branch fitting (includes special olet fittings).
—Inserts a reducer fitting.
—Inserts a general fitting or gasket.
—Inserts an assembly fitting.
196
Note: All user-defined fitting categories also appear under Fitting Selection.
5. The Selection Name section displays a default fitting selection name. Select a
different name from the list, if required.
6. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to the fitting to
be inserted based on the Auto-Selection file. Select a different bolt nut code from
the list, if required.
7. Specify a string that contains one or more characters or numbers, or a

combination of both, in the Valve Number box to assign a valve number to the
selected fitting.
Note: You can also use the Piping System Tree or Model Tree to assign a valve
number to a selected fitting. To do so, specify the VALVENUMBER string parameter
as one of the Feat Params columns to be displayed in the Model Tree Columns
dialog box.
8. Select Automatic Flange & Gasket to automatically insert flanges and gaskets.
For some fittings with flanged end types, you can automatically insert a set of
flanges and gaskets.
9. To preview the fittings, click the arrow adjacent to Preview Fitting Graphics to
display the graphics window. A single fitting or the first fitting in the assembly
fitting appears in the Preview Fitting Graphics box. To preview the graphics in
a separate window, select the relevant check box.
10. Select the Placement/Orientation tab.
11. Under Placement Options, select one of the following:
Fitting Placement
—Inserts a fitting at a specified location.
—Inserts a fitting face to face with another fitting.
—Inserts a fitting at the end of a segment.
—Inserts a fitting at a junction (available when you insert a branch fitting).
—Inserts a fitting at a corner run to a branch (available when you insert a

branch fitting).
—Inserts a fitting at a corner branch to a run (available when you insert a

branch fitting).
197
Location Type (Location Type buttons are available when you click
under Fitting Placement.)
—Locates the fitting at a specified location.
Note: By default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the start end
of the pipe segment. Click under Location Parameter to flip the location
with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes to
to indicate the change in the reference location.
—Locates the fitting at a specified distance ratio.
of the pipe segment. Click under Location Parameter to flip the location
with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes to
to indicate the change in the reference location.
—Offsets the fitting from an upstream corner.
—Offsets the fitting from a plane.
—Offsets the fitting from a fitting. Click under Location Parameter to

flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING changes to to indicate the change in
the reference port.
Note: You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting.
Location Parameter
Specify a location parameter and use the thumb wheel to increase or decrease
the offset.
12. Under Orientation Options, select the following:
Alignment Point
The alignment point positions the fitting on the fitting port that is near, far, or at
the center.
—Near point.
—Center point.
198
—Far point.
Flip
—Flips the fitting
Alignment Offset
Check this box to offset the near or far alignment of the fitting by the value set
by the OFFSET parameter. The system applies the offset value in the positive Z
direction of the entry port fitting.
Rotation Angle
Select from the standard options or use the thumb wheel to adjust the rotation
angle.
13. Click to insert the fitting and close the dialog box.
Note: You can also insert a missing fitting node using the standard Model Tree
options.
Example: Overriding Specifications during Fitting Insertion

A pipe segment with a specification A3A is shown in the following figure. If you do
not override the specification, you can only insert a fitting of specification A3A.
1 A3A
2 B3A
3 A3A
199
If you click the Specification check box in the Insert Fitting dialog box, you can
insert a fitting of a specification, B3A. The specifications of the upstream and the
downstream pipes and fittings do not change when you insert the fitting of
specification B3A as shown in the following figure.
1 A3A
2 B3A
3 A3A
About Branch Fittings

A branch fitting is a fitting solid part that you insert at a branch point. It has three
(tee) or four (cross) legs. The corresponding pipe solid parts trim to the location of
the csys (coordinate system) ports on each leg of the branch fitting. The piping
specification designates these branch fittings, and they are available for automatic
selection and insertion according to the specification-driven fitting insertion rules.
Inserting Trimmed Elbows
About Inserting Trimmed Elbows

You can insert trimmed elbows after converting elbows to the required trimmed
elbows.
Using the Specification-driven Piping Fitting Insertion functionality, you can:
• Specify a selection name during fitting insertion and insert a trimmed elbow at
the specified vertex location.
• Insert a trimmed elbow based on the automatically determined selection name of

the nearest standard elbow fitting (for example, an elbow fitting with an angle
closest to the vertex angle).
• Insert trimmed elbows at all vertices of a pipeline by automatically determining

the appropriate elbow fitting selection names based on the vertex angle of the
various vertices.
To Convert Elbows to Trimmed Elbows

You must convert elbows to trimmed elbows before you can insert trimmed elbows.
1. Copy the original elbow part to <original elbow part name>_TRIM.PRT.
2. Change the angle dimension symbol from ANGLE to TRIMMED_ANGLE.
200
3. For each instance in the generic, that is, for each size, create instances of
different angles. For example, you can create instances using an incremental
value of 1.
Note: Nested instances must not be used.
4. Ensure that the ports align properly with the inlet and outlet of the elbow in the
trimmed instances so that the fittings can be inserted.
To Insert a Trimmed Elbow by Specifying a Selection Name

1. Convert elbows to trimmed elbows.
2. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert. The Insert Fitting dialog box opens. Under
Placement Type, Pipe Segment is selected by default.
3. Under Pipeline Selection, select a pipe segment. The selection location must be
close to the vertex where you want to insert the elbow. The pipeline label of the
selected pipe segment appears as read-only in the box adjacent to .
4. Under Select Fitting Category, select a fitting category where the elbows are
defined.
5. Click to select the Elbow category if you have used the sample project files.
6. Select the Trim option.
7. Select a selection name from the Selection Name list.
8. Click to insert the trimmed elbow and close the dialog box.
or
Click to insert the trimmed elbow and keep the Insert Fitting dialog box
open.
To Insert a Trimmed Elbow by Selecting the Nearest Standard

Elbow
2. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert. The Insert Fitting dialog box opens.
3. Under Placement Type, Pipe Segment is selected by default.
4. Under Pipeline Selection, select a pipe segment. The selection location must be
close to the vertex where you want to insert the elbow. The pipeline label of the
selected pipe segment appears as read-only in the box adjacent to .
defined.
6. Click to select the Elbow category, if you have used the sample project files.
201
7. Click Trim and Nearest Std. Elbow. The Selection Name list becomes
inaccessible and the required elbow for trimming is determined automatically,
based on the vertex angle.
or
open.
To Insert Elbows at all Corners with Trim

To automatically insert trimmed elbows at all vertices of a specified pipeline without
specifying a fitting selection name use the following procedure:
4. Under Pipeline Selection, select a pipeline by selecting one of its segments. The
label of the selected pipeline appears as read-only in the box adjacent to .
defined.
7. Click Trim and At All Corners.
Note: Do not select the Selection Name option because you want the fitting
selection names to be determined automatically.
8. Click Nearest Std. Elbow. If you do not select this option you are prompted
with an option list of valid elbows for trimming at every vertex where a trimmed
elbow will be inserted.
or
open.
To Insert Elbows at All Corners without Trim

202
defined.
6. Click At All Corners.
7. Click to insert the elbow and close the dialog box.
or
Click to insert the elbow and keep the Insert Fitting dialog box open.
Note: Trim is not selected in this case and so trimmed elbows are not inserted.
To Insert Elbow Fittings at all Corners by Specifying a Selection

Name
defined.
6. Click At All Corners and Selection Name.
7. Click to insert the elbow and close the dialog box.
or
Click to insert the elbow and keep the Insert Fitting dialog box open.
Inserting Group Fittings
About Inserting Group Fittings

You can use the Insert Group Fitting functionality to:
• Specify a group of fittings for insertion.
• Automatically perform end type compatibility checking between adjacent fittings

in the group.
203
• Automatically select and insert the appropriate gaskets between the adjacent
flanged fittings in the group.
• Automatically select and insert an appropriate pair of flange and gaskets between
a flanged end of a fitting and a non-flanged end of another fitting.
• Insert the specified group fittings on a pipe segment with their adjacent faces
mated.
Note: You cannot flip the fittings of type eccentric reducers during group fitting
insertion because of the offset in the centerline axis of such fittings. To avoid this,
you can insert expansion fittings instead of reducer fittings or vice versa. To get the
required size, modify the pipe size before you insert the fittings.
To Insert Group Fittings

1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert Group. The Insert Group Fitting dialog box
opens. The Selection tab is selected by default.
2. Under Pipeline Selection, select the insertion location.
3. The Specification, Size, and the Schedule boxes display default values. Click
the Specification check box, and select another specification from the
specification list to override the current specification for the fitting that you want
to insert.
If you override specifications, all the subsequent fittings that you insert will use
the same overridden specification until you clear the Specification box.
Note: To insert a fitting without the schematic information, proceed to step 5.

Schematic Driven option is available under Pipeline Selection. The XML file
associated with the selected pipeline is also displayed.
To insert a group fitting in the schematic mode, select an available fitting

category icon and then select a values from the Selection Name list.
The Designator box displays the refdes of the selected fitting. You cannot edit
this value.
automatically updated as per the schematic information of the selected schematic
fitting.
5. Under Fitting Selection, select a fitting that you want to insert. The options are:
—Inserts a valve.
—Inserts a flange.
—Inserts an elbow fitting.
204
—Inserts a branch fitting (includes special olet fittings).
—Inserts a reducer fitting.
—Inserts a general fitting or gasket.
—Inserts an assembly fitting.
Note: All user-defined fitting categories also appear under Fitting Selection.
6. The Selection Name box displays a default fitting selection name. Change this
name by selecting another name from the list.
7. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting
based on the Auto-Selection file. Change this code by selecting another bolt nut
code from the list.
8. Specify a string that contains one or more characters or numbers, or both, in the
Valve Number box to assign a valve number to the selected fitting.
Note: You can also use the Piping System Tree or Model Tree to assign a valve
number to a selected fitting. To do so, specify the VALVENUMBER string parameter
as one of the Feat Params columns to be displayed in the Model Tree Columns
dialog box.
9. Click Automatic Flange & Gasket if you want a set of flanges and gaskets to be
inserted automatically.
10. Use the Group Manipulation buttons to add fittings or display information about
selected fittings for your group of fittings.
—Displays the previous fitting in the group and makes it the current fitting.
—Displays the next fitting in the group and makes it the current fitting.
—Inserts a new fitting into the group before the current fitting.
—Inserts a new fitting into the group after the current fitting.
—Specifies the current fitting as the key fitting. This is not activated if the
current fitting is already the key fitting, or if the current key fitting of the group is
an elbow, branch, eccentric reducer fitting, or angle valve.
—Deletes the current fitting from the group. The next fitting in the group
becomes the current fitting. If the key fitting is deleted, then the next fitting
becomes the key fitting.
—Clears all fittings from the group.
205
As you add or remove fittings from the groups, the Group Parent at the top of
the dialog box displays the number of the current fitting and the number of total
fittings in the group. If the current fitting is the key fitting, the counter reflects
this information.
11. Click the Placement/Orientation tab. You can determine Placement and
Orientation options, one fitting at a time.
12. Under Placement Options, make the following selections:
Fitting Placement
—Inserts a fitting at a specified location.
—Inserts a fitting face to face with another fitting.
—Inserts a fitting at the end of a segment.
—Inserts a fitting at a junction (available when you insert a branch fitting).
—Inserts a fitting at a corner run to a branch (available when you insert a

branch fitting).
—Inserts a fitting at a corner branch to a run (available when you insert a

branch fitting).
Location Type (Location Type buttons are available when you click under
Fitting Placement.)
—Locates the fitting at a specified location.
of the pipe segment. Click available under Location Parameter to flip the
location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes
to to indicate the change in the reference location.
—Locates the fitting at a specified distance ratio.
of the pipe segment. Click available under Location Parameter to flip the
location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes
to to indicate the change in the reference location.
206
—Offsets the fitting from an upstream corner.
—Offsets the fitting from a plane.
—Offsets the fitting from a fitting. Use available under Location

Parameter to flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING changes to to
indicate the change in the reference port.
Note: You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting.
Location Parameter
Specify a location parameter and use the thumb wheel to increase or decrease
the offset.
13. Under Orientation Options, make the following selections:
Alignment Offset
Check this box to offset the near or far alignment of the fitting by the value set
by the OFFSET parameter. The system applies the offset value in the positive z-
direction of the entry port fitting.
Alignment Point
The alignment point positions the fitting on the fitting port that is near, at the
center, or far.
—Near point. The system aligns the inlet (upstream) port of the fitting with
the location point of the fitting.
—Center point. The system aligns the outlet (downstream) port of the fitting
with the location point.
—Far point. The system places the fitting so that the alignment point is in
the middle of the two ports.
Flip
—Flips the fitting.
Rotation Angle
Select from the standard options or use the thumb wheel to adjust the rotation
angle.
207
14. To preview the fittings, click the arrow adjacent to Preview Fitting Graphics to
display the graphics window. To preview the graphics in a separate window,
select the check box.
15. Click to insert the group fitting and close the dialog box.
Example: Overriding Specifications during Group Fitting Insertion

A check valve of specification A7K and a gate valve of specification A7N inserted on a
pipeline of specification A3A is shown in the next figure.
1 A3A
2 A7K
3 A7N
4 A3A
Pro/PIPING uses the specification of the upstream fitting, that is, of specification
A7K, and selects the specification for the intermediate gasket between the check
valve and the gate valve.
Key Fitting
The key fitting is a fitting in the group, that is inserted first on the pipe segment.
Before the key fitting is inserted, the selected pipe segment is divided into two
segments at the specified location. The key fitting is placed at the specified location.
The adjacent fittings are inserted with their faces mating with either side face of the
key fitting. All the fittings in the group are inserted subsequently in this manner.
The first selected fitting becomes the key fitting by default. If any one of the
following fittings is added to the group, then that fitting automatically becomes the
key fitting, and the original key fitting becomes the normal fitting:
• Elbows
• Branch fittings
• Eccentric fittings
• Angle valves
A group cannot have more than one fitting from these categories.
208
A key fitting can be used to mate a group fitting to one or more existing fittings in
the piping model. To do so, the key fitting must exist at the mating end of the group.
Also, there must be no group fittings between the key fitting and the mating surface
of the existing fittings.
Group Fitting Rules

The following rules apply for specifying group fittings, for insertion.
• There can be only one key fitting in the group.
• The placement options and alignment point options can be specified only for the
key fitting. The placement options will be disabled for other fittings. But
orientation options will be accessible individually for all the fittings.
• When a non-key fitting is manually set as "key fitting", the Placement Options
and alignment point options of the original key fitting will be transferred to the
new key fitting. However, you can change these options as required for the new
key fitting.
End Type Compatibility Checking

End type compatibility checking within the group is performed for every fitting in the
group after the second fitting is specified. If the end compatibility check fails, then:
• An error message is displayed.
• You can correct the failure either by selecting another fitting or by flipping a
fitting.
• You can remove the failed fitting.
Modifying Fittings
About Modifying Fittings (Spec-Driven)

You can modify any fitting that you insert in your specification-driven piping system.
Pro/PIPING allows you to modify fittings in the following ways:
• Delete—Delete unwanted fittings
• Delete Group—Delete unwanted fittings in a group and automatically choose a

new parent if the parent fitting of the group is deleted
• Redefine—Redefine fitting parameters to customize certain fittings
• Replace—Replace inserted fittings with different ones
You can also perform these operations using the Info, Redefine, Replace, and
Delete options from the shortcut menu.
209
To Delete Fittings
1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Delete.
2. Select a fitting, and then Ok from the SELECT menu. The fitting is deleted.
3. When you are finished deleting fittings click Done/Return.
To Delete Group Fittings

1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Delete Group. The Delete Group Fittings dialog box
opens.
2. Under Select Fitting, select the pipe fitting component that you want to delete.
3. Under Fitting Delete Options, select one of the following:
o All in Group—Deletes all the fittings in the group.
o Selected & All Upstream—Deletes the selected fitting and all fittings that
are mated to the selected fitting, upstream in the group. If the selected
fitting is located below the parent fitting, all the fittings located upstream to
it including the parent fitting are deleted. In this case, Pro/PIPING prompts
you to select another fitting in the group as the new parent fitting.
Note: If you select a fitting that is located downstream of the group parent
fitting, and the parent fitting is a corner or a branch fitting, you cannot
select fittings using Selected & All Upstream.
o Selected & All Downstream—Deletes the selected fitting and all the
fittings that are mated to the selected fitting, downstream in the group. If
the selected fitting is located above the parent fitting, all the fittings located
downstream to it including the parent fitting are deleted. In this case,
Pro/PIPING prompts you to select another fitting in the group as the new
parent fitting.
Note: If you select a fitting that is located upstream of the group parent
fitting, and the parent fitting is a corner or a branch fitting, you cannot
select fittings using Selected & All Downstream.
o Only Selected—Deletes only the specified fitting in the group.
If the specified fitting is the parent of the group, Pro/PIPING prompts you to
select a new parent for the group.
If the specified fitting is an intermediate flange fitting, Pro/PIPING deletes

all the redundant gaskets in the group.
If the specified fitting is an intermediate gasket fitting, only the specified

fitting is deleted.
4. Under Select New Group Parent, click to select a new parent for the group
if you have deleted the parent fitting of the group and have not specified a new
parent.
210
Note: You cannot select the following items as a new parent fitting:
o Gaskets
o Fittings outside the currently specified group
Pro/PIPING selects a new parent fitting automatically in the following cases:
o If you select a parent fitting for deletion from a group of two fittings
o If you select a parent fitting for deletion from a group fitting located at the
end of a pipe, the fitting adjacent to the parent fitting is selected as the
new parent fitting
5. Click to delete the group fittings.
Example: Deleting Group Fittings

Fittings of types neckflanges, nipples, and gaskets, mated together are shown in the
next figure.
The network report for the fittings is shown in the next table.
SIZE SPEC NAME
100A ms NIPPLE
100A ms NIPPLE
100A ms NIPPLE
100A ms NECKFLANGE
100A ms GASKET
100A ms NECKFLANGE
100A ms NIPPLE
211
If you select the NIPPLE 100A, which is the group parent fitting for deletion,
Pro/PIPING highlights all selected fittings that will be deleted as shown in the
following figure:
The highlighted fittings are deleted when you click . The remaining group fittings
appear as shown in the following figure:
212
Select the new parent fitting as NIPPLE of size 100A in the Select New Group
Parent box. The size of the pipe segment is propagated along its downstream to
match the downstream size of the group fittings. The network report for the group
fittings with the new parent is as shown in the following table.
SIZE SPEC NAME
100A ms NIPPLE
100A ms NIPPLE
To Redefine Specification-Driven Fittings

1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Redefine. The Redefine Fitting dialog box opens.
2. Select a fitting to redefine.
3. Under Orientation Options, you can redefine the following parameters:
o Alignment Point—Change the dimensional control point of the fitting.
o Flip—Change the direction of the fitting.
Note: You cannot flip the fittings of type eccentric reducers.
o Alignment Offset—Select to offset the alignment.
o Rotation Angle—Reposition the fitting.
4. Click to complete the redefinition of the fitting on the pipeline and close the
dialog box.
About Specification Override during Fitting Replacement

You can override the specification of a fitting that you want to replace. When
replacing fittings, use the specification override feature to:
• Replace an existing fitting with a fitting that has the same specification as that of
the pipe segment or has a different specification.
• Replace a fitting that you inserted earlier by overriding specifications, with a

fitting that has the same pipe specification or a different overriding fitting
specification.
• Replace a fitting that you inserted earlier by overriding specifications, with a

fitting that has the same specification as that of the pipe segment.
To Replace Fittings
1. Click PIPING > Fittings > Replace. The Replace Fitting dialog box opens.
2. Under Select Fitting, select the fitting to be replaced. Information about the
fitting appears as read-only text under Fitting Data.
213
3. The Specification, Size, and the Schedule boxes display a value by default.
Click the Specification box and select a different specification from the
specification list to override the current specification values for the fitting that
you want to replace.
Note: To replace a fitting without the schematic information, proceed to step 5.

Schematic Driven option is available under Fitting Data. The XML file
associated with the selected pipeline is also displayed.
To replace a fitting in the schematic mode, select an available fitting category

icon and then select a value from the Selection Name list.
The Designator box displays the refdes of the selected fitting. This value is not
editable.
automatically updated as per the schematic information of the selected schematic
fitting.
5. Under Fitting Selection, select the new fitting you want.
6. The Selection Name section displays a default fitting selection name. Change
this name by selecting from the list.
7. Specify a string that contains one or more characters or numbers, or both, in the
Valve Number box to assign, modify, or delete a valve number to the fitting
that you want to replace.
Note: You can also use the Piping System Tree or Model Tree to modify the valve
number of the selected fitting. To do so, specify the VALVENUMBER string
parameter as one of the Feat Params column to be displayed in the Model Tree
Columns dialog box.
8. Click to replace the fitting and close the dialog box.
Tip: Modifying and Deleting Valve Numbers

In addition to modifying and deleting valve numbers using the Replace Fitting
dialog box, you can also modify and delete valve numbers of a selected fitting using
one of the following methods:
• Use the Parameters dialog box that opens when you click Tools > Parameters.
• Use the Piping System Tree by setting the VALVENUMBER string parameter as one
of the display Feat Params columns in the Model Tree Columns dialog box.
Select the box specific to a valve in the Piping System Tree and delete or modify
the valve number.
• Use the Model Tree by selecting the box specific to a valve in the model tree and
deleting or modifying the valve number.
214
Note: You can use the Model Tree to create, modify, or delete valve numbers even if
you set the value of the VALVE_NUMBER parameter in the Fitting Category Map file to
no. As good practice, avoid using the Model Tree to create, modify, or delete valve
numbers.
Fitting Overlap Checking

Pro/PIPING automatically checks for the overlap of fittings when you insert fittings,
automatic flanges and gaskets, redefine fittings, or replace fittings. For all such
instances, Pro/PIPING:
• Compares the length of the pipe segment between two adjacent fittings with the
values specified for one of the following configuration options:
o The pipeline_min_bolt_clearance configuration option if the pipe

segment is between two flanged fittings or between a flanged and a
nonflanged fitting
o The pipeline_min_segment_length configuration option if the pipe

segment is between two nonflanged fittings
If the length of the pipe segment is less than any of the values specified for these
configuration options, a message appears and the pipe segment that does not
satisfy the above conditions is highlighted.
• Checks for a fitting that overlaps another fitting at the given insertion location
and tries to move the fitting to avoid the overlap. If the fitting cannot be moved,
a message appears and the existing fitting that is being overlapped is
highlighted. In such instances, no fittings are inserted.
Note: For slip-on flanges and socket-welded fittings, Pro/PIPING does not
automatically perform the overlap check for the fitting parts that lie outside the port.
This is because the ports do not lie on the external surface of the fitting. To enable
Pro/PIPING to perform fitting overlap checking for slip-on flanges and socket welded
fittings, use the OFFSET parameter to specify the additional distance between the
port and the external surface and attach the parameter to the required port.
Pro/PIPING performs the overlap checking for the additional distance from the fitting
port location.
Specification-Driven Pipeline Modification
About Pipeline Modification

Using the Modify Pipeline functionality, you can modify pipes in an active assembly in
the following ways:
• Change the bend parameters.
• Change the corner type.
• Change the line shape of flexible pipes.
• Display the flow direction or reverse the flow direction.
215
• Edit the pipeline specifications and parameters.
You can also make dimensional changes to pipelines outside of the active assembly;
however, changes are not observed until either the assembly in question or the top
level assembly is made active and regenerated.
During the modification or automatic propagation of pipelines, Pro/PIPING checks for
the fittings that can overlap at different locations on a pipeline. The fittings that are
being overlapped are highlighted and the modification of the pipeline is terminated.
To Modify Pipe Segments

3. Under Modify Options, select Segment.
4. Under Segment, select the pipe segment you want to modify.
5. In the Segment Parameters section, modify the parameters by selecting from

o Specification
o Size
o Schedule
Note:
• If the selected pipe segment contains a reducer then the fitting modification
dialog box opens.
• If a fitting overlaps because of a change in the size of the pipe segment,

Pro/PIPING reports all the fitting overlap violations in the INFORMATION
WINDOW. You cannot modify the pipeline, unless you redefine the insertion
location of the fittings that are overlapping.
To Modify a Corner Type

3. Under Modify Options, select Corner Type.
4. Under Corner, select the corners you want to modify.
5. In the New Type box, select a new corner type from the list.
Note: The New Type box displays only those corner types that are specified in
the Piping Specification File.
216
o If you select a corner of type Bend, the Bend Radius box displays a default
value for the bend radius. If more than one value is specified for the radius
in the Piping Specification file, select the required bend radius value from
the Bend Radius list.
Note: The Bend Radius box is available only when you select the New
Type as Bend.
o If you select a corner of type Miter Cut, the Cut Radius box displays a
default value for the cut radius. If more than one value for the radius is
specified in the Piping Specification file, you can select the required radius
from the Cut Radius list. After you select a cut radius, the Cut Number
box displays the default value for the cut number. If more than one value is
specified for the cut number in the Piping Specification file, select the
required cut number value from the Cut Number list.
o The Cut Radius and the Cut Number boxes are available only when you
select the New Type as Miter Cut.
Tip: Modifying Corner Types

• You can select multiple corners for modification only if they satisfy the following
criteria:
o The corners belong to the active assembly.
o The corners have the same line stock, that is, they have the same
specification, material code, nominal size, and schedule.
o If you select multiple miters for modification, the Cut Radius box displays the
value of the radius, if the selected miters have the same radius. If you select
multiple miters of variable radius, the Cut Radius box displays the value
Multiple.
o If you select multiple miters for modification, the Cut Number box displays the
value of the cut number if the selected miters have the same cut number. If you
select multiple miters of variable cut number, the Cut Number box displays the
value Multiple.
o If you select multiple corners of different corner types like bends, fittings, and
miter cuts, the Select Corner box in the Modify Pipeline dialog box displays
the value Current Type Multiple.
217
Tip: Changing the Bend Radius of a Pipeline

You can have multiple entries for the same pipe size in the bend file, that is, a single
pipe size can have multiple bend radius values associated with it, as shown in the
following example of a bend file.
SIZE RADIUS RATIO MIN MAX MIN MAX

RADIUS RADI ANGLE ANGLE
US
80A 265 265 265 0 360
100A 360 360 360 0 360
100A 375 375 375 0 360
100A 345 345 345 0 360
125A 420 420 420 0 360
After you create a pipeline using a pipe size that has multiple bend radius values
associated with it, you can set the bend radius value for that routing session by
doing the following.
1. Click Route Pipe > Pipe Envrmnt > Corner Vals. The SEL VALUE menu
appears and displays the multiple bend radius values in the order that they are
specified in the bend file.
2. Select the required bend radius value from the list as the current one for that
routing session. If you do not select a bend radius value, then the first value
displayed in the SEL VALUE menu is set as the default bend radius value.
The bend radius value you set as current is valid only for the routing session. For
a new routing session, the first value in the SEL VALUE menu is set as the
default value if you do not set a different value.
You can change the bend radius value of a selected corner in a pipeline using the
Modify Pipeline dialog box. Under Modify Options, select Corner Type. The
default value displayed in the Bend Radii list is the current bend radius value for the
selected bend. You can select a new value from the list.
Note: A routing session starts when you click Pipeline > Create/Route and ends
when you click Route Pipe > Done/ Return.
To Modify the Bend Parameters

3. Under Modify Options, select Bend Parameters. The Bend Parameters dialog
box opens.
218
4. From the menu click Edit > Columns > Add/Remove. The Bend Parameters
Columns dialog box opens.
5. Under Not Displayed, Bend Params must be selected. If it is not, select it from
the list.
6. In the Name input box, type in a name for the parameter.
7. Click to add the name to the Displayed area. You can manipulate this list
using the following:
—Removes a name from the list.
—Moves a parameter up in the list.
—Moves a parameter down in the list.
Type a value in the Width box to change the column width. Optionally, use the
spin wheel to change the value.
8. When you have created the bend parameters, do one of the following:
o Click Apply to add the changes and keep the dialog box open.
o Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
9. In the Bend Parameters dialog box, a column is displayed for each added
parameter. To modify the parameters, click in the parameter column next to the
feature you want to modify and fill in or change the information.
10. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
To Reverse Flow Direction

2. Under Active Assembly, select the active assembly.
3. Under Modify Options, select Flow Direction.
4. Under Flow Direction, select the flow unit you want to modify by selecting from
o PipeLine—A collection of many connected series and junctions that

represent a single pipeline.
o Extension—A set of series that are connected together and having the
same flow direction.
o Series—A pipeline portion consisting of pipeline elements between a

Pipeline Start and Junction, or Junction and Junction, or Junction and End,
of a pipeline. Flow direction applies to entire pipeline series and accordingly,
an entire pipeline series will be associated with only one flow direction.
219
Select the unit. In the graphics window the flow direction is indicated by arrows
along the pipeline.
5. Under Flow Reversal, click Reverse.
Flow Direction Violations

You can view the flow direction violations in the Design Rules Check dialog box.
The location of flow violation is marked on the screen with a dot. The system
prompts you to confirm the violation. You can confirm the violation or override the
warning.
Any unresolved flow direction inconsistencies are captured by the reporting process
within pipeline routing, fitting insertion, and pipeline reporting.
You can encounter the following flow violations:
• Converging flow at a junction.
• Diverging flow at a junction.
• Converging pipelines (two different pipelines that share a physical connection

point but are opposed in direction.)
• Diverging pipelines (two different pipelines that share a physical connection point
but are opposed in direction).
• Pipelines with dead loops (loops that feed back into the pipeline and have no
outlet).
To Modify the Line Shape of a Flexible Hose

1. Using the Modify Pipeline dialog box, select an active assembly with the arrow.
2. Under Modify Options, click Flex Shape.
3. Under Flex Shape, select a pipeline segment with the arrow.
4. Under Modify Shape, click Fixed Length or Free Length and type a value in
the Length option.
5. Click Apply, OK, and Close.
To Edit a Pipeline
2. Under Active Assembly, select the active assembly.
3. Under Modify Options, select Edit Pipeline. The Edit Pipeline dialog box
opens.
Note: To edit a pipeline without the schematic information, proceed to step 5.
220
4. If you have set the piping_schematic_driven configuration option to yes the

Schematic Driven option will be available under Pipeline. To associate a
pipeline with the XML file name, perform the following steps:
b. The Schematic Label option under Schematic Driven lists all the eligible
pipelines for editing, based on the information in the specified XML file.
c. Click and select an XML file from the directory path specified by the
directory or from any other directory. The selected XML file is displayed in
the XML File box.
Note: The specified XML file must contain the schematic information of the
pipeline.
d. Edit the required pipeline parameters under the Label, Parameters, and
Defined tabs. If the XML file does not have the associated pipeline
information, then the edited pipeline parameter values are not applied to
the pipeline.
Note: To edit a pipeline without the schematic information, clear the XML File
check box and perform the following steps.
5. The Edit Pipeline dialog box opens with the Label tab displayed. You can
change the following:
o Label—Modify the Pipeline Label by changing the Specification, Size,

Schedule, Mnemonic, and Number. You can assign insulation to the
pipeline by selecting the Insulation checkbox and selecting an insulation
code from the list.
o Parameters—Enter or modify the pipeline parameters: Oper. Pressure,

Oper. Temperature, Design Pressure, and Design Temperature. Click
to retrieve existing pipeline parameters from a file. After the Open

dialog box opens, select the file to retrieve and double-click. The
parameters are displayed in the boxes. Note that pipeline parameters
options are set by a configuration option and may not be available.
o Defined—Define or redefine parameters in the Name and Value boxes.
Click to retrieve existing pipeline parameters from a file. After the

Open dialog box opens, select the file to retrieve and double-click. The
parameters are displayed in the boxes.
Use to add or delete parameters to the pipeline.
6. Click to save the new parameters.
221
To Replace a Bend with an Elbow

When a pipe piece fails the check of the bend clamp length, you can replace the
selected bend with an elbow.
3. Under Modify Options, select Bend to Elbow. The Replace Bend dialog box
opens.
4. Under Assembly, select the active assembly.
5. Under Pipelines select the pipelines
6. A list of invalid pipe pieces display under Select Invalid Pipe Piece.
All the segments and bends of the selected invalid pipe piece display under
Select Bend to Replace, the invalid ones are highlighted with a symbol next to
them. Those are the ones that violated the minimum clamp length defined in the
bend machine file inside the Master Catalog.
7. Under Select Bend to Replace, select the bend adjacent to the invalid segment
to be replaced by a fitting corner type.
8. Click to apply the changes and close the dialog box. The elbow fittings are
inserted automatically when you apply the changes.
Specification-Driven Pipe Fabrication
About Fabricating Pipes

The Specification-Driven method of modeling includes the following Pipe Fabrication
functionality:
• Pipe piece cutting functionality that allows you to insert or delete a cut.
• Pipe spool piece generation that allows you to generate pipe spool pieces
automatically.
• Create a solid representation for piping insulation and store the information in the
model.
Create a pipe solid for a pipe segment or the entire pipeline in the current active
assembly.
222
Cutting Pipe Pieces
About Cutting Pipe Pieces

Use Cut Pipe to split a pipeline into pieces that can be fabricated. Cut Pipe allows you
to alter the length of pipelines by splitting a straight segment into shorter raw pipe
blanks, or cutting the pipe at a specific location to generate the desired spool.
The piece cutting functionality allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Cut a pipeline at a specified location.
• Cut a straight pipe run at multiple locations by specifying the stock length or
using a user-specified length of pipe.
• Specify a cut location by referencing other objects such as an adjacent pipe

segment, a hull structure, or a data reference plane.
• Specify a cut location by an offset distance.
• Cut all parallel pipe runs at locations identical to the reference pipe run.
• Cut all pipe segments at locations where pipelines intersect with the block
boundary.
• Automatically insert joint fittings at the cut location during piece cutting.
• Assign shop or field weld attributes.
• Generate pipe spool pieces based on cuts.
To Cut a Pipe at a Specified Location Using Placement

Use Cut Pipe to cut a pipeline at a specified location using distance or ratio
placement.
1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.
2. Under Piece Cutting Options select .
3. Select the pipe segment to insert a cut. By default, the selected location is the
placement location of the cut. The pipeline label is displayed under Select Pipe
Segment as read-only information.
4. The distance of the selected location on the pipe segment displays in the thumb
wheel input panel. Select the following Cut Placement Options:
o —Use the thumb wheel to reposition the cut location along the pipe
segment or enter an explicit distance directly in the input panel.
223
Note: By default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the

start end of the pipe segment. Click under Location Parameter to flip
the location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING
changes to to indicate the change in the reference location.
o —Specify a distance ratio from the upstream end of the specified pipe
segment.
Note: By default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the

start end of the pipe segment. Click under Location Parameter to flip
the location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING
changes to to indicate the change in the reference location.
5. To insert a joint fitting at the cut, under Miscellaneous Options, select Joint
Fitting and specify the joint fitting name.
The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting.
You can change this code by selecting from the list.
6. If you want to assign a weld attribute to this cut, under Weld Type, select from
the following weld type options: Shop-Field, Shop-Shop, and Field-Shop.
o Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld
attribute, and close the Cut Pipe dialog box.
o Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld
attribute, and then continue inserting cuts with the Cut Pipe dialog box.
o Click if you want to exit the dialog box.
Note: You can control the display format of the linear dimension and the incremental
step value for the thumb wheel movement using the
piping_thumb_wheel_increment configuration option.
To Cut a Pipe at a Specified Location Using a Plane Reference

Use the following procedure to insert a cut at a defined distance from a specified
plane and generate a weld attribute.
2. Under Piece Cutting Options, single cut is selected by default. If it is not,

select it.
3. Select an approximate location on the pipe segment in which you want to insert a
cut. The pipeline label is displayed under Select Pipe Segment as read-only
information.
224
4. Under Cut Placement Options, select the plane reference option .
5. Select a planar hull structural surface or datum plane that is perpendicular to the
pipe segment. The name of the reference is displayed under Location
Parameter.
Note: Pro/PIPING does not allow you to select referenced planar hull structural
surface or datum planes that are not perpendicular to the pipe segment in which
you are inserting the cut.
6. Use the thumb wheel to position the cut location along the pipe segment or enter
an explicit distance directly in the input panel.
Fitting and specify the joint fitting name. The default is no joint fitting.
8. Under Weld Type, the Field option is selected by default. If it is not, select it to
assign a field weld attribute to this cut.
9. To insert the cut, do one of the following:
Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld
or
To Cut Pipe at a Specified Location Using a Pipe Reference

In the following procedure, you place a cut at the specified location on a segment
and then create a reference from an adjacent upstream pipe segment that is
perpendicular to the segment where the cut is defined.
2. Under Piece Cutting Options single cut is selected by default. If it is not,

select it.
3. Select an approximate location on the pipe segment where you want to insert a
information.
4. Under Cut Placement Options select the pipe reference option .
225
5. Select an upstream adjacent pipe segment that is perpendicular to the pipe

segment in which you are inserting the cut. The name of the reference will
display under Location Parameter.
assign a field weld attribute to this cut.
or
Note: The referenced pipe segment must be perpendicular to the pipe segment in
which you are inserting the cut. If it is not, this functionality will be disabled.
To Cut Pipe at a Single Location Using a Fitting Port Reference

In the following procedure, you place a cut at the specified location on a segment
and then create a reference from a nearest fitting that is located on the upstream
side, downstream side, or on the branch port of the cut.
2. Under Piece Cutting Options, single cut is selected by default. If it is not,

select it.
3. Select an approximate location on the pipe segment in which you want to insert a
information.
4. Under Cut Placement Options, select the fitting reference option . Use
available under Location Parameter to flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING
changes to to indicate the change in the reference port.
226
Note:
o If the selected pipe segment does not have any existing fitting, Pro/PIPING
disables the fitting reference option.
o You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting or a branch port.
5. Under Location Parameter, the name of the nearest fitting is automatically

displayed as a reference.
Click to select any other nearest fitting that is located on the upstream side,
downstream side, on the branch port, or on the center point between the
upstream and downstream ports of the cut. The selected fitting must exist in the
same pipeline and in the same pipe run. The name of the selected fitting is
displayed in the selection field as read-only information.
Fitting and specify the joint fitting selection name. The default is no joint fitting.
The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to the fitting to
be inserted. You can change this code by selecting from the list.
or
Under Weld Type, the weld type options are displayed based on the selected
type of fitting. The Field option is selected by default.
or
Selecting the Reference Fitting Port

When cutting a pipeline at a single location using a fitting port reference, Pro/PIPING
automatically selects a default fitting port as a reference based on the location
selected on the pipe segment. A default fitting port is selected as a reference based
on the following selection criteria:
• If a fitting exists in the immediate upstream of the selected location, before a
corner or free end, then the nearest port of that fitting is selected as the default
reference. The default reference port origin is highlighted in the graphics window.
227
For example, in the following figure, fittings A and B are upstream of the selected
location. As fitting B is the nearest upstream fitting, Pro/PIPING automatically
identifies it as the reference fitting and its downstream port as the default
reference port.
1 Selected location
• If no fitting exists in the upstream side before the corner or free end and if a
fitting exists in the immediate downstream of the selected location, then the
nearest port of that fitting is selected as the default reference and its origin is
highlighted.
For example, in the preceding figure, if the selected location is in the upstream
side of fitting A, then Pro/PIPING selects the upstream port of the fitting A as the
default reference.
• In the above cases, if the nearest fitting to the selected location is part of a group
of fittings, then the closest fitting in the group is selected as the default reference
fitting, and the nearest port of that fitting is selected as the default reference
port.
• If the reference fitting is a flange fitting, Pro/PIPING automatically selects the

port at the flange face as the reference port.
Note: You can either change the reference to any other port of the same fitting or
select a port of a different fitting. The selected fitting must exist in the same pipeline
and in the same pipe run.
• If the selected port has the OFFSET parameter to identify the location of the
fitting's end face and if you have used the end face to insert the fitting, then the
location of the end face is used as the reference location. The location of the end
face is located at a distance specified by the OFFSET parameter along the port's z-
axis.
228
Changing the Selected Reference Fitting Port

The label of the selected port is automatically displayed in the Location Parameter
box as shown:
o The label indicates that PORT1 is the name of CSYS, whose feature number
is 113, inside the fitting model VL_CHK_FLRF-100.
o The port switch option is used to change the reference fitting port.
Click the port switch option to change the reference to the upstream port of
the same fitting. Pro/PIPING selects the upstream port PORT0 as shown:
If a selected segment is in the branch side of a junction and if the default reference
port is a branch port of a branch fitting, the port switch option appears as shown:
If you click the port switch option again, the same port remains selected
because the object in the branch pipe segment cannot refer to the ports in the main
pipe segment. However, you can select a port from another fitting using and the
SELECT menu.
Relocating the Selected Reference Fitting Port

Modifying the existing reference fitting results in the following:
• If a reference fitting is relocated, the corresponding piping objects referring to
that relocated fitting are also relocated maintaining the same offset value.
• If the referenced fitting is replaced, the existing reference for the piping objects
is re-routed to the corresponding port of the new fitting model. That is, if the
original fitting's upstream port was referenced, then the reference is rerouted to
the new fitting's upstream port.
• If you delete the referenced fitting, the reference for the piping objects to the
fitting port is also deleted. Pro/PIPING creates a new reference for the pipe
segment on which the piping objects are located. During this rerouting, the actual
location of the fitting is not affected. The Length location option is used for
creating a reference for the new pipe segment.
229
To Cut Pipe at Multiple Locations Based on Pipe Stock or User-

Specified Length
You can cut a straight pipe run automatically at multiple locations by specifying the
stock length or by using a user-specified length of pipe. When you cut at multiple
locations, the specified length is applied at intervals along the straight pipe run.
After you create multiple cuts in this manner, they are treated as individual cuts. You
can manipulate them and delete them individually.
2. Under Piece Cutting Options, click .
3. Select a straight pipe run in which you want to insert multiple cuts. The pipeline
label is displayed under Select Pipe Segment as read-only information.
4. Under Interval Length, specify the desired stock length or a desired interval
length to cut the pipe runs at multiple locations.
assign a field weld attribute to this cut. Field welds with unique identification
numbers will be created at each cut location.
Click to insert cuts at the defined location, generate the specified weld
or
To Cut Pipe at Multiple Locations with Automatic Joint Fitting

Insertion
You can cut a straight pipe run automatically at multiple locations by specifying the
pipe stock length and automatically inserting the required joint fittings. When you
cut at multiple locations, the specified length is applied as intervals along the straight
pipe run.
2. Under Piece Cutting Options, click .
230
3. Select a straight pipe run in which you want to insert multiple cuts. The pipeline
label is displayed under Select Pipe Segment as read-only information.
4. Under Interval Length, specify the desired stock length or a desired interval
length to cut the pipe run at multiple locations.
5. Under Miscellaneous Options, click Joint Fitting and select the type of fitting
from the list. If the selected joint fitting is a flange, the Weld Type options are
not accessible.
If the joint fitting specified is a sleeve or coupling with welding end types, under
Weld Type, select one of the following options. The weld attribute is
automatically associated to the inlet port of the joint fitting.
o Shop-Field—The joint fitting is inserted with its far point aligned to the cut
location and cut location has a Field Weld (FW) attribute.
o Shop-Shop—The joint fitting is inserted with its far point aligned to the cut
location and cut location has a Shop Weld (SW) attribute.
o Field-Shop—The joint fitting is inserted with its near point aligned to the
cut location and cut location has a Field Weld (FW) attribute.
Note: In all of these Weld Type options, the welding at the other side of the
fitting is a Shop Weld.
or
To Cut Parallel Pipes at Locations Identical to the Reference Pipe

Run
You can cut a group of parallel pipe runs in a single operation. All cuts on the
selected parallel pipe runs are created at locations that are identical to the locations
of cuts on the reference pipe run. Pro/PIPING allows you to automatically stagger the
parallel pipe cuts if the joint fittings on a cut are interfering with the joint fittings on
another parallel pipe cut. The cuts on the target runs use a weld and joint fitting that
is similar to the corresponding cut on the reference pipe run.
2. Click to cut parallel pipe runs at locations identical to locations on the

reference pipe run.
231
3. Select a pipe segment that is part of a pipe run that has one or many pipe cuts.
The pipeline label is displayed under Select Reference Pipe Run as read-only
information.
Note: Pro/PIPING does not allow selection of pipe segments of a pipe run that
has no pipe cuts on it.
4. Select the pipe runs parallel to the reference pipe run. The pipeline label of the
selected pipe segments is displayed under Select Target Pipe Run(s) as read-
only information.
Note: Pro/PIPING does not allow selection of pipe runs that are not parallel to
the reference pipe run.
5. Under Parallel Pipe Cutting, specify the following options:
o Min. Clearance—Specify a value for the minimum clearance checking

between joint fittings. Type a new value to override the default value
specified by the piping_joint_fitting_clearance configuration option.
This value is used for the automatic clearance checking.
o Offset Distance—Specify a value for staggering pipe cuts that are

associated with joint fittings. If joint fittings associated to cuts on parallel
pipelines interfere with each other, the cuts are staggered by the specified
distance to avoid the interference.
6. To insert cuts on parallel pipe runs at locations identical to locations on the

reference pipe run, do one of the following:
Click to insert cuts on the parallel pipe runs and close the Cut Pipe dialog
box.
or
Click to insert cuts on the parallel pipe runs and then continue inserting cuts
with the Cut Pipe dialog box.
To Cut Parallel Pipes at Specified Interval Length

Use the following procedure to cut a group of parallel pipe runs in a single operation.
All cuts on the selected parallel pipe runs are created at locations that are at the
specified interval length. Pro/PIPING allows you to automatically stagger the parallel
pipe cuts if the joint fittings on a cut that is interfering with the joint fittings on
another parallel pipe cut. The cuts on the target runs use a weld and joint fitting that
is similar to the corresponding cut on the reference pipe run.
2. Click the Parallel Interval Length Cutting option to cut parallel pipe runs at
the specified interval length.
3. Under Select Pipe Segments, select the parallel pipe segments to cut.
232
4. Under Cut Placement Option, type a value in the Interval Length box to cut
the parallel pipe runs at the specified intervals.
The first selected pipe run is cut at the specified interval, and then all other
selected pipe runs are cut at similar locations as that of the first run. The cuts on
parallel pipe runs are aligned to the cuts on the first pipe run.
o The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that
fitting. You can change this code by selecting from the list.
o Under Weld Type, the Field option is selected by default. If it is not, select
it to assign a field weld attribute to this cut. Field Welds with unique
identification numbers will be created at each cut location.
6. Under Parallel Pipe Cutting, specify the following options:
o Min. Clearance—Specify a value for clearance checking between flange

joint fittings. Type a new value to override the default value specified by
the piping_joint_fitting_clearance configuration option. This value is
used for the automatic clearance checking.
o Offset Distance—Specify a value for staggering pipe cuts that are

associated with joint fittings. If joint fittings associated to cuts on parallel
pipelines interfere with each other, the cuts are staggered by the specified
distance to avoid the interference.
Tip: Selecting a Reference Pipe Run for Cutting Parallel Pipes

Cuts on the target pipe runs are created using the placement type information
associated with the corresponding cut on the reference pipe run.
To create cuts on the target runs at locations identical to locations on the reference
run:
• Select only those pipe runs that are parallel to the reference run as the target
runs.
• Select the pipe run with multiple cuts as the reference run. All these cuts on the
reference run must be created using the length, ratio, offset from corner, offset
from plane, or offset from fitting port icons available in the Cut Pipe dialog box.
If the cuts on the reference run are created using any other placement type
option, Pro/PIPING creates cuts on the target runs using the default Length
placement type option.
233
Example: Parallel Pipe Piece Cutting

The following figure shows four parallel runs. The 100A-MS-STEAM-0001 pipe run has
five pipe piece cuts: FW1, SW1, SW2, FW2, and FW3.
• To create cuts on the other three parallel pipe runs, select Fabrication > Cut
Pipe from the PIPING menu.
• Click from the Cut Pipe dialog box.
• Select the 100A-MS-STEAM-0001 pipe run as the reference pipe run because it
contains the pipe piece cuts.
• Select the pipe runs that are parallel to the reference pipe run as target pipe runs
for creating new cuts.
• Click to create the cuts.
Pro/PIPING creates cuts on the selected parallel target pipe runs at locations
identical to locations on the reference pipe run as shown in the following figure.
234
Checking the Clearance between the Pipe Cuts with Flanged

Fittings
You can cut a set of pipe runs parallel to the reference pipe run in a single operation.
All cuts are created at locations identical to locations on the reference pipe run. If a
target run is very close to the reference run or another target run, and the cut is
created at an identical location, the flange fittings attached to the parallel cuts may
interfere with each other and result in clash depending on the available clearance.
To avoid such clashes, Pro/PIPING automatically checks the clearance based on the
minimum clearance value for the joint fitting. Use the
piping_joint_fitting_clearance configuration option to specify the default value
for the minimum clearance. Specify the value in the current assembly units.
The identical cut locations on the parallel pipe runs can be staggered based on the
status of clearance checking.
The following figure shows the alignment of the pipe cut locations between pipe runs
A and B, where the spacing between the joint fittings on pipe run is greater than the
minimum clearance value.
1 Pipe run A
2 Actual clearance
3 Pipe run B
In the preceding example, the actual clearance is greater than the minimum
clearance value. Therefore, the cuts and joint fittings are aligned one below the
other.
If the actual clearance is less than the specified minimum clearance, the cuts on the
target pipe runs are staggered by the value specified for the offset distance.
235
Staggering of Cuts With Joint Fitting

To avoid a clash due to inadequate clearance between joint fittings, cuts can be
staggered during the cutting of parallel pipes.
The value specified for Offset Distance on the Cut Pipe dialog box for the parallel
pipes is used to stagger the cuts. When a joint fitting interference is detected, the
fitting that is causing the violation is highlighted. You are prompted to stagger the
cut location. Select Yes to insert the staggered cut or select No to abort the cut
insertion. Further, if you have chosen to insert the staggered cut and the resultant
staggered location also violates the clearance check, you are prompted whether to
continue or abort the cut insertion. If you select Yes, the cut is inserted at the
staggered location and if you select No the cut insertion is aborted.
Use the piping_joint_fitting_offset configuration option to specify the default
offset value. Specify the offset value in the current assembly units.
The following figure shows a pipe cut stagger between pipe runs A, B, and C as the
spacing between the joint fitting on these pipe runs is less than the minimum
clearance value.
1 Offset
2 Pipe run A
3 Actual clearance
4 Pipe run B
5 Pipe run C
236
In the preceding figure, the cut locations on adjacent pipe runs, that is, pipe run A
and pipe run B are staggered. The cut locations on alternate pipe runs, that is, pipe
run A and pipe run C are aligned.
Assigning FLANGE_OD as a Dimension or Part Parameter

To check the minimum clearance between adjacent flanges when creating a fitting
library for flange fittings, assign FLANGE_OD as the dimension name or as a fitting
part parameter for the outer diameter of the flange. You must assign this dimension
name or part parameter even when you use the fitting of type coupling as a joint
fitting, even though it is not a flange. If the FLANGE_OD dimension is not found in a
joint fitting, the FLANGE_OD fitting part parameter is checked. In case you have not
assigned both the FLANGE_OD dimension as well as the FLANGE_OD fitting part
parameter, the outer diameter of the pipe is used for minimum clearance checking.
To Cut Pipes Associated With a Block

Use the following procedure to cut all pipe segments associated with a block. The
cuts are created on pipe segments at locations where the pipe segments intersect
the block boundary. Pro/PIPING automatically determines the pipe piece adjustment
length at a block boundary based on the type of the joint fitting and associates it
with the pipe segment upstream to the cut location.
2. Click to cut the pipe segments intersecting with the associated block
boundary.
3. Under Select Block, select the name of a block or zone from the list.
The labels of all the pipelines that intersect with the selected block are displayed
under Pipelines To Be Cut.
All the listed pipelines under Pipelines To Be Cut are verified for intersection
with the selected block and intersecting locations are highlighted. Information
about the intersections is also displayed in the message window.
When a pipeline is selected from the list, it is highlighted in the model.
You can change this code by selecting another code from the list.
5. To assign a field weld attribute to this cut, under Weld Type, select the Field or
Shop option. The default is Field.
237
6. To insert cuts on the selected pipe segments at locations intersecting with the
block boundary, do one of the following:
Click to insert cuts at the highlighted locations, generate the specified weld
or
Click to insert cuts at the highlighted locations, generate the specified weld
Example: Block Boundary Based Pipe Piece Cutting

The following figure shows a set of pipelines (magenta) within the block BLOCK1002A.
The boundaries of the block are highlighted. The model tree also shows some other
blocks such as BLOCK1001, BLOCK1002B, and BLOCK1003.
Use the following procedure to create pipe piece cuttings based on the block
boundary:
• Select PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe.
• Click to cut pipe pieces based on the block boundary.
• Select BlOCK1002A from the Select Block selection list.
Pro/PIPING selects all pipelines in the specified block for creation of the pipe piece
cuts. The labels of all the pipelines that intersect with the selected block are
displayed under Pipelines To Be Cut.
238
All locations where the pipelines intersect with the block boundary are highlighted as
shown in the following figure.
Information such as the total number of intersections and details of the

intersections is displayed in the message window as shown:
o 2 intersections found for the pipeline 100A-MS-STEAM-0001.
o No intersections found for the pipeline 50A-MS-STEAM-2003.
o Total intersections found : 10
• Select to create a pipe piece cuttings as shown in the following figure. The
pipe pieces are created at locations where pipeline intersect block boundary.
239
These cut point locations depend on the block boundaries. The dimension for the
cut points is not displayed in the figure because the driving dimensions of the
block boundary geometry control the locations of these cut points.
For example, the preceding figure shows the dimension of the block boundaries
ADTM1 and ADTM2, The dimension of both the boundaries is 75.00.
240
If you modify the dimension of ADTM1 and ADTM2 as 40.00 and 100.00
respectively, the cut points on those boundaries also move along with the
bounding geometry as shown in the following figure.
Using Joint Fittings

By default, a joint fitting is not inserted at pipe cut piece location unless you specify
it.
Use the Joint Fitting option in the Cut Pipe dialog box to automatically insert a
joint fitting at the piece cut location. If more than one joint fitting is appropriate for a
particular cut location, you can select a joint fitting from the list of Joint Fittings.
If you choose flange as a joint fitting, the Weld Type options are not enabled.
For Parallel Pipe Cuts

When cutting a set of parallel pipe runs, if the cut on the reference pipe run has a
joint fitting, Pro/PIPING creates identical cuts on the target pipe runs with a similar
joint fitting. To select an appropriate joint fitting for the target pipe run, the
reference joint fitting suitable for the size and specification of the target pipe run is
used. If a joint fitting with the specified selection name does not exist in the target
pipeline's specification, the cut is created without the joint fitting.
For Pipe Cuts at Block Boundary Intersection

When cutting pipelines intersecting with the block boundary a list of all valid fitting
selection names for all the selected pipe segments is displayed in the Joint Fitting
selection list. You can select any fitting from the list for all the cuts.
241
However, if the specified fitting selection name is not valid for the pipe specification
and size at any of the pipe cut locations, Pro/PIPING does not create the cut and
displays a warning message. To process such pipe segments, you can again specify
a valid fitting selection name.
Assigning a Weld Type

You can assign a shop weld attribute or field weld attribute at pipe piece cut
locations. If a welded sleeve or coupling is automatically inserted during the pipe
piece cutting process, then a shop-field weld is automatically assigned to the cut
location based on the weld option currently specified.
When a flange is specified for automatic joint fitting insertion, the weld assignment
option is disabled.
The field weld information is used by the Pipe Spool Generation functionality to
generate pipe spools and number them. The Piping Isometric Drawing functionality
uses both the shop weld and field weld information to mark the shop or field welds
on isometric drawings.
The shop or field welds are graphically represented and have a unique identification
number, which is automatically generated. For example, shop weld numbers are
SW1, SW2, and so on.
At any time during modeling, click on the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar to display or

hide the shop or field welds.
When cutting a set of parallel pipes at a location identical to the location on the
reference pipe, the cut on the target segment is created with the same weld type as
that of the corresponding cut on the reference segment.
To Delete a Pipe Piece Cut

Use this procedure to delete a single pipe cut piece or to delete all cuts on a single
segment, overall pipe run, entire pipeline, or in a block.
1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Delete Cut. The Delete Cut dialog box opens.
2. Based on the location of the cuts to be deleted, do one of the following:
o Select Selected Cut to delete only the selected cut. The name of the
selected cut location is displayed under Select Pipe Cut.
o Select All Cuts in Pipe Segment to delete the cuts on a pipe segment.
Select a pipe segment on the model. The pipeline label of the selected pipe
segment and the ID of the pipe segment are displayed under Select Pipe
Segment.
o Select All Cuts in Pipe Run to delete all the cuts existing on a pipe run.
Select a pipe run on the model. The pipeline label of the selected pipe
segment and the ID of the pipe segment are displayed under Select Pipe
Segment.
242
o The pipe run includes all pipe segments between two consecutive free ends
along a straight line, or a free end and a corner, or a corner and a free end,
or a corner and another corner of a pipeline.
o Select All Cuts at Block Boundary to delete all cuts associated with a
block. Under Select Block Name, select a block name from the list.
o Select All Cuts on Pipeline to delete the cuts in an entire pipeline. Select
any pipe segment on the pipeline whose cuts are to be deleted. The pipeline
label of the selected pipe segment is displayed under Select Pipeline.
3. To delete the selected cuts, do one of the following:
o Click to delete all the selected cuts and close the Delete Cut dialog
box.
o Click to delete the selected cuts. The pipeline automatically repaints

with the cut deleted and the Delete Cut dialog box remains open to enable
you to delete any more cuts.
Generating Pipe Spools
About Spool Generation

You can use the spool functionality to:
• Create spool labels for one or more selected pipelines or spools.
• Modify spool labels for a selected pipeline or spool.
• Delete spool labels for one or more selected pipelines or spools.
Each pipe spool label that is created has a unique spool number. The spool label and
its number are stored in the model and are used during the pipe spool piece drawing
generation, the installation drawing generation, and reporting.
To Create a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment

1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Spool. Select Create from the Spool menu that
appears. The Create Spool dialog box opens.
2. To create spool labels for a pipeline, under Select pipeline(s), select one or
more pipelines for which you want to create spool labels. To create spool labels
for spool segments, select one or more spool segments under Select spool(s).
You can select the required pipelines or spool segments from the graphics
window or from the Piping System Tree.
Under Options, Pipeline is selected by default that enables you to select

pipelines. Click Spool to select individual spool segments instead of pipelines.
243
3. Under Parameters, specify the following:
o If required, specify a prefix for the spool label in the Prefix box to
substitute the value specified for the pipeline_spool_label_format
configuration option. The default value is 0.
o If required, specify a suffix for the spool label in the Suffix box to
substitute the value specified for the pipeline_spool_label_format
o Specify a start number in the Number box for the spool labels that you
want to create. The default value is 01.
Note: The value 01 means that a two-digit spool label number is created
with a leading zero. If you want to assign a three-digit spool label number,
specify 001.
o Specify an increment value for the generated spool label number in the
Increment box. The default value is 1.
If you have selected a spool segment instead of a pipeline to create spool

labels, you can click which is available adjacent to the Prefix, Suffix,
and the Number boxes, to lock the boxes. If you lock these boxes, you
cannot edit the corresponding values unless you use the Modify Spool
dialog box to unlock the boxes.
4. Click to create spool labels for the selected pipelines or spool segments and
close the Create Spool dialog box.
or
Click to create the spools and continue using the Create Spool dialog box.
To Modify a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment

1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Spool. Select Modify from the Spool menu that
appears. The Modify Spool dialog box opens.
2. To modify spool labels for a pipeline, under Select pipeline, select the required
pipeline. To modify spool labels for a spool segment, select the required spool
segment under Select spool. You can select the pipeline or spool segment from
the graphics window or from the Piping System Tree.
By default, Pipeline is selected under Options. Click Spool to select a spool

segment instead of a pipeline under Options.
3. Under Parameters specify the following:
o Specify a new prefix in the Prefix box to substitute the existing value.
o Specify a new suffix in the Suffix box to substitute the existing value.
o Specify a new start number in the Number box for the spool label that you
want to modify.
244
o Specify a new increment value for the spool label number in the
Increment box.
o If you have selected a spool segment instead of a pipeline to modify spool
labels, you can click adjacent to the Prefix, Suffix, and the Number
boxes to unlock the boxes, if they are locked.
4. Click to modify spool labels for the selected pipelines or spool segments and
close the Modify Spool dialog box.
or
Click to create the spools and continue using the Modify Spool dialog box.
To Delete a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment

1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Spool. Select Delete from the Spool menu that
appears. The Delete Spool dialog box opens.
2. To delete spool labels for a pipeline, under Select pipeline(s), select one or
more pipelines for which you want to delete spool labels. To delete spool labels
for a spool segment, select one or more spool segments under Select spool(s).
Select the pipelines or spool segments from the graphics window or from the
Piping System Tree.
Under Options, Pipeline is selected by default. Click Spool to delete spool

labels for individual spool segments instead of pipelines.
3. Under Parameters, click the Delete the locked spools check box to delete
spools that are locked previously using the Create Spool or Modify Spool dialog
box.
4. Click to delete the selected pipeline or spool segment.
or
Click to delete the spool and continue using the Delete Spool dialog box.
About Simplified Spool Representation

The simplified representation of a spool is generated automatically when you create
spool labels. This simplified spool version is updated when you modify spool labels
and is deleted when you delete spool labels. The name of the simplified spool
corresponds to the name of the generated spool label.
245
To Display a Simplified Spool
1. Click , or click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box
opens.
Under Names, all the pipeline spool components are displayed and Master Rep
is selected by default.
2. Double-click a spool component to display the simplified representation of the

selected spool component in the graphics window.
Pipe Insulation
About Pipeline Insulation (Spec-Driven)

With Pro/PIPING you can assign insulation to a pipeline, part of a pipeline, and
fittings. After you assign the insulation, Pro/PIPING creates insulation features that
can be accessed in the Pro/ENGINEER Model Tree.
You can perform the following insulation tasks at any time in the piping design
process:
• Assign insulation to an entire pipeline during pipeline creation or during piping
design.
• Assign insulation to any part of a selected pipeline. Target and insulate specific
pipeline areas.
• Modify any insulation assignment in your piping system.
• Delete any insulation assignment in your piping system.
• Create quilt representations of insulation for immediate graphical identification

and confirmation.
• Generate detailed insulation reports for further insulation analysis.
To Assign Insulation during Pipeline Creation (Spec-Driven)

Note: You can only assign insulation to an entire pipeline using this method.
1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Create/Route. The Create Pipeline dialog box
opens.
2. Under Pipeline Label, select the applicable pipeline label information.
3. If an insulation code was assigned to the selected specification in the

Specification Directory (database) file, the Insulation box displays the code. You
can select another insulation code but you must select an insulation code.
If an insulation code was not assigned to the selected specification in the

Specification Directory (database) file, click the Insulation check box and select
an insulation code from the list.
246
4. Click to save the selections. Pro/PIPING saves the insulation data in an

insulation feature in the active assembly.
5. Retrieve insulation information (PIPING > Info) to view the assigned insulation
data.
Note:
• The following Specification Database files must be populated with insulation data
in order to assign insulation to specification-driven pipelines:
o Insulation Directory file (Project Data file) must contain records for the
insulation codes.
o Insulation MCAT file (Master Catalog file) that is assigned to an insulation

code must contain insulation data.
• Optionally, Pro/PIPING can create insulation quilts after you create pipe solids.
To Modify Insulation Assigned to a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING allows you to modify the insulation assigned to an entire specification-
driven pipeline or assign insulation to an entire uninsulated pipeline. You can add or
modify insulation at any time. However, you cannot use this procedure to delete
insulation or modify insulation assigned to part of a pipeline.
2. Under Active Assembly, Pro/PIPING displays the current active assembly. If the
pipeline to insulate is in a different assembly, click and select the assembly
that contains the pipeline. You can select the assembly from either the Model
Tree or the Piping System Tree, or by selecting the pipeline in the graphics
window.
3. Under Modify Options, click Edit Pipeline. The Edit Pipeline dialog box opens.
4. If active assembly contains multiple pipelines, select the pipeline to insulate from
the Select Pipeline box.
5. Click the Label tab.
6. Under Pipeline Label, modify the insulation code for the selected pipeline. Two
conditions apply for insulation modification:
o If an insulation code was assigned to the pipeline, the Insulation box

displays the code. You can select another insulation code from the list to
change the insulation.
o If an insulation code was not assigned to the pipeline, select the

Insulation check box and select an insulation code from the list to insulate
the pipeline.
7. Click to save the selections. Pro/PIPING modifies the insulation data in the
insulation feature in the active assembly.
247
8. Retrieve insulation information (PIPING > Info) to view the assigned insulation
data.
9. Click PIPING > Regenerate to regenerate the assembly and update the model
display.
Note:
o Insulation Directory file (Project Data file) must contain records for the
insulation codes.
o Insulation MCAT file (Master Catalog file) that is assigned to an insulation

code must contain insulation data.
To Delete Insulation (Spec-Driven)

Use the following methods to delete insulation assigned to pipelines:
• To delete the insulation assigned to a part of a pipeline, click PIPING >
Fabrication > Delete Insul and select the insulation to be deleted from the
graphics window.
• To delete the insulation assigned to the entire pipeline:
a. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens.
b. Under Active Assembly select the active assembly.
c. Under Modify Options, select Edit Pipeline. The Edit Pipeline dialog box
opens.
d. Clear the Insulation option to delete the insulation.
Using the Model Tree to Delete Insulation

1. Open the assembly containing the pipeline and the insulation to be deleted.
2. Click . The Model Tree opens.
3. In the Model Tree, locate the assembly containing the insulated pipeline and
corresponding the insulation feature. You can delete the following types of
insulation features:
o Insulation Features—Stores the insulation data (codes, names, thickness,

sizes, and so on) for a pipeline. Pro/PIPING identifies the insulation features
by insulation code.
o Insulation Segment Features—Stores the start and end points for

insulation on part of a pipe segment. Note that the insulation segment
feature is a child of the related insulation feature. If you delete an
insulation feature, Pro/PIPING deletes all related children, including the
248
insulation segment feature, if applicable. If you delete the insulation feature

from an insulated pipeline that also contains a partially insulated segment,
all insulation data will be deleted.
Note: If you have assigned insulation to a pipeline, the entire pipeline is

the child of the corresponding insulation feature. In such a case, if you
delete an insulation feature, the entire pipeline is deleted.
To Report Insulation Information (Spec-Driven)

1. Assign insulation to a pipeline or part of a pipeline.
2. Click PIPING > Info. The Report Pipeline dialog box opens.
3. Click , or click Type and select Insulation.
4. Under Select pipeline(s), select an insulated pipeline or insulated pipe segment

from which to retrieve information. You can select from either the Model Tree,
the Piping System Tree, or the graphics window.
Pro/PIPING displays the insulation information under Preview Info. You can
either scroll to view the entire report or click and view the report in the
separate INFORMATION WINDOW.
About Assigning Insulation to Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING allows you to assign insulation to part of a pipeline (insulation segment)
using the Create Insulation dialog box (PIPING > Fabrication > Insulation).
During piping design, the following special cases can arise and necessitate an
insulation segment:
• Pipelines and fittings not normally insulated require insulation inside special areas
such as purifier rooms.
• Pipelines near equipments can condense when exposed to extreme temperatures.

Hence they must be insulated to prevent damage.
To Assign Insulation to Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)

1. Click PIPING > Active Asm and select the active assembly that contains the
pipeline that you want to partially insulate.
2. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Insulation. The Create Insulation dialog box
opens. The Start option under Insulation Segment Points is selected by
default.
3. Follow these steps to select insulation start and end points. Start and end points
must be on the same pipeline:
a. Under Select Start Point, click and select a pipe segment to specify
the insulation start point. Crosshairs indicate the start point on the pipe
249
segment, and the pipe segment ID is displayed in the Select Start Point
box.
b. Click End under Insulation Segment Points.
c. Under Select End Point, click and select the insulation end point.
Crosshairs indicate the end point on the pipe segment, and the pipe
segment ID is displayed in the Select End Point box.
4. Under Location Type, select one of the following to specify both start and end
point placement.
Note: You must select Start and End under Insulation Segment Points to
place the appropriate points.
—Specifies the distance of the start or end point from the pipe segment's
upstream end.
—Specifies the distance ratio of the start or end point from the pipe segment's
upstream end.
Note: In the above two cases, by default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference
location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click available under Location
Parameter to flip the location with reference to the end of the pipe segment.
Pro/PIPING changes to to indicate the change in the reference location.
—Places a start or end point on the pipe segment perpendicular to that pipe
segment.
Note: The pipe segment's start point must be perpendicular to the pipe segment's
end point to make this option available.
—Places a start or end point from a specified datum plane. The datum plane
must be perpendicular to the start or end point pipe segment. Pro/PIPING creates a
reference to the datum plane.
—Places a start or end point from a specified fitting. The selected fitting must
exist in the same pipeline and in the same straight pipe piece. Click under
Location Parameter to flip the reference port.
5. Under Location Parameter, specify the point location parameters based on the
selected placement option. Use the thumb wheel to move the point placement or
enter a value in the thumb wheel box for exact placement.
250
If you clicked, , select a datum plane from the graphics window.

Pro/PIPING displays the datum plane name in the Location Parameter box.
6. Under Insulation Parameters, select an insulation code to assign insulation

between the specified placement points.
7. Click to assign the insulation to the pipe segment.
Note:
o The Insulation Directory file (Project Data file) must contain records for the
insulation codes.
o The Insulation MCAT file (Master Catalog file) that is assigned to an

insulation code must contain insulation data.
To Redefine Insulation Assigned to a Part of a Pipeline (Spec-

Driven)
Pro/PIPING creates insulation segment features after you assign insulation to a part
of a pipeline. You can redefine insulation segment features at any time during the
piping design process.
1. Open the assembly associated with the pipeline containing the insulation segment
feature to be redefined.
2. Click . The Model Tree opens.
3. In the Model Tree, locate the insulation segment feature to redefine. The Model
Tree lists the following insulation features:
o Insulation Features—Stores the insulation data such as codes, names,

thickness, sizes, and so on for a pipeline. Pro/PIPING identifies the
insulation features by the insulation code. You cannot redefine insulation
features from the Model Tree. You must modify the specification database
insulation files.
o Insulation Segment Features—Stores the start and end points for

insulation on a part of a pipe segment.
Using the Model Tree to Redefine Insulation

1. Select the Insulation Segment feature to redefine from the Model Tree. The
feature is highlighted on the pipeline in the graphics window. Right-click and a
251
2. Click Edit Definition. The Redefine Insulation dialog box opens with the
insulation segment selected.
3. Select Start under Insulation Segment Points and perform any of the
following tasks:
o Change the insulation start point. Under Select Start Point, click and
select a pipe segment to specify the insulation start point. Crosshairs
indicate the start point on the pipe segment and the pipe segment ID is
displayed in the Select Start Point box.
o Change the insulation end point. Select End under Insulation Segment
Points. Under Select End Point, click and select the insulation end
point. Crosshairs indicate the end point on the pipe segment and the pipe
segment ID is displayed in the Select End Point box.
o Change the start and end point placement. Under Location Type, select
one of the following to specify both start and end point placement. You
must select Start and End under Insulation Segment Points to place the
appropriate points:
—Specifies the distance of the start or end point distance from the
pipe segment's upstream end.
—Specifies the distance ratio of the start or end point from the pipe
segment's upstream end.
—Places a start or end point on the pipe segment perpendicular to

that pipe segment. The pipe segment's start point must be perpendicular to
the pipe segment's end point to make this option available.
—Places a start or end point from a specified datum plane. The datum
plane must be perpendicular to the pipe segment's start or end point.
Pro/PIPING creates a reference to the datum plane.
—Places a start or end point from a specified fitting. The selected

fitting must exist in the same pipeline and in the same straight pipe piece.
Under Location Parameter, specify the point location parameters based

on the selected placement option. Use the thumb wheel to move the point
placement or enter a value in the thumb wheel box for exact placement.
252
If you clicked , select a datum plane from the graphics window.

Pro/PIPING displays the datum plane name in the Location Parameter
box.
o Change the insulation. Under Insulation Parameters, select a new

insulation code to assign new insulation between the specified placement
points.
4. Click to assign new insulation to the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING creates a new
insulation feature and reassigns the insulation segment feature to it.
Note:
o The Insulation Directory file (Project Data file) must contain records for the
insulation codes.
o The Insulation MCAT file (Master Catalog file) that is assigned to an

insulation code must contain insulation data.
• The Model Tree must display features to redefine insulation segment features
from the Model Tree. Click Settings > Tree Filters. The Model Tree Items
dialog box opens. Under Display, click the Features check box and click OK.
Creating Pipe Solids
About Pipe Solids

A pipe solid is the solid geometry that you create inside a solid part using the Pipe
Solid generation functionality.
Pro/PIPING automatically creates a new solid part if you use any of the following
modeling functions to update a pipeline that has associated pipe solid geometry:
• Pipeline routing
• Fitting insertion, deletion, redefinition, replacement
• Group fitting insertion
• Pipeline modification
• Pipeline corner modification
• Pipe cutting and cut deletion
253
To Create or Erase a Pipe Solid

1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Pipe Solid. The Pipe Solid dialog box opens.
2. Under Select Pipelines/Segments, select one of the following:
o Pipelines—Selects one or more pipelines in an assembly that is active or

not active.
o Segments—Selects one or more segments in an assembly that is active or

not active.
Note: If you select segments to create pipe solids, you cannot select fitting
components.
If you select a piping system node, all pipelines in this piping system are
selected.
3. Under Select Insulation Option below the Selected Pipelines/Segments

table, select one or both of the following:
o Pipe Solid—Only pipe solids are generated or erased for the selected
pipelines or pipe segments.
o Insulation Quilt—Only insulation quilts are generated or erased for the

selected pipelines or pipe segments. You can generate insulation quilts only
if you have assigned appropriate insulation parameters to the selected
pipelines or pipe segments.
Note: If you select Pipe Solid and Insulation Quilt, Pro/PIPING generates or
erases both pipe solids and insulation quilts.
The Selected Pipelines/Segments table displays the following information:
o Status—Displays the status of the pipe solid generation.
—All pipe segments associated with the selected pipeline or pipe

segment have no associated pipe solids.
—All pipe segments associated with the selected pipeline or pipe

segment have associated pipe solids.
—Only a few pipe segments associated with the selected pipeline or pipe
segment have associated pipe solids.
o Pipelines/Segments—Displays the pipeline label for the selected pipelines

or pipe segments.
o Solid Name—Displays the actual part name if the pipe solid has been
generated for the selected pipeline or pipe segment. Otherwise, displays a
system-generated name based on the pipeline label and the increment
number.
Note: You can edit the part name of the pipe solid.
254
o Solid Start Part Name—Displays the name of the solid start part specified
by the configuration option, pipeline_solid_start_part_name. You can
edit this name.
4. Click to generate the pipe solid or the insulation quilt.
or
Click to generate the pipe solid and the insulation quilt and repeat the Pipe
Solid generation operation for a different set of pipelines or pipe segments.
or
Click to erase the selected pipe solid or the insulation quilt.
Note: If the selected pipe segments have insulation assigned to them, Pro/PIPING
automatically creates insulation quilts during the Pipe Solid generation operation.
Example: Creating Pipe Solids and Insulation Quilts

A piping model with three pipelines that have been modeled with appropriate
insulation parameters is shown in the next figure.
To generate the required pipe solids and insulation quilts, perform the following
steps:
1. Open the Pipe Solid dialog box and select the pipeline 100A-RW-WATER-111-EK
using the Pipelines option.
2. Use the Pipelines option again to select Pipe Extend id 46 from the Model Tree.
Pro/PIPING selects the entire pipeline 50A-HA-STEAM-1111-ES.
3. Under Select Insulation Option, select both Pipe Solid as well as Insulation
Quilt.
255
4. Click to generate the required pipe solids and insulation quilts as shown in
the following figure:
Using the Piping System Tree to Create and Erase Pipe Solids
The following figure shows three pipelines that are located under different
assemblies. The Piping System Tree is also shown in the figure.
256
Use the previous piping model to perform the following steps:

1. Select the assemblies AIR and STEAM from the piping system tree.
2. Right-click and select Solid > Create from the shortcut menu. The pipe solids
and the insulation quilts are generated for all the pipelines located under the AIR
and STEAM assemblies as shown in the following figure:
3. Use the same selection as discussed in step 1. Right-click and select Solid >
Delete from the shortcut menu. The pipe solids and the insulation quilts are
deleted as shown in the following figure:
Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling
About Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling

Schematic-driven pipeline modeling is 3D pipeline modeling based on 2D Piping and
Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) data created in the Routed Systems Designer. This
P&ID data or schematic information is stored in an XML file.
During pipeline creation, pipeline routing, and fitting insertion, schematic-driven
pipeline modeling uses the information of a pipeline from the XML file to avoid
inconsistencies between the 2D and the 3D model.
257
You can use the schematic information in the XML file only if:
• The piping_schematic_driven configuration option is set to yes.
• The piping design mode is specification-driven.
To specify an absolute path to be used as the start location for XML file selection and
look-up, set the piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option to the required
path. The default path for the XML file is the Pro/ENGINEER working directory.
About Associating an XML File with a Pipeline

You can associate a pipeline with an XML file using the Edit Pipeline dialog box if
the piping_schematic_driven configuration option is set to yes. You can associate
a pipeline with a schematic pipeline in XML if:
• The pipeline is created in the nonschematic mode.
• The XML file is changed.
About Routed Systems Designer Component Properties in

Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling
The Routed Systems Designer component properties that are used during schematic-
driven modeling are listed below.
Pipelines
The SPEC, SIZE, SCHEDULE, MNEMONIC and NUMBER properties associated with a
pipeline label are displayed when you click Label in the Create Pipeline dialog box.
The OPER_PRESSURE, OPER_TEMPERATURE, DESIGN_PRESSURE, and
DESIGN_TEMPERATURE properties are available when you click the Parameters tab
in the Create Pipeline dialog box. Any other property defined in XML is read in the
Defined tab.
NAME_FORMAT—Format used for naming a pipeline. Functions similarly as the
pipeline_label_format configuration option. A typical value can be <MNEMONIC>-
<NUMBER>-<SIZE>.
Equipment and Nozzles

• CATEGORY—To classify an Routed Systems Designer component as equipment,
specify CATEGORY = EQUIPMENT. To classify a Routed Systems Designer
component as a nozzle, specify CATEGORY = NOZZLE.
• MODEL_NAME—Must be same as the Pro/ENGINEER part name. The part name

is displayed in the Component box in the Pipeline Designation dialog box.
• REF_DES—If a value is assigned to this parameter in Routed Systems Designer,

the same value is exported in XML. If the value is not defined in Routed Systems
Designer, the value of the FULL_NAME property is assigned to REF_DES. This value
is displayed in the Designator box in the Pipeline Designation dialog box.
258
Note: If a pipeline connects two equipment that have the same REF_DES value,
only one of the equipment is listed during designation. Hence, you must always
assign a unique value to the REF_DES parameter.
• ENTRY_PORT—This Routed Systems Designer property is applied to a

coordinate csys of a nozzle or an equipment. If the value of this parameter
matches the Pro/ENGINEER csys name, then that csys in Pro/ENGINEER is
highlighted during the routing of that pipeline.
Fittings
• CATEGORY—Must be same as the CATEGORY value stored in the
piping_mcat_dir.ptd file. The CATEGORY value controls the activation of the
fitting category icons under Select Fitting Category in the Insert Fitting dialog
box.
• SNAME—Must be same as the SNAME value stored in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd

file for that fitting. The SNAME value is displayed in the Selection Name list for a
category in the Insert Fitting dialog box.
• SIZE—Fittings are filtered according to the size of the selected segment if you
have specified the Routed Systems Designer component property, SIZE, for that
fitting in the XML file. If a fitting does not have the Routed Systems Designer
component property, SIZE, then that fitting is always available for insertion
irrespective of the selected segment size.
• NSIZE—Required while inserting reducers. The NSIZE value in the XML file is the
default value while inserting the reducer. You can change the value of the NSIZE
parameter during insertion.
Note: You can also use the NEW_SIZE parameter instead of the NSIZE parameter.
• BSIZE—The BSIZE value is useful during branch fitting or drain valve insertion.
This is the default branch size value when you insert a particular branch fitting or
drain valve.
Note: You can also use the BRANCH_SIZE parameter instead of the BSIZE
parameter.
• SPEC—If you have specified SPEC in the XML file and if it is different from the
selected pipe segment, the Specification check box is selected by default and
the list becomes available.
• VALVE_NUMBER—If you have specified the VALVENUMBER parameter in the XML

file, a value is displayed as editable text in the Valve Number box in the Insert
Fitting dialog box.
• ENTRY_PORT—Same as for equipment and nozzles.
• REF_DES—Same as for equipment and nozzles.
• MODEL_NAME—Same as for equipment and nozzles.
259
Branches
CATEGORY—Specify CATEGORY = BRANCH to classify a Routed Systems Designer
component as a branch. Select a branch point or fitting to designate the branch
component.
To Designate Schematic Information

1. Click PIPING > Designation. The Pipeline Designation dialog box opens.
2. Under Select Pipeline, click and select an existing pipeline.
3. Under Select Schematic Pipeline, click to select the appropriate XML file
from the directory specified by the piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration
option. You can also select an XML file from any other directory.
4. Under Select Constrict Assembly, the top level assembly is selected by default
to search for the components. Click to select another assembly to restrict the
search of the components.
5. Select the appropriate schematic label to associate the Pro/ENGINEER pipeline

with the schematic pipeline.
The XML File and Schematic Label boxes are automatically updated. If you
change the XML file and the schematic label assigned to the pipeline, the pipeline
parameters are not updated. To update these parameters use the Edit Pipeline
dialog box.
6. Click the Equipment tab and select the equipment component. The Designate
Equipment table has a list of reference designators under Designator.
7. Click to select the equipment component or click to undesignate the

component with designated status.
Note: is enabled only if
o The Status column shows the status as Missing. In this case, click
Options > Allow Mismatch and select the components. The Status
column then changes to Manual Match.
o The Status column shows the status as Multiple. Multiple components are
highlighted.
8. If the equipment has nozzles, click and select an equipment list entry. The
nozzles specified in the XML file are listed under Designate Nozzles.
9. If the pipeline has fittings, the Fittings tab is enabled. Click under
Designate Fittings to designate an inserted fitting from the selected pipeline. A
schematically inserted fitting is directly given the designated status.
10. Under Designate Branches, click to designate a branch point or an

available TEE fitting.
260
11. Click to store the designations for the pipeline or click to store the
designated information for the pipeline and start with another pipeline.
Designating Equipment, Nozzles, Fittings, and Branches

Designate Equipment, Designate Nozzles, Designate Fittings, and Designate
Branches in the Pipeline Designation dialog box have a list of reference
designators and equipment components.
• Designator is the value of the refdes property specified in the XML file.
• Model is the value of the modelname property specified in the XML file. The
Model column is not displayed by default. Click Columns > Model to display the
Model column.
• Component is the Pro/PIPING component name. The component name is

automatically displayed if the Status column displays the value Auto Match. If
the value of the modelname property displayed under the Model column does not
match any of the Pro/PIPING component names in a selected assembly, the
Status column displays the value Missing. To designate the component
manually, click Options > Allow Mismatch and select the required component.
The Status column now displays the value Manual Match.
• The Pro/PIPING assembly is searched for a component having a name as that of

the value displayed under the Model column for a row. Based on the search
results, one of the following values will be displayed under the Status column:
o Designated—The component is designated and this information is stored

in the pipeline.
o Auto Match—A single instance of the component is found in the

Pro/PIPING assembly and is automatically matched.
o Manual Match—The component has been selected manually.
o Multiple—Several components with the same name have been found.
o Missing—A component with the name as that displayed under the Model
column is not found.
o Undesignated—A component that has been undesignated manually.
About Routing a Pipeline Using Schematic Information

You can route a pipeline based on the schematic information if the
piping_schematic_driven configuration option is set to yes.
The schematic information assists the routing operation in the following ways:
• All available start and end terminal locations (Pro/ENGINEER coordinate systems)
along with the corresponding equipment or nozzle, are highlighted during routing.
The Pro/ENGINEER coordinate systems are highlighted only if the ENTRY_PORT
parameter in XML has the same value as the Pro/ENGINEER coordinate system
name of the corresponding equipment or nozzle.
261
• Terminal locations and models that are already connected are not highlighted.
• If you select a coordinate system of an equipment other than the designated

equipment for a pipeline, a message appears that prompts you to continue or
abort the selection. You can ignore the warning message and continue the
routing operation from the selected port.
Note: If you ignore this warning message for a particular pipeline, perform a
schematic check later against the updated schematic information.
About Inserting a Fitting Using Schematic Information

You can insert a fitting using schematic information if a pipeline in Pro/PIPING is
associated with an appropriate schematic pipeline in XML.
The prerequisites to insert a schematic fitting are:
• The XML information for a fitting must contain a CATEGORY parameter that has a
value specified in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file. This value controls the
activation of the fitting category icons in the Insert Fitting dialog box after you
select a pipe segment.
• The SNAME parameter must have a value in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file

corresponding to a category. For example, if you specify CATEGORY = VALVE and
SNAME = GATE, the fitting category icon for the valve is activated and the
Selection Name list displays GATE in the Insert Fitting dialog box.
• If the XML information for a fitting contains the SIZE parameter, the fitting is
available only if the selected pipe segment in Pro/PIPING has a matching size.
You can insert an XML fitting that does not have a SIZE parameter irrespective of
the selected pipe segment in Pro/PIPING.
These prerequisites are also valid when you insert a group fitting.
During the schematic fitting insertion,
• The fitting category icons and the Selection Name list in the Insert Fitting
dialog box are updated each time you insert a schematic fitting.
• Context-sensitive information such as the valve number, new size, and branch
size for the selected fitting are displayed based on the information in the
schematic information file.
Note:
o If the context-sensitive information is not available in the schematic

information file, specify appropriate values.
o You can insert a group fitting using schematic information, using the same
method as for inserting a fitting.
• When you insert all the available schematic fittings, further fitting insertion is
possible only in the nonschematic mode.
262
About Replacing a Fitting Using Schematic Information

• You can replace a schematic fitting with another schematic fitting only if
schematic fittings are available for the selected pipe segment.
• You can replace a schematic fitting with a nonschematic fitting by clearing the
XML File check box in the Replace Fitting dialog box. This is possible even if
schematic fittings are available for insertion.
• If no schematic fittings are available when replacing schematic fittings, you can
replace fittings in the default nonschematic replacement mode.
Specification-Driven Pipe Drawing
About Pipe Drawings (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING allows you to create drawings of your piping systems. Drawings enable
you to effectively communicate piping system layout and details to piping
professionals who fabricate piping materials and assemble piping systems.
Pro/PIPING provides an interface to Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN). Using
the Generate Isometric dialog box (PIPING > Drawing), you can export material
and geometrical information from a Pro/PIPING model to .pcf ISOGEN files. These
files enable you to generate Isometric pipe drawings using an Isometric Drawing
Generation (ISOGEN) application.
Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN)
About Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) (Spec-Driven)

Pro/PIPING provides an ISOGEN interface that allows you to create isometric
drawings of pipelines. The Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) interface exports
material and geometrical data from a Pro/PIPING model to a readable ISOGEN .pcf
(Piping Component File) format. This format serves as an input to ISOGEN for
creating pipeline, spool, and system isometric drawings.
Using the Generate Isometric dialog box (PIPING > Drawing) you can create
isometric drawings from Pro/PIPING models. You can select pipelines, set up
filenames and directories, and export the data to an intermediate .pcf file(s).
ISOGEN reads this .pcf file data and generates the isometric drawings in various
standard data formats.
Note: You must first set the ISOGEN configuration options to use the ISOGEN
interface generation tool.
263
To Generate an Isometric Drawing (Spec-Driven)

Note: You must first set the ISOGEN configuration options to use the ISOGEN
interface generation tool.
1. Click PIPING > Drawing. The Generate Isometric dialog box opens and
prompts you to select a pipeline. The Selection tab is selected by default.
2. Under Select Isometric Drawing Type, specify the isometric drawing type. The
options are:
o Pipeline—Generates a pipeline isometric for each selected pipeline.

Pro/PIPING writes data related to each selected pipeline in a separate PCF
file and generates as many PCF files as the number of selected pipelines.
o Spool—Generates a spool isometric for each selected pipeline. Pro/PIPING

writes data of spools belonging to one pipeline into a separate PCF file and
generates as many PCF files as the number of selected pipelines.
o System—Generates a system isometric for each selected pipeline system.

For each selected pipeline, the data for connected pipelines is exported to a
PCF. If two or more of the selected pipelines belong to one network,
Pro/PIPING ignores any pipeline data that has already been exported.
3. Under Select pipeline(s), click and select a pipeline to generate the

isometric. You can select pipeline features or segment features from either the
Model Tree, the Piping System Tree, or the graphics window. Pro/PIPING displays
all selected pipelines under Select pipeline(s).
4. Under Options, use the following boxes to override any of the ISOGEN
configuration options. Note that any changes to these four options will remain in
effect throughout the Pro/ENGINEER session unless you change them during the
session.
o Output Directory—The value of the config.pro option

isogen_output_files_dir appears in the input panel. If you want to store
the PCF file in another directory, click . The Select Directory to

place output PCFs dialog box opens. Browse for the directory and click
Ok. If there is no value for isogen_output_files_dir, this input panel will
be blank and all files generated by the interface will be written to the
current working directory.
o ISOGEN File—The value of the config.pro option
isogen_mandatory_attr_file appears in the input panel. Click to

select a different ISOGEN file. The Select ISOGEN File dialog box opens.
Browse for the file and double-click.
264
o Symbol Map File—The value of the config.pro option
isogen_symbol_map_file appears in the input panel. Click to change

to a different symbol map file. The Select Symbol Map File dialog box
opens. Browse for the file and double-click.
o Endtype Map File—The value of the config.pro option
isogen_endtype_map_file appears in the input panel. Click to

change the endtype map file. The Select Endtype Map File dialog box
opens. Browse for the file and double-click.
o Click Generate One PCF File Per Spool to generate one PCF file for each
spool. The default is OFF, that is, Pro/PIPING writes the PCF data of all
spools of a pipeline in one PCF file and generates separate PCF files for each
selected pipeline.
5. Click the General Attr tab. These attributes are supported by ISOGEN and can
be used to determine various isometric drawing options.
6. Under Specify General Attributes, click the System Attr tab. The following
fields are optional ISOGEN system attributes:
o Date—Specify the date. Pro/PIPING displays the current system date by

default. You can change the value using the format --/--/--. The value
entered here is written to the PCF file for the DATE-DMY ISOGEN attribute.
o Project Identifier—Specify the project number or name.
o Revision Number—Specify the revision number.
o Area or Batch—Specify the sections of a project.
o Replot—Specify the number of isometric drawings to be replotted.
o Spool Prefix—Specify the spool identifier prefix.
o Weld Prefix Erection—Specify the erection weld prefix.
o Weld Prefix Fabrication—Specify the fabrication weld prefix.
o Weld Prefix General—Specify the weld prefix.
o Weld Prefix Offshore—Specify the offshore weld prefix.
7. Click the User Attr tab. These are user attributes provided by ISOGEN. Select
from the option list to specify the user attributes. The list contains all the
available user attributes supported by ISOGEN. They are MISC-SPEC1 to MISC-
SPEC5 and ATTRIBUTE1 to ATTRIBUTE99. Select an attribute, specify a
corresponding value, and ENTER. Pro/PIPING displays the attributes.
8. Click the Pipeline Attr tab. The attributes under Specify Pipeline Attributes are
usually applicable to one pipeline but you can also use them for multiple
pipelines. ISOGEN supports all of the following attributes, however, not every
attribute is available from the Pro/PIPING model.
265
o Pipeline Type—Select the pipeline construction type. All the valid types
are listed. Note that you should be informed about the other ISOGEN
pipeline construction types before changing this value to anything other
than General.
o Bend Radius—Specify the standard pulled bend radius.
o Painting Spec—Specify the painting specification.
o Tracing Spec—Specify the tracing specification.
o Start Coords—Specify the pipeline replot start coordinates.
o Specific Gravity—Specify the gravity of the pipeline contents.
o Output File Name—Specify the name of the drawing output file. The value
entered is used only when a single pipeline is selected. If pipeline isometric
or multiple pipelines are selected, the value is ignored.
o Highest Part Number—Specify the highest material list part number

generated on the previous run of the pipeline.
o Highest Weld Number—Specify the highest weld number generated on

the previous run of the pipeline.
Note: If you select multiple pipelines and data exists on this tabbed page (other
than the default General in the Pipeline Type option), a message dialog box
opens with following message:
Multiple Pipelines Selected. Use data in Pipeline Attr tab for all
pipelines?
9. Click Yes to export the data or No (the default) to ignore the data. If you click
Yes, the Output File Name attribute is not exported.
Click to apply the specified options on the selected pipelines, create the
necessary PCF files, and close the dialog box.
or
Click to apply the specified options on the selected pipelines, create the
necessary PCF files, and keep the dialog box open for further selections.
or
Click to cancel the action and close the dialog box.
Component Material Description (Spec-Driven)

The material description of each extracted Pro/PIPING component appears in the bill
of materials section of the isometric drawing. The material description in the PCF file
format requires an ITEM CODE and DESCRIPTION as shown below:
• MATERIALS
266
• ITEM-CODE data
• DESCRIPTION data (Single line Description)
• ITEM-CODE data
• DESCRIPTION data (Multiple line Description)
• DESCRIPTION data
Note:
• Pro/PIPING uses the STOCKNO (stock number) as the ITEM-CODE. The STOCKNO
uniquely identifies each Pro/PIPING component.
• The material description is retrieved from the Pipe Material Master Catalog
(MCAT) file.
Creating Pipe Component Information (Spec-Driven)

The coordinate information of pipe segments and other components is converted to
millimeters if the corresponding assembly uses metric units. If the corresponding
assembly uses imperial units, the coordinate information of pipe segments and other
components is converted to inches. Use the ISOGEN switches to display the units on
the isometric drawing during the isometric drawing generation. The nominal size
information is extracted from the Pro/PIPING component.
The ISOGEN component identifier and the information extracted is shown in the next
table.
PCF Identifier Description
BRANCH1-POINT Identifies branch points on various components. For

BRANCH2-POINT example, a typical record using millimeter (mm)
coordinates and an inch bore is as follows:
BRANCH1-POINT 125.0 25.0 0.0 6 BW
Note: The data string after the identifier BRANCH1-

POINT includes coordinates, a nominal size, and an
end type as expected by the PCF file format.
CENTRE-POINT Identifies the center point on various components.

For example, a typical record using millimeter (mm)
CENTRE-POINT 125.0 0.0 0.0
Note: The data string after the identifier CENTRE-

POINT includes coordinates.
267
END-POINT Identifies end points on various components. For

example, a record using millimeter (mm)
END-POINT 150.0 25.0 0.0 6BW
Note: The data string after the identifier END-

POINT includes coordinates, a nominal size, and an
endtype as expected by PCF file format.
SKEY Valid ISOGEN SKEY (Symbol Key). For example, a

record identifying SKEY is as follows:
SKEY VGBW
ITEM-CODE Unique identifier for each component. Pro/PIPING

component STOCKNO (stock number) is used as
ITEM-CODE. The ITEM-CODE and the description
are used to populate the bill of materials. For
example, a record identifying ITEM-CODE is as
follows:
ITEM-CODE GATVAA050
ANGLE Angle value if the angle is other than 90 or 180

degrees for ELBOW, BEND, OLET, TEE, CROSS, and
ELBOW-TEED type components. Angle values are in
hundredths of degrees. For example, a record
identifying an ANGLE of 60 degrees is as follows:
ANGLE 6000
SPINDLE- Direction of Spindle (Operator) on VALVE. Defines

DIRECTION primary direction only. Valid directions values are
NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, UP and DOWN. For
example, a record identifying SPINDLE-DIRECTION
is as follows:
SPINDLE-DIRECTION NORTH
FLAT-DIRECTION Direction of Flat side of Eccentric Reducers (ERED).

Defines primary direction only. Valid directions
values are NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, UP and
DOWN. For example, a record identifying FLAT-
DIRECTION is as follows:
FLAT-DIRECTION NORTH
DIRECTION Used to indicate VALVE Spindle direction and

Eccentric Reducer Flat direction that is in primary
plane. Value in a form Up 45 deg. North will be
268
shown as a graphical output in primary direction.

For example, a record identifying DIRECTION is as
follows:
Up 45 deg. North
Note: PCF identifiers BRANCH1-POINT, BRANCH2-POINT, CENTRE-POINT are specific

to components and are not applicable for pipe segments.
Example: ISOGEN Identifiers on a Component (Spec-Driven)

ISOGEN identifiers on a cross component are displayed in the next figure.
1 CENTRE-POINT
2 BRANCH1-POINT
3 END-POINT
4 BRANCH2-POINT
5 END-POINT
ISOGEN Attribute Map File (Spec-Driven)

The ISOGEN Attribute Map file maps a Pro/PIPING attribute or parameter to the
ISOGEN user-definable attributes. The configuration option
isogen_attribute_map_file sets the ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute file name.
The ISOGEN Attribute Map file format is displayed in the next table.
PROE_ATTRIBUTE Name of the attribute or parameter

in Pro/PIPING
ISOGEN_ATTRIBUTE The name of the ISOGEN user

definable attribute. It should be
one from ATTRIBUTEO ~
ATTRIBUTE99
269
Note: In ISOGEN, the position of the attribute ATTRIBUTE0~ATTRIBUTE99 is

specified in a TextPos file. You can use the TextPos file to turn a particular attribute
on or off on a pipe piece drawing, even if that attribute is available in a PCF file.
During pipe piece drawing generation, the bending data attributes are added into the
Pro/ENGINEER drawing as parameters with the same names automatically. The
attributes used in Pro/PIPING for bending data are displayed in the next table.
Attribute Name Description
START_FLANGE_TWIST_ANGLE Start flange twist angle
START_NODE_NUMBER Start node number of the pipe
START_FLANGE_ANGLE Flange angle, when bending starts

from the start node
START_BENDING_POINT_1 The first bending point, when

bending starts from the start node
START_BENDING_ANGLE_1 The first bending angle, when

START_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_1 The first bending rotation angle,

when bending starts from the start
node
START_BENDING_RADIUS_1 The first bending radius, when

START_BENDING_POINT_2 The second bending point, when

START_BENDING_ANGLE_2 The second bending angle, when

START_BENDING_RADIUS_2 The second bending radius, when

START_BENDING_POINT_3 The third bending point, when

START_BENDING_ANGLE_3 The third bending angle, when

START_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_3 The third bending rotation angle,

when bending starts from the start
node
START_BENDING_RADIUS_3 The third bending radius, when

END_FLANGE_TWIST_ANGLE End flange twist angle
270
Attribute Name Description
END_NODE_NUMBER The end node number of the pipe
END_FLANGE_ANGLE Flange angle, when bending starts

from the end node
END_BENDING_POINT_1 The first bending point, when

bending starts from the end node
END_BENDING_ANGLE_1 The first bending angle, when

END_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_1 The first bending rotation angle,

when bending starts from the end
node
END_BENDING_RADIUS_1 The first bending radius, when

END_BENDING_POINT_2 The second bending point, when

END_BENDING_ANGLE_2 The second bending angle, when

END_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_2 The second bending rotation angle,

node
END_BENDING_RADIUS_2 The second bending radius, when

END_BENDING_POINT_3 The third bending point, when

END_BENDING_ANGLE_3 The third bending angle, when

END_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_3 The third bending rotation angle,

node
END_BENDING_RADIUS_3 The third bending radius, when

PIPE_CUT_LENGTH The pipe cutting length
271
Example: ISOGEN Attribute Map File (Spec-Driven)

Default Path
<ProE load directory>/text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_attribute_map.ptd

If you want more than one set of bending data to be shown on a piece drawing, you
can add multiple entries for the same bending data attributes, which point to
different ISOGEN attributes.
Note: The number of bending data sets that can be shown on a piece drawing
depends on the number of ISOGEN user definable attributes supported by ISOGEN.
ISOGEN allows a maximum of 100 such attributes.
The modified ISOGEN Attribute Map file is as shown in the next table.
PROE_ATTRIBUTE ISOGEN_ATTRIBUTE Values for

spool
START_FLANGE_TWIST_ANGLE ATTRIBUTE10 0
START_NODE_NUMBER ATTRIBUTE11 1
START_FLANGE_ANGLE ATTRIBUTE12 0
START_BENDING_POINT_1 ATTRIBUTE13 1325
START_BENDING_ANGLE_1 ATTRIBUTE14 90
START_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_1 ATTRIBUTE15 180
START_BENDING_RADIUS_1 ATTRIBUTE16 560
START_BENDING_POINT_2 ATTRIBUTE17 1943.646
START_PIPE_CUT_LENGTH ATTRIBUTE21 4697.292
END_FLANGE_TWIST_ANGLE ATTRIBUTE22 0
END_NODE_NUMBER ATTRIBUTE23 2
END_FLANGE_ANGLE ATTRIBUTE24 0
END_BENDING_POINT_1 ATTRIBUTE25 535
END_BENDING_ANGLE_1 ATTRIBUTE26 90
END_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_1 ATTRIBUTE27 180
272

spool
END_BENDING_RADIUS_1 ATTRIBUTE28 560
END_BENDING_POINT_2 ATTRIBUTE29 1943.646
END_PIPE_CUT_LENGTH ATTRIBUTE33 4697.292
273

spool
START_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_1 ATTRIBUTE71 -90
274

spool
The first two columns in this table are a part of the isogen_attribute map.ptd file.
The last column shows typical values for a spool and is not a part of the
isogen_attribute map.ptd file, but is included for better clarity.
In the previous table isogen_attribute_map.ptd file, bending data of the spool can
be viewed in the following four parts:
• Attributes between 10 and 33 represent bending data for pipe bends that appear
between node number 1 ( a pipe start represented by Attribute 11) and node
number 2 (an entry point of reducer represented by Attribute 23)
between node number 3 (exit point of reducer represented by Attribute 35) and
node number 4 (an entry point of TEE fitting represented by Attribute 43)
between node number 5 (right exit of reducer represented by Attribute 51) and
node number 6 (right end of the pipe represented by Attribute 59)
between node number 7 (left exit of reducer represented by Attribute 67) and
node number 8 (left end of the pipe represented by Attribute 79)
Note: Use the isogen_attribute_map_file configuration option to access the

modified isogen_attribute map.ptd file present in your local directory.
275
ISOGEN Symbol Map File (Spec-Driven)

The ISOGEN Symbol Map file is a Pro/TABLE file that maps a Pro/PIPING fitting
generic name against a corresponding symbol key (SKEY) and the ISOGEN
component name. Pro/PIPING uses symbol keys for all fitting generic part sizes. You
can modify the ISOGEN Symbol Map file by using a text editor.
The ISOGEN Symbol Map file format is displayed in the next table.
FITTING_GENERIC_NAME Character Pro/PIPING fitting generic

name
ISOGEN_COMPONENT_NAME Character ISOGEN component name
ISOGEN_SKEY Character ISOGEN component

symbol key (SKEY)
ISOGEN_ITEM Character ISOGEN component

material item type.
It must be one of the

following or empty:
• ERECTION-ITEM
• FABRICATION-ITEM
• OFFSHORE-ITEM
Note: If no material item type is found for a fitting, Pro/PIPING checks all the end
types of the fitting ports. If any of the end type is welded (an end type that contains
'W' or 'w' character) or slip on (an end type that contains the 'SO' or 'so' string), the
FABRICATION-ITEM type is assigned to that fitting. Otherwise the ERECTION-ITEM
type is assigned.
Default Symbol Mapping

If you do not provide an ISOGEN Symbol Map file or if you do not list the entries for
the components used in the Pro/PIPING model in the Symbol Map file, Pro/PIPING
uses the following default mapping scheme. This scheme is internal to the interface
and based on the fitting code.
FITTING CODE ISOGEN COMPONENT ISOGEN SKEY

NAME
INLINE MISC-COMPONENT NC**
INLINE_REDUCING REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RC**
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC (if RE**

eccentric flag is set)
276
FITTING CODE ISOGEN COMPONENT ISOGEN SKEY

NAME
INLINE_JOINT COUPLING CO**
FLANGE FLANGE FL**
GASKET GASKET Not required
CORNER MISC-COMPONENT-ANGLE BA**
CORNER_REDUCING ELBOW-REDUCING ER**
CORNER_LET ELBOLET CE**
ELBOW ELBOW EL**
BRANCH TEE TE**
BRANCH_REDUCING TEE TE**
BRANCH_LET OLET NIPL
Note: The double asterisks (**) indicate ISOGEN endtypes. You can use these
characters or replace them with suitable endtypes allowed by ISOGEN. If you use the
asterisks, Pro/PIPING matches the fitting endtype in the model against the
corresponding ISOGEN endtypes and the ISOGEN endtypes replace the asterisks for
each fitting.
The disadvantage of using the double asterisks is that if the ISOGEN Endtype Map
file does not contain a mapped ISOGEN endtype, Pro/PIPING ignores the setting in
the ISOGEN Symbol Map and selects the default symbol key (SKEY).
Symbol Key Selection

Pro/PIPING extracts the symbol key (SKEY) from the ISOGEN Symbol Map file by
matching the generic name of the fitting with the name in the
FITTING_GENERIC_NAME column. Pro/PIPING extracts the symbol key name in the
ISOGEN_SKEY column and then the endtype string from the ISOGEN Endtype Map
file.
Symbol key selection occurs according to the following conditions:
• If the symbol key is only two characters long, Pro/PIPING appends the endtype
string to the symbol key to form the final SKEY used in the PCF file.
• If the symbol key has the double asterisks (**) as a substring and an endtype
string is found, the endtype string replaces the double asterisks in the symbol
key to form the final SKEY.
• If either of these cases fail, the default symbol key is used.
277
Example: ISOGEN Symbol Map File (Spec-Driven)

Default Path
<ProE load directory>/text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_symbol_map.ptd
FITTING_GENERIC_ ISOGEN_COMPONENT_ ISOGEN_SKEY ISOGEN_ITEM

NAME NAME
vl_gate_flrf VALVE VGFL ERECTION-

ITEM
vl_swing_check_fl VALVE VSFL ERECTION-

rf ITEM
vl_angle_flff VALVE-ANGLE AVFL ERECTION-

ITEM
flange_neck_rf FLANGE FLFL FABRICATION-

ITEM
elbow_90long_bw_s ELBOW ELBW FABRICATION-

teel ITEM
elbow_45long_bw_s ELBOW ELBW FABRICATION-

teel ITEM
tee_reducing_bw_s TEE TEBW FABRICATION-

teel ITEM
tee_straight_bw_s TEE TEBW FABRICATION-

teel ITEM
red_concentric_bw REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RCBW FABRICATION-

_steel ITEM
red_eccentric_bw REDUCER-ECCENTRIC REBW FABRICATION-

ITEM
ISOGEN Endtype Map File (Spec-Driven)

The ISOGEN Endtype Map file is a Pro/TABLE file that maps Pro/PIPING end types to
corresponding ISOGEN end types. You can modify the ISOGEN Endtype Map file by
using a text editor.
278
The ISOGEN Endtype Map file format is displayed in the next table.
ENDTYPE Character Pro/PIPING end type
ISOGEN_ENDTYPE Character ISOGEN end type
Default End Type Mapping

If you do not provide an ISOGEN Endtype Map file or if you do not list the entries for
the end types used by the Pro/PIPING fitting components in the Endtype Map file,
Pro/PIPING maps the end types by default.
The string matching rules for default end type mapping is listed in the next table.
ENDTYPE ISOGEN ENDTYPE
endtype string starting with B BW
endtype string starting with C CP
endtype string starting with F FL
endtype string starting with P PL
endtype string starting with SC SC
endtype string starting with SW SW
No match found BW
Note: The default mapping is internal to the interface.
Example: ISOGEN Endtype Map File (Spec-Driven)

Default Path
<ProE load directory>/text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_endtype_map.ptd
ENDTYPE ISOGEN_ENDTYPE
PE PL
FLFF FL
GKFF FL
FLRF FL
SWLD SW
279
ENDTYPE ISOGEN_ENDTYPE
BWLD BW
ISOGEN Nominal Size Map File (Spec-Driven)

The ISOGEN Nominal Size Map file is a Pro/TABLE file that maps the Pro/PIPING sizes
used for modeling to the industry standard nominal size or nominal bore (NB).
Nominal bore can be measured in millimeters (mm) or inches.
Pro/PIPING extracts the component size and its units from the model using the
following conditions:
• If the units are metric, UNITS-BORE is selected as MM.
• If the units are in inches, UNITS-BORE is selected as INCH.
Pro/PIPING matches the extracted size against the nominal size in either the NB_MM
or NB_INCH column. The nominal size must correspond to the model size in the SIZE
column.
You can modify the ISOGEN Nominal Size Map file by using a text editor. The
ISOGEN Nominal Size Map file format is displayed in the next table.
SIZE Character Pro/PIPING Size String
NB_MM Character Nominal Bore (NB) Value
NB_INCH Character Nominal Bore (NB) Value
Note:
• Pro/PIPING allows you to specify any character as a nominal size. However, the
ISOGEN PCF file format expects a number as the pipe nominal size.
• For Nominal Bore (NB) values, use only the numbers 0-9, the period (.), or the
slash (/).
• For NB values in millimeters, only integers can be entered.
• For NB values in inches, you can use fractions (For example, 1-1/2 for a one and
one half inch bore).
• NB values cannot include white spaces.
• For NB values, the symbol (") used normally for inches cannot be used.
280
Default Nominal Size Mapping

If you do not list a size in the SIZE column or if you do not define the nominal size in
the selected NB column, Pro/PIPING outputs the model size to the PCF file by default
where NB is needed. If a nominal size map file does not exist, the same result
occurs.
Note: An invalid nominal size may result from a wrong isometric size annotation or
from an ISOGEN PCF file export malfunction.
Example: ISOGEN Nominal Size Map File (Spec-Driven)

Default Path
<ProE load
directory>/text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_nominal_size_map.ptd
SIZE NB_INCH NB_MM
10A ¼ 10
15A ½ 15
20A ¾ 20
25A 1 25
32A 1-1/4 32
40A 1-1/2 40
50A 2 50
65A 2-1/2 65
80A 3 80
100A 4 100
125A 5 125
150A 6 150
200A 8 200
250A 10 250
300A 12 300
350A 14 350
400A 16 400
281
SIZE NB_INCH NB_MM
450A 18 450
500A 20 500
550A 22 550
600A 24 600
650A 26 650
700A 28 700
750A 30 750
800A 32 800
850A 34 850
900A 36 900
1000A 40 1000
1050A 42 1050
1100A 44 1100
1150A 46 1150
1200A 48 1200
1250A 50 1250
1300A 52 1300
1350A 54 1350
1400A 56 1400
1450A 58 1450
1500A 60 1500
1600A 64 1600
1700A 68 1700
1800A 72 1800
1900A 76 1900
2000A 80 2000
282
SIZE NB_INCH NB_MM
2100A 84 2100
2200A 88 2200
2300A 92 2300
2400A 96 2400
2500A 100 2500
2600A 104 2600
¼" ¼ 10
½" ½ 15
¾" ¾ 20
1" 1 25
1-1/4" 1-1/4 32
1-1/2" 1-1/2 40
2" 2 50
2-1/2" 2-1/2 65
3" 3 80
4" 4 100
5" 5 125
6" 6 150
8" 8 200
10" 10 250
12" 12 300
14" 14 350
16" 16 400
18" 18 450
20" 20 500
22" 22 550
283
SIZE NB_INCH NB_MM
24" 24 600
26" 26 650
28" 28 700
30" 30 750
32" 32 800
34" 34 850
36" 36 900
40" 40 1000
42" 42 1050
44" 44 1100
46" 46 1150
48" 48 1200
50" 50 1250
52" 52 1300
54" 54 1350
56" 56 1400
58" 58 1450
60" 60 1500
64" 64 1600
68" 68 1700
72" 72 1800
76" 76 1900
80" 80 2000
84" 84 2100
88" 88 2200
92" 92 2300
284
SIZE NB_INCH NB_MM
96" 96 2400
100" 100 2500
104" 104 2600
ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File (Spec-Driven)

The ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute file contains attributes that correspond to the
ISOGEN mandatory attributes listed in ISOGEN-FILES. The configuration option
isogen_mandatory_attr_file sets the ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File name. The
default is isogen.fls. You can use the default file provided by the ISOGEN package
or create a file.
Example: ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File (Spec-Driven)

Default Path
<ProE load directory>/text/piping_data/isodata/isogen.fls
Attributes Directory Path
PLOT FILE-PREFIX C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\OUTPUT\PLOT
OPTION- C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.OPL
SWITCHES-LONG
MESSAGE C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\OUTPUT\SPOOLS.MES
DRAWING-FRAME C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.DXF
DRAWING- C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.DDF
DEFINITION
ALTERNATIVE- C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.ALT
TEXT
POSITIONED-TEXT C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.POS
WELDING- C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.WDF
DEFINITION
MATERIAL-LIST- C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.MLD
DEFINITION
285
ISOGEN Error Log File (Spec-Driven)

If Pro/PIPING encounters errors while processing pipelines during isometric drawing
generation, Pro/PIPING creates a log file named isointf.err. The error log file
contains a collection of error logs from multiple sessions. The
isogen_output_files_dir configuration option sets the directory in which
Pro/PIPING stores this log file.
Pro/PIPING creates the following two types of error log entries:
• Errors—Identifies problem pipeline segments, components, and fittings that
caused the errors. Pro/PIPING highlights these items and displays them in the
Pro/ENGINEER graphics window. To restore these components to their original
color, use the Repaint command in Pro/ENGINEER (View > Repaint).
• Warnings—Identifies issues that occur due to processing errors.
Example: ISOGEN Error Log File (Spec-Driven)
Date : 25-4-2000
ERROR LOG file for **ISOMETRIC DRAWING GENERATION INTERFACE**
ERROR : Processing Fitting TEE_RED_BW-STEEL-65X50 in Pipeline 65A-SPEC-
STEAM-1.
WARNING : Material Description not found for 3 item(s) in Pipeline 65A-
SPEC-STEAM-1.
ERRORS : ISOGEN may fail to process intermediate output PCF files.
REPAINT to restore Highlighted components in case of error.
WARNINGS : ISOGEN may not fail to process but some of the desirable
data may be missing.
This file may be appended with errors occurring in future sessions.
Installation Drawing Generation
About Installation Drawing Generation

A piping installation drawing shows different views of a piping model with dimensions
and various annotations. All the hidden lines are removed in the installation drawing.
Installation drawing is used to guide the piping installation work.
Pro/PIPING allows you to automatically display all pipe segments in the installation
drawing using a single line or double-line representation. You can insert a pipe slope
symbol on the pipe segments to display the slope of pipe segments in the installation
drawing.
286
Example: Piping Installation Drawing
To Specify Display Style for Pipe Segments

1. Click File > Open and select the drawing to be activated.
2. Click Applications > Piping.
287
3. Click View > Pipeline Display > Style from the top menu bar. The Display
Style dialog box opens.
4. Under Select View, click one of the following options to select views from the
drawing:
o View—Selects a view or multiple views from the drawing.
o Sheet—Selects all views from the current drawing sheet.
o All Sheets—Selects all views from all drawing sheets.
The names of the selected views are displayed in the selection list.
5. Under Select Style, click one of the following options to specify the style for
displaying pipe segments in the drawing:
o Single Line—Displays pipe segments in single-line representation.
o Double Line—Displays pipe segments in double-line representation.
Note: To display a pipe in double-line representation, its solid

representation must be present in the pipeline assembly.
o Double Line Above—Displays pipelines of different sizes in different

display styles. Type a value for the pipe size in the adjacent field.
Note: Pro/PIPING displays all pipelines with a size greater than the specified size
in double line representation and all pipelines with a size smaller than or equal to
the specified size in single line representation.
6. Click to display the pipelines in the selected views in the specified style and
close the dialog box.
or
Click to display the pipelines in the selected views in the specified style and
keep the dialog box open for further selections.
or
Pipe Display Style

You can display pipelines in the selected views in single-line representation or
double-line representation. You can also display all pipelines with a size greater than
the specified size in double-line representation and all pipelines with a size smaller
than or equal to the specified size in single-line representation.
288
All the pipe segments of a pipeline, irrespective of their sizes, displayed in single-line
representation are shown in the next figure.
All the pipe segments of a pipeline, irrespective of their sizes, displayed in double-
line representation are shown in the next figure.
289
Pipe segments of a size larger than the specified size in double-line representation
and all the other pipe segments in single-line representation are shown in the next
figure.
To Select a Slope Symbol for Pipe Segments

1. Click File > Open and select a drawing.
3. Click Insert > Piping Symbol > Slope from the top menu bar. The Slope Mark
dialog box opens.
4. Under Select View, click one of the following to select views from the drawing:
o View—Selects a view or multiple views from the drawing. Click and

select a view or multiple views from the drawing using the SELECT menu.
o Sheet—Selects all views from the current sheet.
o All Sheets—Selects all views from all sheets.
The names of the selected views are displayed in the selection list.
5. Under Select Symbol, use one of the following methods to select a symbol for
displaying the slope of pipe segments in the drawing:
o Select a symbol from the adjacent selection list. All symbols in the current
drawing are displayed in the list.
You can also type a symbol name in the adjacent field. Before loading the
specified symbol, Pro/PIPING searches the directories in the following order:
o The current working directory
290
o The path specified using the search_path configuration option
o The symbols directory under the project data directory specified using the
piping_project_data_dir configuration option
o Click to browse the directory specified by the pro_symbol_dir

configuration option, and select a symbol.
Note: The default symbol for pipe slope, slope.sym, is located in the
$PTCSRC/text/piping_data/sample_project/symbols directory.
6. Under Select Symbol Parameter, specify the parameters for the selected
symbol.
o Click Symbol Height to specify the height of the pipe slope symbol on the
drawing. Enter a value in the adjacent field. The unit for this value is the
active drawing unit.
Note: If you do not specify the height for the slope symbol, Pro/PIPING
considers the height to be equal to the outer diameter of the pipe.
o Click Interval between Symbols to specify the distance between two

consecutive pipe slope symbols. Enter a value in the adjacent field. The unit
for this value is the active drawing unit.
Note: The default value is 5 mm or its equivalent in the active drawing

units.
7. Click to display the pipelines in the selected views in the specified style and
close the dialog box.
or
Click to display the pipelines in the selected views in the specified style and
keep the dialog box open for further selections.
or
Pipe Slope Symbol

Pro/PIPING allows you to display the slope of pipelines in each view of the piping
installation drawing using a slope symbol mark.
If a pipe segment is not parallel to the selected view, the slope of the pipeline cannot
be shown in the selected view of the drawing. To display the slope of a pipeline, a set
of slope symbols are placed along the pipe segment. The direction of the symbols
indicates the slope direction.
291
Front View of the Pipeline
Top View of the Pipeline
1 Slope direction
2 Slope symbol
3 Pipe slope symbol interval
The pipe slope symbol is created as a Pro/DETAIL drawing symbol. When the location
of the pipe segment on the drawing changes, the pipe slope symbol also changes its
location.
If you change the outer diameter of the pipe segment in the model, use Regenerate
> Draft to update the diameter of the pipe slope symbol.
To Annotate Installation Drawing

1. Click File > Open to open the drawing to be annotated.
3. Click Insert > Annotations. The Annotate Attr/Params dialog box opens.
292
4. Click one of the following options:
Select Spec File—Select an Attribute and Parameter Specification file to access

the list of valid object types that can be selected for annotation. The system
selects the ship_dwg_anno_attrparam_spec.ptd file by default.
Note: To use a customized Attribute and Parameters Specification file, the

following entry must exist in your config.pro file:
ship_dwg_anno_attrparam_spec_file spec.ptd
where spec.ptd is the customized Attribute and Parameters Specification file.
Or, use to browse the directory for selecting the Attribute and Parameter
Specification file. This new file is used instead of the file specified by the
configuration option. The new file is valid till you exit the Annotate
Attr/Params dialog box.
Select Object Type—Select the type of objects to be selected from the drawing
from the adjacent list. This list comprises objects specified in the
USER_OBJECT_TYPE column of the Attribute and Parameter Specification file.
The list also includes object types Part and Feature. Use these object types to
select any standard part or feature from the drawing.
Select Objects—Select an object, feature, feature geometry, or part from the

drawing. You can select only the type of object specified in the Select Object
Type. You can select single or multiple objects but only of the specified type. To
select objects:
o Click to select the objects to be annotated directly from the drawing.
o Click to select one or more views in the drawing. All objects of the
specified type are selected and annotated in the selected views.
o Click to automatically select all views in the current sheet. All objects
of the specified object type are selected and annotated in all views.
Select Attributes—All the attributes and parameters specific to the selected

object type are displayed in the list. This list comprises the ATTRPARAM_NAME
entries for the selected object type specified in the Attribute and Parameters
Specification file. All attributes specific to the selected object are displayed, as
listed in the specification file. All parameters are sorted in alphabetical order and
are displayed below the attributes in the Select Attributes list.
The following options are used to filter, select, or deselect items in the list:
o —Displays only those attributes and parameters that are listed in the
ATTRPARAM_NAME column for the selected object type in the Attribute and
Parameter Specification file.
293
o —Displays all attributes and parameters of the selected object. The list
displays all the attributes and parameters, even if they are not specified in
the Attribute and Parameter Specification file.
o —Displays only attributes that are listed in the ATTRPARAM_NAME

column for the selected object type in the Attribute and Parameter
Specification file. The list does not display the parameters of the object,
even if they are specified in the Attribute and Parameter Specification file.
o —Selects all the items. All the items in the list are highlighted for the
insertion of a note in the drawing.
o —Deselects all the items. The items that were highlighted earlier are
no longer highlighted.
If multiple objects in a drawing are selected, Pro/PIPING lists only the attributes
and parameters that are specific to the object that you first selected.
Note: The values of these selected attributes and parameters are inserted at the
specified location in the drawing.
Select Note Option—Use the following options to control the format and
location of the note in the drawing:
o Derive note location—Allows the system to determine the location of the

note based on the position of the object in the drawing.
o Create multiple notes—Inserts separate notes for each of the attributes

and parameters selected in the list. Each attribute and parameter is
displayed as a separate note in a row. If required, you can relocate all these
notes separately. If you do not select this option, a single note with multiple
rows is created. You can move these rows together.
o Create leader line—Creates the notes with a leader line. For multiple
notes, separate leader lines are created for each note. The end of the
leader line is displayed with an arrow. Place this arrow on the selected
object that is to be annotated.
o Note angle—Specifies the text angle for the note to be inserted. All the
used angles are listed in the adjacent option list. This option overrides any
angle specified for style in the Attribute and Parameter Specification file. If
you do not select this option, notes are created aligned to the selected
object.
o Note style—Specifies the style for the notes to be inserted in the drawing.
All the styles available in the current drawing are listed in the adjacent list.
The style that you specify using this option overrides the style defined in
the Attribute and Parameters specification file. The first item in the list is
User Specified style and displays the style specified in the Attribute and
Parameters Specification file for inserting the note.
294
5. Click to insert the notes.
or
Click to insert notes with current selections without closing the Annotate
Attr/Params dialog box. You can select a different object or different items from
the Select Attributes list for the currently selected object. When you select a
different object of the same type, the items selected in the Select Attributes list
remain highlighted if the attributes and parameters are valid for the new object.
Note: If the value of any attribute or parameter changes after insertion into the
drawing, the drawing does not automatically update with the new value. Edit the
existing note or insert it again.
Attribute and Parameter Specification File

The Attribute and Parameter Specification file lists the attributes and parameters
valid for the user-definable objects. It also defines the format, style, and layer for
inserting the values of these attributes and parameters as notes in the drawing.
The default Attribute and Parameter Specification file name is
ship_dwg_anno_attrparam_spec.ptd. The default file is available at
<proe_load_point>/text/ship_data. Pro/ENGINEER applications read this file while
launching the Annotate Attr/Params dialog box.
Use the Pro/TABLE tool to view and edit this file outside Pro/ENGINEER. Set the
following option in your config.pro file to use a customized Attribute and Parameter
Specification file:
ship_dwg_anno_attrpar_spec_file spec.ptd
where spec.ptd is the customized Attribute and Parameter Specification file.
Any change in the Attribute and Parameter Specification file does not trigger an
automatic regeneration of the drawing.
This file has a tabular format and consists of the following columns:
• USER_OBJECT_TYPE
• ATTRPARAM_NAME
• FACTOR
• FORMAT
• STYLE
• LAYER
User Object Type

The first column specifies the types of user-definable objects to be annotated in the
drawing. All the types of objects specified in this column are displayed in the options
list for the Select Object Type option in the Annotate Attr/Params dialog box.
295
Attribute and Parameter Names

The second column specifies the attribute and parameters valid for the corresponding
object type specified in the first column. You can specify a number of attributes and
parameters for a single object type. Specify each attribute and parameter in a
separate row in Pro/TABLE. You can repeat the parameters or attributes for a set of
valid object types. All the attributes and parameters valid for the selected type of
object are displayed in the options list for the Select Attributes option in the
Annotate Attr/Params dialog box.
The attributes and parameters valid for the corresponding object types are specified
in the next table.
Object Name Attribute Name Description
PIPELINE LABEL
SPOOL LABEL
Fillet_Weld, Butt_Weld WELD_CODE String—Weld code
Fillet_Weld, Butt_Weld WELD_CONNECT_TYPE String—Weld

connect type
Factor
The third column specifies the multiplication factor. This is valid only for the
attributes or parameters with double or integer types. The attribute and parameter
value is multiplied by the given factor before being displayed in the specified format
on the drawing. By default, the multiplication factor is 1. It is useful for the
conversion of units, that is, to display units in millimeters when the model unit is in
meters.
Format
The fourth column specifies the format for the notes for displaying the attribute and
the parameter values in the drawing. The format string consists of two parts,
ordinary characters and the conversion specification.
• Ordinary characters are displayed in the drawing notes as specified.
• The conversion specification is replaced with the actual value of the attribute and
the parameter before being displayed in the drawing notes.
296
Each conversion specification begins with a % and ends with a conversion

character. Include the following characters in the given sequence between the %
and the conversion character:
Use the following flags to modify the formatting of the notes:
o A minus sign (-) to specify the left alignment of the value in its field.
o A plus sign (+) to specify that the value is displayed with a sign.
o A space ( ) to prefix the value with a space in the absence of any sign.
o Zero (0) for numeric conversion. It assigns leading zeroes as padding for
the field width.
o A hash mark (#) to specify an alternative output form. Alternative form

changes the behavior of conversion characters. For example, the following
table gives different meanings of %G and %#G for the same value.
Value Conversion Factor = Conversion Factor =

%G %#G
0.00000000123 1.23E-09 1.23000E-09
1.0 1 1.00000
• A number to specify the minimum field width. The converted value is displayed in
the field with the specified minimum width, or if required, in a field wider than
the specified minimum width. If the converted value has fewer characters than
the specified minimum field width, trailing or leading spaces are added to the
field. If you have specified the zero flag, trailing or leading zeros are used.
• A period to separate the field width from the precision number.
• A number to specify the precision. For example:
o The number of characters to be displayed from a string.
o The number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point of a double

value.
o The minimum number of digits to be displayed for an integer.
The conversion characters for strings, integers, and double values are shown in the
next table.
Character Value Type Display Format
d, i Integer Decimal number.
s String Displays characters from the string till the end or

the number of characters given by precision.
f Double [-]m.dddddd, where the number of ds depends on

the specified precision. By default, six digits are
297
Character Value Type Display Format
specified after the decimal point.
e Double [-]m.dddddde+xx or [-]m. dddddde-xx, where the

number of ds depends on the specified precision.
By default, six digits are specified after the decimal
point.
E Double [-]m.ddddddE+xx or [-]m.ddddddE-xx, where the

number of ds depends on the specified precision.
By default, six digits are specified after the decimal
point.
g, G Double Use %e or %E if the exponent is less than -4 or

greater than or equal to precision. Otherwise, the
system uses %f. Trailing decimal point and trailing
zeros are not displayed.
% No value Displays %.
Style
The fifth column specifies the default style of the note to be used for the
corresponding parameter or attribute. The specified style must be available in the
current drawing.
Layer
The sixth column specifies the default layer to be used for displaying the note
created for the corresponding parameter or attribute. If the specified layer is not
available, a new layer is created.
Example: Attribute and Parameter Specification File

USER_OBJECT_TYPE ATTRPARAM_NAME FACTOR FORMAT STYLE LAYER
Pipeline LABEL
Spool LABEL
Fitting VALVENUMBER
AEC Object Type File

The Architecture, Engineering and Construction (AEC) Object Type file lists the user-
definable object types and their correspondent AEC object types. These user-
definable object types are displayed in the options lists of Select Object Type in the
Annotate Attr/Params dialog box.
298
The default AEC Object Type file name is aec_object_type.ptd, and it is available
at <proe_load_point>/text/ship_data.
Use the Pro/TABLE tool to view and edit this file outside Pro/ENGINEER. Set the
following option in your config.pro file to use a customized AEC Object Type file:
aec_object_type_file <customized_aec_object_type>.ptd
This file has a tabular format and consists of the following two columns:
• USER_OBJECT_TYPE
• AEC_OBJECT_TYPE
User Object Type

The first column specifies the type of object specified by the user.
AEC Object Type

The second column specifies the AEC object type for the corresponding object
specified in the first column.
The list also includes object types Part and Feature. Use these object types to select
any standard part or feature from the drawing.
Example: AEC Object Type File

USER_OBJECT_TYPE AEC_OBJECT_TYPE
Pipeline PIPELINE
Spool SPOOL
Fitting FITTING
Pipe PIPE
The attributes and parameters valid for the corresponding object types are specified
in the next table.
AEC Object Type Attribute Name Description
PIPELINE Label
SPOOL Label
FITTING Label
PIPE Label
299
Pipe Spool Drawing Generation
About Pipe Spool Drawing Generation

The pipe spool drawings are generated using the ISOGEN interface. The ISOGEN
interface uses an intermediate .pcf (Piping Component file) file and Data Control
files to generate the pipe spool drawings in various standard data formats.
Note:
• You must first set the ISOGEN configuration options to use the ISOGEN interface
generation tool.
• The isogen_pcf_filename_format configuration option when set to SPOOLNUM

controls the name format of the .pcf files that are generated after you create
spool drawings. If a filename has more than one spool and you select a pipeline
for generating the spool drawing, SPOOLNUM allots the spool numbers in the
ascending order.
A pipeline is split into several small pieces called pipe pieces or spools. The pipe
spool (or piece) drawing provides detailed information for fabrication.
The pipe spool drawings are divided into three major areas: graphics area, bill of
material area, and title block area. The pipe piece drawings generated are:
• Not to scale
• Automatically dimensioned (associative)
• With item numbering
• With material description
• With pipe bending data
• With a list of pipe pieces
300
Process Flow of Pipe Spool drawing Generation
You can use the following process for pipe spool drawing generation with
Pro/ENGINEER and ISOGEN.
Using Pro/ENGINEER
Use Pro/ENGINEER for generating the .pcf (Piping Component File) format using the
following process. The .pcf files are provided as an input for ISOGEN for generating
the spool drawing files in .dxf format.
Data Mapping Files

Prepare the necessary data mapping files. These are .ptd files that you can view or
edit using the Pro/TABLE tool. These files are used to map the definition used in
Pro/PIPING to their equivalent in ISOGEN, for example, ISOGEN Symbol Map file,
ISOGEN Nominal Size Map file.
Pro/PIPING Model
Activate the assembly that has a pipe piece. Generate spools for the pipelines that
have not been spooled.
301
Spool Information Extraction Program

Extract the spool information of the selected pipeline and write it into the .pcf file.
PCF files contain material and geometrical data from a Pro/PIPING model in a
readable ISOGEN .pcf (Piping Component File) format. This format serves as an
input to ISOGEN for creating pipeline isometric drawings.
Using ISOGEN
Data Control Files

Prepare the necessary data control files. These are text files with an ISOGEN-
specified extension that are used to control generation of pipe spool drawing using
ISOGEN. You can control what is displayed in the pipe spool drawing and how that
should be displayed using these files. Refer to the ISOGEN documentation for their
details.
Spool Drawing Generation Program

Load the .pcf files generated by Pro/PIPING into ISOGEN and run ISOGEN to
generate pipe piece drawings in .dxf format. Multiple .pcf files can be processed by
ISOGEN in a single execution.
You can open the .dxf format in Pro/DETAIL or use any other CAD package that
supports .dxf files for further editing and plotting.
Pro/DETAIL Drawing
Activate a Pro/DETAIL drawing and import a .dxf file generated by ISOGEN into
Pro/DETAIL. If required, additional annotation or modification on the drawing can be
done using the functionality provided in Pro/DETAIL. Subsequently, you can send the
drawing to plot. Pro/BATCH provides functionality to plot these drawings in batch
mode.
ISOGEN Data Control Files
About ISOGEN Data Control Files

ISOGEN uses a set of data control files to control pipe spool drawing generation.
These files are text files with predefined extensions.
• Option Switches file
• Alternative Text file
• Position Text file
• Drawing Definition file
• Drawing Frame file
302
• ISOGEN file
Option Switches File

The Option Switches file contains all the option switches definitions required for pipe
spool drawing generation. Option Switches files have a .OPL extension. Some option
switches are listed in the following table.
Option Switch Note
O.S. 2 CUT PIECE NUMBERING/LIST Controls the cut piece list

TYPE generation and the corresponding
cut piece Identifiers.
O.S. 5 CO-ORDINATES – Selectively suppresses the spool

CONNECTION/CONNECTIVITY end coordinate information.
O.S. 12 DRAWING MARGIN - TOP Controls the top margin of the

graphics area.
O.S. 13 DRAWING MARGIN - Controls the bottom margin of the

BOTTOM graphics area.
O.S. 15 DRAWING SIZE – HEIGHT Controls the drawing height.
O.S. 16 DRAWING SIZE - WIDTH Controls the drawing width.
303
Option Switch Note
O.S. 24 MATERIAL LIST – Controls the length units used in

PIPELINE/DRAWING/PIPE LENGTH the BOM.
UNITS
O.S. 38 PIPELINE SPLITTING – Controls the automatic pipeline

AUTOMATIC splitting.
O.S. 41 BORE/DIMENSION/WEIGHT Controls the dimension format.

CONTROL
O.S. 66 CO-ORDINATES - Controls the elevation annotation.

SUPPLEMENTARY
O.S. 71 PLOTFILE FORMAT Controls the output drawing

format.
Alternative Text File

The Alternative Text file is used to control the replacement of the selected ISOGEN
standard text string. You can also turn on or off, the selected ISOGEN standard text
string from the drawing. Alternative Text files have a .ALT extension. Some standard
text strings related to pipe spool drawing are listed in the following table.
Identification Number Note
-207 Turns nominal diameter on or off
304
Identification Number Note
-208 Turns CONN. TO on or off
Position Text File

This Position Text file is used to control the ISOGEN parameters. Position Text files
have a .POS extension. Some parameters related to pipe spool drawing are listed in
the following table.
Parameter ID Number Note
-700 Sets location to x0y0 to turn off the

north arrow
Drawing Definition File

This Drawing Definition file is used to control the appearance of isometric drawings.
Drawing Definition files have a .DDF extension. Some features related to pipe spool
drawing are listed in the following table.
Feature Note
BEND/ELBOW-REPRESENTATION Sets the representation of bend and

elbow to sharp corner or round corner.
BEND ROUND/SQUARE
ELBOW SQUARE/ROUND
Drawing Frame File

A Drawing Frame file has a .DXF extension. You can define your own Drawing Frame
file. To create a Drawing Frame file, export a Pro/ENGINEER drawing or template
drawing into DXF format.
ISOGEN File
An ISOGEN file specifies the part name of each ISOGEN Data Control file used. All
ISOGEN files have the .FLS extension. You can customize the layout of a pipe piece
drawing and the contents displayed on it using the ISOGEN Data Control files.
305
Displaying Bending Data
About Bending Data

In Pro/PIPING, you can use bending data to indicate how a pipe must bend. Bending
data is exported to a .pcf file when a spool drawing is generated. The number of
digits in the bend information can be controlled using the default_dec_places
configuration option. The default value is 2.
The types of bending data used are:
• Node number
• Bending angle
• Bending radius
• Bending rotation angle
• Flange angle
• Flange twist angle
• Pipe cutting length
About the Node Number

Node numbers are displayed temporarily in the graphics window after you generate a
spool drawing.
The node numbers as displayed in the graphics window are shown in the next figure.
306
In the above figure the numbers 1 to 8 represent node numbers. Node numbers 2
and 3 are assigned to the either sides of a reducer. Node numbers 4, 7, and 5 are
assigned to each end of a TEE fitting. Node numbers 1, 6, and 8 are assigned to pipe
ends.
Refer to the example on the ISOGEN Attribute Map file for details on how you can
modify the isogen_attribute map_file.ptd file to generate the bending data for
the figure above.
About the Bending Point

Bending point is the point where the bending starts. The distance between two
bending points or the distance between a bending point and a pipe end represents
the bending point.
Theoretical bending point—The bending point that is derived directly from a pipe
3D model as shown in the following figure.
307
1 First bending point
2 Second bending point
a(n) Bending angle
b(n) Bending length
l(n) Bending point location
r(n) Bending radius
308
When flanges are welded to the pipe before bending, the flange faces are the
bending start and end points as shown in the following figure:
1 Bending end
2 Second bending point
3 First bending point
4 Bending start
Real bending point—If the bending point moves away from the theoretical location,
you must mark the real bending point on the pipe before the actual bending.
The bending points move away from their theoretical locations during the bending
process due to the following:
• Bending spring back
• Bending elongation
309
About Bending Spring Back

After the bending operation, the elasticity of the pipe material causes the bending to
spring back. To compensate for the spring back, you must increase the bending
angle and move the bending point forward. When the pipe is released from the
bending machine, the bending angle and the bending point spring back to the
theoretical value as shown in the following figure:
1 Bending direction
2 Bending point
3 Real bending point
a(n) Bending Angle
A(n) Real bending angle
L(n) Real bending point location
S(n) Spring back
310
Note: Only the theoretical bending angle is shown on a pipe piece drawing.
About Bending Elongation

The real straight pipe length is generally shorter than its theoretical length. The
theoretical length of the pipe is the same as the bend arc length in the 3D model.
The difference between the real straight pipe length and the theoretical straight pipe
length is the bending elongation as shown in the following figure.
1 Bending direction
2 Elongation
b(n) Bending length
B(n) Real bending length
E(n) Bending elongation
You can calculate the real bending point for the bend of a pipe using the following
formula:
L(n) = S(n-1) + l(n) - E(n-1) - S(n)
Where,
o L(n)—The real bending point for the (n) bend
o S(n-1)—The bending spring back for the (n-1) bend
311
o l(n)—The theoretical bending point for the (n) bend
o E(n-1)—The bending elongation for the (n-1) bend
o S(n)—The bending spring back for the (n) bend
About Pipe Cutting Length

The real bending points for the example shown in the following figure are:
L1 = 0.0 + l1 - 0.0 - S1
L2 = S1 + l2 - E1 - S2
L3 = S2 + l3 - E2 -0.0
b(n) Bending length
B(n) Real bending length
L(n) Real Bending Point Location
S(n) Spring back
E(n) Bending elongation
l Pipe length
L Pipe cutting length
312
Where, l is the theoretical pipe length derived directly from the 3D model and L is
the real pipe length after considering the elongation caused by the bending process.
Pipe cutting length or real pipe length is the straight pipe length before the actual
bending. You can calculate the pipe cutting length using the following formula:
L = L1 + L2 + L3 + ... + L(n-1) + L(n)
Where,
L—The pipe cutting length
L1 ~ L(n)—The real bending points
About the Bending Angle

Bending angle is the rotation angle required to obtain the correct bend shape. A
bending angle is as shown in the following figure:
1 Bending angle
2 Bending direction
About the Bend Radius

Bend radius is the radius of the bend centerline. An example of a bend radius is
shown in the following figure.
313
1 Bend radius
2 Bend direction
About Bending Rotation Angle

If the bending direction of a bend is different from the previous bend, the pipe piece
must be rotated at a certain angle before bending to obtain the right bending
direction. This angle at which you rotate the pipe piece is called the bending rotation
angle. The bending rotation angle is shown in the following figure.
1 Pipe piece rotation by 180 degrees before the second bending
2 Bending direction
314
About the Flange Angle

Flanges are welded onto a pipe before bending. The pipe must be rotated through an
angle before bending so that after bending, the flange bolt holes are at the correct
position.
The installation position of a pipe with a flange welded at one of its ends is shown in
the following figure. The z-axis and the black segment form the flange base plane.
The black and blue segments of the pipe form the bending plane. The remainder of
the angle between the flange base plane and the bending plane divided by the angle
between the flange holes is the flange angle.
1 Flange angle
2 Flange base plane
3 Bending plane
If the black segment is along the z-axis, then the flange base plane is formed by the
y-axis and the black segment.
The next figure shows a flange welded onto the straight pipe.
1 Flange baseline
After welding the flange onto the pipe, you must load the pipe on the bending
machine. When you load the pipe on the bending machine, first align the flange base
plane with the bending plane, then rotate the flange with the given flange angle.
Standing in front of the bending machine, looking into the pipe when the rotation is
in the clockwise direction, the value of the flange angle is negative. When the
rotation is in the counterclockwise direction, the value of the flange angle is positive.
315
1 Bending plane
2 Looking into the bending machine
3 Flange base plane
4 Flange angle
5 Before flange angle rotation
6 After flange angle rotation
7 Bending plane
8 Flange angle
Note: The flange base plane aligns with the z-axis when you put the pipe at its
installation position.
316
The pipe is ready for the first bending after the flange angle rotation. The first
bending is shown in the next figure.
1 Bending plane
2 Flange angle
3 Flange angle
About the Flange Twist Angle

If a pipe has flanges at both ends, weld the end flange to the straight pipe while
rotating at an angle relative to the start flange before bending. This angle is the
flange twist angle. Rotate the pipe at the flange twist angle so that after bending,
the end flange bolt holes are at the correct position.
The following figure shows a pipe with two flanges welded at both ends. The start
flange is yellow and the end flange is blue. The start flange baseline is along the z-
axis. The end flange baseline has an angle with the z-axis.
317
1 Start flange baseline
2 End flange baseline
When you unbend a pipe, the remainder of the angle between the start flange
baseline and the end flange baseline divided by the angle between the flange holes is
the flange twist angle. Looking from the end flange to the start flange, when the
rotation is in the clockwise direction, the value of flange twist angle is negative.
When the rotation is in the counterclockwise direction, the value of flange twist angle
is positive. The details are shown in the following figure.
318
1 Looking from the end flange to the start flange
2 End flange baseline
3 Flange twist angle
4 Start flange baseline
The end flange is welded on to the pipe with the specified flange twist angle against
the start flange.
Specification-Driven Pipe Reporting
About Specification-Driven Pipe Reporting

Pro/PIPING allows you to create reports about the entire pipeline network and fitting
information. You can select a pipeline, fitting, or pipe segment from an active
assembly or subassembly for creating reports.
You can create the following types of reports using the Report Pipeline dialog box:
• Segment
• Pipeline Network
• Fitting
• Insulation
• Bills of Materials
319
• Bend Machine
• Bend Location
• File Interchange Format (FIF)
• Schematic Consistency Check
The report is displayed in the Report Pipeline dialog box or in a separate

Information Window. It is also saved in your working directory as a .dat text file by
default.
Note: If a fitting specification is the same as that of the pipeline specification, the
spec info for the fitting is not reported.
To Create Pipeline Reports

Use the following procedure to create a report about a pipe segment, fitting, or
insulation, or to generate a Bill of materials.
2. Click Type and select the type of report that you want to create.
o —Segment report
o —Pipeline Network report
o —Fitting report
o —Insulation report
o —Bill of Materials report
o —Bend Machine report
o —Bend Location report
o —Output FIF report
o —Schematic Consistency Check report
Each report type is provided in a standard format. Pro/PIPING allows you to

change only the format of the Pipeline Network report.
Note: You can indicate the number of decimal places in the Bend Location report,
the Bend Machine report and the Output FIF report by specifying a value for the
default_dec_places configuration option. The default value of this configuration
option is 2.
320
3. Under Select Report Format, select a different report format, if required. Click
to create or edit a report format.
Note: Select Report Format is available only if you select the report type as
Pipeline.
4. Click to select the segment, pipeline, or fitting from which you want to
retrieve information. You can select the segment, pipeline, or fitting from the
Model Tree, the Piping System Tree, or the graphics window.
5. Click Preview Info to display the results in a box in the same dialog box. Click
to view the results in a separate Information Window. You can save, edit,
or close the report displayed in the Information Window.
To Generate a Bend Location Table

1. Click Piping > Info. The Report Pipeline and the Select dialog boxes open.
2. Under Type, click .
3. Under Select pipe segment or pipe feature, click and select a pipe
segment or pipe feature from which you want to retrieve information.
4. Click OK in the Select dialog box. The bend location information table is
displayed in the Information Window. The table displays the bend number, the
XYZ coordinates, bend angle, and bend radius.
Pro/PIPING also displays the bend location information under Preview Info in
the Report Pipeline dialog box. You can either scroll to view the entire report or
click and view the report in a separate Information Window.
Note: You can regulate the number of decimal places displayed in the bend location
table by specifying the value for the default_dec_places configuration option. The
default value of this configuration option is 2.
To Generate a Bend Machine Table

1. Click Piping > Info. The Report Pipeline and the Select dialog boxes open.
2. Under Type, click .
3. Under Select pipe segment or pipe feature, click and select a pipe
segment or pipe feature from which you want to retrieve information.
4. Click OK in the Select dialog box. The bend machine information table is
displayed in the Information Window. The table displays the bend number, offset,
twist angle, bend angle, and bend radius.
321
Pro/PIPING also displays the bend location information under Preview Info in
the Report Pipeline dialog box. You can either scroll to view the entire report or
click and view the report in a separate Information Window.
Example: Bend Location Report

The pipe bend machine report is stored in your working directory as a text file named
bend_locs.dat.
Bend Location Information
=========================
Bend # X Y Z Bend Angle Bend

Radius
-------- ------------ ------------ ------------ -------------- ---------

--
1 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 0.00 0.00 1495.39 90.00 560.00
3 0.00 10100.00 1495.39 90.00 560.00
4 0.00 10100.00 3989.39 90.00 560.00
5 5718.30 10136.89 3989.39
Example: Bend Machine Report

The pipe bend machine report is stored in your working directory as a text file named
bend_machine.dat.
Bend Machine Information
========================
Bend # Offset Twist Angle Bend Angle Bend Radius
-------- -------------- -------------- -------------- --------------
1 935.39 90.00 560.00
2 8980.00 180.00 90.00 560.00
3 1374.00 90.37 90.00 560.00
4 5158.41
322
Reporting the Weight and COG Information for Pipe Segments

Pro/PIPING calculates the weight of a pipe segment based on the following:
• Density information specified in the piping specification database
• Outer diameter of the pipe segment
• Thickness of the pipe segment
• Length of the pipe segment
Pro/PIPING uses the value of the density that you specify in the MATL_DENSITY
column of the Piping Material file to calculate the weight of the pipe segment.
Pro/PIPING determines the center of gravity (COG) of the pipe segment based on the
geometric details of the segment. The x-, y-, and the z-coordinates for the center of
gravity are reported based on the start location of the pipeline.
The pipeline report, which is stored in your working directory as a text file named
pline_info.dat, reports the weight and COG information for the selected pipe
segment.
Example: Pipe Segment Report

The pipe segment report is stored in your working directory as a text file named
pline_info.dat.
Pipeline Information
======================
Assembly Name : PIPING_P1_CT1
Pipeline Label : 150A-MS-WATER-
Main Size : 150A
Main Size : ms
Pipe Segment Information
===========================
Pipe Size : 150A
Pipe Spec : ms
Stock Number : PIPEAB40PE-150
Material Code : AB
Model Unit : MM
Schedule : 40
Outer Diameter : 165.2000
Wall Thickness : 7.1000
Pipe Length : 317.4000
323
Weight : 0.0087 TONNE

COG : X = -2450.0000 Y = 1925.5401 Z = 326.4595
Pipe Layer : ha_layer
Pipe Color : yellow
Example: Fitting Report

The pipe fitting report is stored in your working directory as a text file named
pfitt_info.dat.
====================
Pipeline Information
====================
Pipeline Label : 500A-HA-AIR-CT-TNK
Pipe Size : 500A
Pipe Spec : ha
Model Unit : MM
====================
Fitting Information
====================
Assembly Name : AIR-CT-TNK-250A
Component Name : VL_GATE_FLFF-IRON-5K-250
Stock Number : GATEAA20FLRF-250
Material Desc : GATE VALVE, FLANGED RAISED FACE STEEL ASTM A105
MCCS : 322AA20250
Size : 250A
Weight : UNDEFINED
COG : UNDEFINED
Layer : ha_layer
Color : yellow
324
Example: Insulation Report

The Insulation report is stored in your working directory as a text file named
insulation_info.dat.
PIPELINE SPEC : ha
INSULATION CODE : EK
Pipe Insulation Information
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATL. SIZE PIPE OD LENGTH THICKNESS STOCKNO DESCRIPTION
CODE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MWCOVER 250A 267.40 20083.73 30.00 Mineral wool pipe cover:

Bare 110KG/M3 * 30.00 T * 250A
SWIRE Steel Wire A6
BOND Bond: D-9800HD

(Non-Flammable Type)
GCLOTH Glass Cloth With

AL-FOIL 0.12T Flange Insulation
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATL. SIZE QUANTITY THICKNESS STOCKNO DESCRIPTION
CODE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MWCOVER 250A 10 30.00 FLANGE_SLIP_FF-STEEL-5K-250 Mineral

wool pipe cover
Bare 110KG/M3 *
MATL_THKT
* SIZE
GCLOTH Glass Cloth

With AL-FOIL
0.12T
GYARN Glass Yarn D8
SHOOK SS400 Steel

Hook 1.0T
325
Example: Bill of Materials

The bill of materials is stored in your working directory as a text file named
pline_bom_info.dat.
ASM NAME QTY LINE NAME /SEGMENT LINE STOCK LENGTH PART NAME
---------- --- ------------ --------------- ---------- ----------- ---------
ASSY_PLANT 1 STEAM-1-150A/STEAM-1-150A001 MS_150A_40 3524.746 ---
STEAM-1-150A/STEAM-1-150A002 MS_150A_40 6823.458 ---
STEAM-3 1 STEAM-3-100A/STEAM-3-100A001 MS_100A_40 6563.020 ---
STEAM-4 1 STEAM-4-100A/STEAM-4-100A001 MS_100A_40 8577.138 ---
STEAM-5 1 STEAM-5-100A/STEAM-5-100A001 MS_100A_40 9580.089 100A-MS-

STEAM-5001
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Assembly ASSY_PLANT contains:
1 Part CARGO_TABLE
1 Part PURGE_TABLE
1 Part EVAPORATOR_TABLE
1 Part CARGO_CONDENSER
326
1 Part PURGE_CONDENSER
1 Sub-Assembly ASSY_EVAPORATOR
1 Sub-Assembly STEAM-3
3 Part TEE_RED_BW-STEEL-150X100
1 Part NIPPLE_BW-100A
1 Part RED_CON_BW-STEEL-100X65
1 Part VL_GATE_FLRF-STEEL-20K-65
2 Part GASKET_SLIP-STEEL-20K-65
2 Part FLANGE_SLIP_RF-STEEL-20K-65
1 Part RED_ECC_BW-STEEL-65X50
1 Part VL_S_CHK_FLRF-STEEL-20K-50
4 Bulk item 33AA30065
Sub-Assembly ASSY_EVAPORATOR contains:
1 Part EVAPORATOR
2 Part NOZZLE
Sub-Assembly STEAM-3 contains:
1 Part TEE_STR_BW-STEEL-100X100
327
1 Part 100A-MS-STEAM-5001
Summary of parts for assembly ASSY_PLANT:
1 Part CARGO_TABLE
1 Part PURGE_TABLE
1 Part EVAPORATOR_TABLE
1 Part CARGO_CONDENSER
1 Part PURGE_CONDENSER
1 Part EVAPORATOR
2 Part NOZZLE
1 Part 100A-MS-STEAM-5001
1 Part NIPPLE_BW-100A
1 Part RED_CON_BW-STEEL-100X65
1 Part VL_GATE_FLRF-STEEL-20K-65
1 Part RED_ECC_BW-STEEL-65X50
328
Pipeline Network Report
About the Pipeline Network Report

The Pipeline Network report provides the following information:
• The labels of the pipeline or equipment connected to the selected pipeline as
FROM and TO
• All branch pipelines routed from the main pipeline
• All pipe segments and fittings included in the entire pipeline
Additionally, the Pipeline Network report provides information about design rule
violations and missing corner fittings and flanges.
Pro/PIPING provides a predefined format for the Pipeline Network report. You can
change the format of a Pipeline Network report using the Report Pipeline dialog
box. You can then use these customized formats to create subsequent Pipeline
Network reports.
The report provides information in the following sequence:
• Information about the pipeline network. The information includes:
o The label of the pipeline
o The labels of the equipment between which the pipeline is connected to as

FROM and TO
o The size of the pipeline and its specification
• Information about the main pipeline and all branch extensions is provided in a
tabular format. The standard report consists of six columns for size, specification,
name, length or angle, material code, and description. The number of rows is
based on the number of elements fabricated on a pipeline.
Note: In the report, the information related to each pipeline is separated by a

continuous dotted line.
• Name of the co-ordinate system is reported under FROM and TO. If this
coordinate system is a part of an equipment, you can report the coordinate
system name in the Equipment-Csys format by assigning an appropriate name to
the component in the Feat Name column of the Model Tree or by designating the
equipment if you have created the pipeline using an XML file.
329
Example: Pipeline Network Report -1

===================
Network Information
===================
LABEL FROM TO SIZE SPEC
100A-MS-STEAM-007 100A-MS-STEAM-008 PURGE_CONDESER-P3 100A ms
SIZE SPEC NAME LENGTH MATL. STOCKNO
ANGLE CODE
MAIN 1 100A-MS-STEAM-008 PURGE_CONDESER-P3
================================================================================
100A ms PIPE 145.2 AB PIPEAB40PE-100
100AX100A DRAIN_A DRAIN_A-100
APNT0 100AX100A ms BRAN AA BRANAA40BW-100
100A ms NIPPLE AA NIPPLEAA5BW-100
===>> Ends Incompatible : Type BW Rate 5 and Type SO Rate 20 ...
100A ms SLIPFLANGE AA SLIPFLANGEAA20FLRF-100
100A ms GASKET AG GASKETAG20GKFF-100
100A ms GATE AA GATEAA20FLRF-100
100A ms GASKET AG GASKETAG20GKFF-100
100A ms SLIPFLANGE AA SLIPFLANGEAA20FLRF-100
===>> Ends Incompatible : Type SO Rate 20 and Type BW Rate 5 ...
100A ms NIPPLE AA NIPPLEAA5BW-100
====================
Material Information
====================
QTY SIZE STOCKNO MCCS DESCRIPTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
290.4 100A PIPEAB40PE-100 WT=6mm PIPE, PE SEAMLESS
TO API 5L GRADE B
330
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 100AX100A BRANAA40BW-100 TEE, BUTT-WELD STRAIGHT
STEEL ASTM A234 GRADE WP
B MATCH PIPE
2 100A NIPPLEAA5BW-100 NIPPLE, BUTT-WELD STEEL
ASTM A105
2 100A SLIPFLANGEAA20FLR FLANGE, SLIP-ON STEEL AS
F-100 TM A105
2 100A GASKETAG20GKFF-10 GASKET, 1.5MM FLAT RING
0 CAF GRAPHITED BOTH SIDES
1 100A GATEAA20FLRF-100 GATE VALVE, FLANGED RAIS
ED FACE STEEL ASTM A105
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 CFD 33AA30100 BOLT NUT ASTM CS 111
Errors in the Pipeline Network Report

In addition to information about the pipeline connections and the existing pipe
objects, the Pipeline Network report also displays the following types of warning
messages:
• Missing gaskets and flanges for fittings in the upstream or downstream direction
• Missing corner fittings in the case of a pipe vertex modeled as a corner fitting
• Mismatch in end types for a fitting in the upstream or downstream direction
• Violations in the design rule about the minimum clamp length at the start or end
of a pipe piece
• Violations in the design rule about the minimum or maximum pipe segment
length
• Mismatch in any of the pipeline label formats
331
A piping model with two pipelines is shown in the next figure:
• The 50A-MS-STEAM-1111-ES (magenta) pipeline is modeled under assembly

ASM0001.ASM.
• The 40A-RW-WATER-2222-EN (green) pipeline is modeled under the WATER-

2222.ASM assembly, that is, a sub-assembly of ASM0001.ASM.
The corner fitting for the 40A-RW-WATER-2222-EN (green) pipeline is missing at

the first branch. The valve does not have gaskets and flanges for fittings in the
upstream and downstream direction.
These errors are reported as shown:

===================
Network Information
===================
50A-RW-WATER-2222-EN 50A-MS-STEAM-11111-ES UNDEFINED 50A ms
SIZE SPEC NAME LENGTH MATL. STOCKNO
ANGLE CODE
MAIN 1 50A-MS-STEAM-11111-ES UNDEFINED
===================================================================================
332
===>> Missing ELBOW
50A ms GATE AA GATEAA20FLRF-100
===>> Missing upstream Flange/Gasket...
===>> Missing downstream Flange/Gasket...
50A ms ELBOW90LR 90.000 AA ELBOW90LRAABW-50
====================
====================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2882.010 50A PIPEAB40PE-50 WT=3.9mm PIPE, PE SEAMLESS
TO API 5L GRADE B
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 50A ELBOW90LRAABW-50 90 LR ELBOW, BUTT-WELD SCH
40 STEEL A23
1 50A GATEAA20FLRF-50 GATE VALVE, FLANGED RAISED
FACE STEEL ASTM A105
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To Change the Pipeline Network Report Format

2. Click , or under Type select Pipeline to create a pipeline network report.
3. Under Select Report Format, click to change the default format of the
report. The Report Format dialog box opens.
a. Under Name, type a name for the new report format or select an existing
format name from the list.
333
b. Under Parameters, select the parameters that you want to display in the
new report. All the available parameters are displayed in the Parameters
box. You can also specify the order of the columns to be displayed in the
report from the left to the right and the width of each column.
Under Columns, all parameters selected from the Parameters list are
displayed under the Name, Width, and Parameter columns.
Note:
Use to move a selected field from the Parameters box into the
Columns box. Use to move a selected field from the Columns box
back to the Parameters box.
Use to shift the selected field in the Columns box in the upward
direction. Similarly, use to shift the selected field in the downward
direction. The fields are displayed from the left to the right in the report
based on the specified order.
c. To include a tally for a pipe, fitting, and bolt and nut at the end of the
pipeline network report, under Tally, select:
Pipe to add a pipe tally.
Fitting to add a fitting tally.
Bolt & Nut to add a bolt and nut tally.
d. Click to save the format.

By default, the format is saved in the pipe_info_fmt.ptd file in your working
directory. You can use this format to create the subsequent pipeline network
reports.
Example: Pipeline Network Report with Changed Format

===================
Network Information
===================
STEAM-4-100A STEAM-3-100A STEAM-5-100A 100A ms
CONDENSER-P3 CONDENSER-P2
NAME SPECIFICATION SIZE BoltNutCode BoltNutQty
MAIN 1 STEAM-3-100A CONDENSER-P2
====================================================================
334
PIPE ms 100A
BRAN ms 100AX100A
PIPE ms 100A
SLIPFLANGE ms 100A CFB 16
GASKET ms 100A
CHECK ms 100A CFE 4
GASKET ms 100A
PIPE ms 100A
BRAN ms 100AX100A
*PIPE ms 100A
BRAN ms 100AX80A
*PIPE ms 100A
BRANCH 1.1 APNT1 APNT3
--------------------------------------------------------------------
*PIPE ms 100A
GASKET ms 100A
GATE ms 100A CFD 4
GASKET ms 100A
*PIPE ms 100A
BRAN ms 100AX100A
BRANCH 1.2 APNT2 APNT3
----------------------------------------------------------------------
PIPE ms 100A
BRANCH 1.3 CONDENSER-P3 APNT0
----------------------------------------------------------------------
PIPE ms 80A
BRANCH 1.4 APNT3 STEAM-5-100A
----------------------------------------------------------------------
335
====================
====================
----------------------------------------------------------------------
51772.004 100A PIPEAB40PE-100 WT=6.00 mm

PIPE,PE SEAMLESS TO
API 5L GRADE B
1139.600 80A PIPEAB40PE-080 WT=5.5mm PIPE, PE

SEAMLESS TO API 5L
GRADE B
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 100AX100A BRANAA40BW-100 TEE, BUTT-WELD

STRAIGHT STEEL ASTM
A234 GRADE WP B MATCH
PIPE
4 100A SLIPFLANGEAA20FLR FLANGE, SLIP-ON

STEEL
AS
F-100 TM A105
4 100A GASKETAG20GKFF-10 GASKET, 1.5MM FLAT

RING
0 CAF GRAPHITED BOTH

SIDES
1 100A CHECKAA20FLRF-100 CHECK VALVE, FLANGED

RAISED FACE SWING
STEEL AST M A105
1 100AX80A BRANAA40BW-100X08 TEE, BUTT-WELD

REDUCING
0 STEEL ASTM A234

GRADE
WP B MATCH PIPE
1 100A GATEAA20FLRF-100 GATE VALVE, FLANGED

RAISED FACE STEEL
ASTM A105
1 100AX100A
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
4 CFE 33AA20100 BOLT NUT ASTM CS 114
336
Assigning and Reporting Bolt Nut Information

The bolt nut code information is assigned and reported in the Pipeline Network report
as follows:
1. A bolt nut code for valves and flanges is defined under the Bolt_Nut_Code column
in the auto-selection file, for example, ms_asfile.ptd file. The same code is
displayed by default and applied to fittings during insertion.
2. The quantity-related information, MCCS code of the bolt nut, and the path to the
MCAT_FILE corresponding to each bolt nut code is available in the
piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd file.
3. The boltnut/bolt_nut_mcat.ptd, that is the MCAT_FILE, contains details of the

bolt nut material and the bulk item name for each MCCS code of the bolt nut
specified in the piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd file.
Thus, for a selected bolt nut code, the MCCS code, the material description, and
quantity for each bolt nut are displayed in the Bolt Nut summary section in a user-
defined pipeline report.
Reporting the Bolt Nut Quantity for Fittings

The Bolt Nut Selection file, piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd, specifies the total
number of bolts and nuts required for the main fitting and for the flanges mated to
the main fitting. The bolt nut quantity is reported in the Pipeline Network report
under Bolt Nut Summary.
• For fittings with two mated flanges, the bolt nut codes assigned to the main
fitting and the two flanges may be different. The bolt nut quantity reported in this
case depends on the bolt nut code assigned to the main fitting only.
A typical valve fitting with mated flanges is shown in the next figure.
1 Flange fitting - 1
2 Main fitting
337
• For two mated flanges, the total bolt nut quantity reported is the sum of half the
quantity from both the flanges.
o For mated flanges, the quantity of bolt nuts required for one flange is six
and for other flange is eight. The bolt nut quantity reported in this case is
seven.
A typical pair of mated flanges is shown in the next figure.
• For group fittings, the bolt nut quantity reported is based on the following rules:
o For the two main fittings, located at the two ends of the group, the quantity
specified in the Bolt Nut Master catalog file (bolt_nut_mcat.ptd) is
multiplied by a factor of 0.75.
o For the main fittings, located not at the ends of the group, the quantity
specified in the Bolt Nut Master catalog file (bolt_nut_mcat.ptd) is
multiplied by a factor of 0.50.
o The end flanges of the group fitting are not counted as main fittings, have
higher priority, and include their bolt nut quantity.
338
A group fitting with three main fittings (globe valves) and two flanges at the ends
of the group is shown in the next figure.
1 Flange fitting -1
2 Main fitting - 1
3 Main fitting - 2
4 Main fitting - 3
The bolt nut code is assigned as shown in the following table.
Fitting Bolt_Nut_Code Quantity Reported

Quantity
Main Fitting 1 CFA 16 0.75 X 16 = 12

(End1 of group)
Main Fitting 2 CFA 16 0.50 X 16 = 8

(Middle of
group)
Main Fitting 3 CFB 12 0.75 x 12 = 8

(End2 of group)
Flange Fitting 1 CFF 8 0

(End1)
Flange Fitting 2 CFF 6 0

(End2)
339
In the Bolt Nut Summary report, the quantities reported are:

1. CFA Quantity - 20
2. CFB Quantity - 8
Note: Bolt nut codes with zero quantity are not reported in the bolt nut summary.
Schematic Consistency Check Report
About Schematic Consistency Check Report

The Schematic Consistency Check report provides information about the correctness
of a 3D pipe model against the 2D schematic information stored in an XML file. You
can generate reports for all typical pipeline configurations in a complex piping
design.
The report is generated by comparing the schematic information and the model
information of a pipeline. You can check the schematic consistency of a model using
one of the following methods:
• By selecting an XML file: Pro/PIPING uses the 2D Schematic Diagram data stored
in the XML file as a reference.
• By selecting a pipeline from a 3D model: Pro/PIPING uses the 3D model as a

reference.
Note: You can use the schematic information in the XML file only if:
• The piping_schematic_driven configuration option is set to yes.
• The piping design mode is specification-driven.
To specify an absolute path to be used as the start location for the XML file selection
and look-up, set the piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option to the
required path. The default path for the XML file is the Pro/ENGINEER working
directory.
To generate an accurate report, you must designate all the equipments.
To Create a Schematic Consistency Check Report

2. Click , or under Type select Schematic Check, to check pipelines for

schematic consistency. The Schematic Consistency Check dialog box opens.
3. Under Pipeline Selection Option, do one of the following:
o Select a pipeline or pipelines directly from the graphic screen, model tree,
or from the piping system tree. In this case, the 3D model is considered as
a reference for checking the consistency of the 2D Schematic Diagram.
The box under the Select pipeline(s) option lists all the selected pipelines.
340
Note: If you select a pipeline that is not associated with an XML file,
Pro/PIPING rejects the selection with a warning.
or
o Select From XML File to choose schematic pipelines present in the XML file
where the data in the XML file is based on the 2D Schematic Diagram. In
this case, the information in the XML file is considered as a reference for
checking the consistency of the 3D piping model.
Click to select an XML file from your current working directory.
Note: Use the piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option to change

the default directory path for selecting the XML file.
The box under the Schematic Pipelines option lists the pipelines that are
present in the specified XML file as well as in the model.
o Click to select all pipelines displayed in the box or use the mouse to
select only the desired pipelines.
o Click to clear all selected pipelines in the box.
4. Under Actions, do one of the following:
Click to generate the Consistency Check Report for the selected pipelines in a
separate window, and close the Schematic Consistency Check dialog box.
or
Click to generate the Consistency Check Report for the selected pipelines in a
separate window, and then continue checking the schematic consistency for other
pipelines using the Schematic Consistency Check dialog box.
or
Click to cancel the operation and close the dialog box.
Schematic Consistency Check Report Format

The Schematic Consistency Check report is generated by comparing the schematic
information and the model information of a pipeline.
The report consists of four columns; Item, Schematic Info, Status, and Model Info.
The report provides information in the following sequence:
• General information about the pipeline such as Mnemonic, Number, Size, and
Spec.
In the report, each pipeline is separated by a continuous dotted line while within
a pipeline report, each extension is separated by a blank line.
341
• The information related to the main extension followed by each branch extension.
The branch extensions are identified using the string, BRxx DETAILS, where xx is
the extension number.
• Within each extension, the connected series and their constituent components
are reported using the flow direction and the sequence in which they appear on
the pipeline.
• Each element is reported in a row. The schematic and model information are
reported under the respective Schematic Info and Model Info columns. The
Status column is used to indicate the result of the consistency check.
• The following is the legend for the Status column:
Legend Description
Blank space ( Item is identical between

) schematic and model
'x' character Item is mismatched between

schematic and model
'+' character Additional item in the model
'-' character Item is missing from the model
• If a series in the schematic information does not match a corresponding series in

the model, the series is listed separately under a section, Series in Schematic
Pipeline not matched in Model. The series is reported for every pipeline that
is processed.
Workflow for Checking Schematic Consistency

The following figure shows a schematic diagram that was created using Routed
Systems Designer. In the figure, B1 and B2 are pipeline branches and T1, T2, and T3
are equipments.
342
1 WATER-1
2 GATE
• After creating the schematic diagram, use Routed Systems Designer to export
the schematic information to an XML file.
• Use Pro/PIPING to create an equivalent 3D piping model from the schematic

diagram. The 3D piping model is shown in the following figure where T1, T2, and
T3 are equipments.
1 100A - RW - WATER - 1
2 GATE
3 ELBOW
343
• Use Pro/PIPING (click PIPING > Info) to perform a consistency check on a 3D

model against the schematic information in an XML file, that is generated using
Routed Systems Designer. The generated Schematic Consistency Check report is
as shown:
========================================================================
========
ITEM SCHEMATIC INFO STATUS MODEL INFO
========================================================================
========
PIPELINE WATER-1 WATER-100A-RW-
1
MNEMONIC WATER WATER
NUMBER 1 1
SIZE 100A 100A
SPEC RW RW
FROM T1-N6 T1-N6
FITTING GATE GATE
BRANCH BRANCH_2 X APNT2 (STUB-
IN)
BRANCH BRANCH_1 X APNT0 (STUB-
IN)
TO UNDEFINED UNDEFINED
BR1 DETAILS
FROM BRANCH_2 X APNT2 (STUB-
IN)
FITTING GATE -
TO T2-N5 T2-N5
BR2 DETAILS
FROM BRANCH_1 X APNT0 (STUB-
IN)
FITTING GATE GATE
TO T3-N5 T3-N5
BR3 DETAILS
FROM + T3-N6
FITTING + GATE
TO + UNDEFINED
Series in Schematic Pipeline not matched in Model
344
FROM T3-N1
SEGMENT PIPE
FITTING GATE
SEGMENT PIPE
TO UNDEFINED
Note:
1) The mismatch reported for the junctions, (BRANCH_2 .vs. APNT2 and
BRANCH_1 .vs. APNT0), only indicates that the tags at these junctions
are mismatched. Whereas the checking algorithm is designed to identify
these as matched junctions for overall consistency check.
2) A gate valve is missing on branch pipeline at APNT2 to T2-N5 and the
same is reported.
3) Extension BR3 DETAILS is additional in the model, as Nozzle N1 of T3
on the schematic is incorrectly modeled as N6 of T3 in the model.
4) It is due the same reason, the report outputs the schematic series,
T3-N1 to UNDEFINED, as an unmatched series.
5) Mismatch reported at item (3) and (4) above can be resolved by
correcting the nozzle identification of T3-N6 to T3-N1.
Glossary
Glossary of Terms
Term Definition
Convert from Non Assignment of Specification-Driven mode

Specification-Driven parameters (such as Specification, Size, and
Mode to Specification- Schedule) to a pipeline created in Non
Driven Mode Specification-Driven mode.
Field Weld Welding operation performed at the actual location

inside a Ship or Plant. Piece spool pieces fabricated
in the shop yard will be assembled inside a Ship or
Plant by welding the pipe ends assigned as field
welds.
Flow Direction Symbol An arrow-like temporary symbol that represents the

fluid flow direction in a pipeline.
Specification-Driven Piping design as practiced by designers in the Plant

Piping (Specification design, Shipbuilding, and Aerospace design
Driven Method) industries. This method of piping design is driven
by a set of piping specifications and design rules.
The Non Specification-Driven Pro/PIPING product
does not support this method of piping design.
345
Specification-Driven piping is being implemented as

part of this project.
Linestock A Pro/PIPING parameter that is automatically

created for each combination of specification, size,
and schedule. The created parameter is associated
with the corresponding pipe segment features.
Mnemonic System or fluid where the specification will be

applied.
Non Specification- Piping design as practiced by the Non Specification-

Driven Piping Driven product design industry. This method of
(Linestock Method) Piping allows maximum flexibility and is based on
the pipeline Linestock which is user definable at run
time. The existing Non Specification-Driven
Pro/PIPING product supports this method of piping
design.
P & ID Piping and Instrumentation diagram in 2-D that

details the pipeline connectivity, placement of
fittings and flanges.
Pipeline Elements or Pipeline segments, pipe bends, and pipe fittings are
Pipe Elements collectively referred to as the Pipeline or individual
Pipe Elements.
Pipe Fitting Physical components, such as valves, flanges,

gaskets, elbows, reducers, and so on, that are used
to construct a pipeline.
Pipe Piece or Pipe A manufacturable piece of pipeline, consisting of

Spool pipe segments and fittings, apportioned from a
complex pipeline configuration.
Pipe Piece Cutting or A modeling functionality applied during the final

Piece Cutting stages of Piping Design to split a complex pipeline
into
Pipeline Start A terminal location on a pipeline where fluid enters

into the pipeline from equipment or another
pipeline.
Pipeline End A terminal location on a pipeline where fluid leaves

the pipeline and flows into equipment, such as
another pipeline, drain, or vent.
Pipeline Junction A branch location on a pipeline where there may be

an inline branch fitting (equal or reducing size),
stub-in branch fitting (half coupling or weldolets),
or pipe stub-in.
346
Pipeline Series A pipeline portion consisting of pipeline elements

between a Pipeline Start and Junction, or Junction
and Junction, or Junction and End, of a pipeline.
Flow direction applies to entire pipeline series and
accordingly, an entire pipeline series is associated
with only one flow direction.
Pipeline A collection of many connected series and junctions

that represent a single pipeline, such as all the pipe
segments and fittings that are associated with a
single pipeline feature.
Pipeline Extension A set of series that are connected together and

have the same flow direction.
Pipe Piece A pipe piece is a set of pipe segments between

corners, free ends, or between a corner and a free
end.
Piping Specification Defines the pipes and fittings that can be used for
specified fluid operating conditions, such as fluid
pressure and temperature, in a particular project;
used to implement specification driven pipe
modeling in the Specification-Driven version of the
Pro/PIPING product.
Routed Systems Schematic diagram package offered by PTC.

Designer
Schematic Piping and Instrumentation diagram in 2-D that

details the pipeline connectivity, placement of
fittings and flanges.
Selection Name User specified unique name that will be used in the
fitting auto-selection process to select a fitting in
the piping specification.
Shop Weld Welding operation performed at the shop yard of a

pipe fabrication yard.
Trimmed Elbow Standard angle elbow trimmed to certain degree to

fit in a vertex/corner with non-standard angle.
XML Extensible Markup Language (XML). A format for

structured documents and data.
347
Index
B cut pipe
bend data block ...................................... 237
bending angle ......................... 313 pipe reference cutting ............... 225
bending point .......................... 307 plane reference cutting ............. 224
bending radius ........................ 313 single location cutting using fitting

port reference ....................... 226
flange angle ............................ 315
single location cutting using
flange twist angle .................... 317
placement ............................ 223
node number........................... 306
cut pipe ..................................... 223
overview................................. 306 D
pipe cutting length ................... 312
design rules
bend data .................................. 306
checking ................................. 129
bend table
parameters.............................. 127
assigning ................................ 143
violations .........................131, 132
data ....................................... 141
design rules................................ 129
defining .................................. 138
drawing ..................................... 263
deleting .................................. 140 E
modifying ............................... 140
equipment Nozzles
reading to a model................... 140
routing from ............................ 174
showing.................................. 140
routing from port...................... 174
writing to a file ........................ 141
routing to port ......................... 175
bend table ................................. 137
equipment Nozzles ...................... 174
C
F
configuration options
fabrication
setting ..................................... 11
cutting pipes..... 223, 225, 226, 230,
configuration options..................... 10 231, 237
convert .............................. 145, 148 deleting pipe piece cuts ............. 242
corner type fabrication.................................. 222
changing and updating ............. 119 fitting
modifying ........................ 216, 218 branch .................................... 200
corner type ................................ 215 checking end type compatibility.. 209
349
deleting .................................. 210 annotating............................... 292
inserting .......................... 195, 204 installation drawing ..................... 286
key ........................................ 208 insulation quilt ............................... 9
modifying ............................... 209 ISOGEN
overlap checking...................... 215 data control files ...................... 302
redefining ............................... 213 generating............................... 264
replacing ................................ 213 ISOGEN ..................................... 263
schematic ........................ 262, 263 L
fitting............................................ 1 layer
fitting geometry ........................... 88 overview ................................. 159
fitting library file viewing ................................... 159
overview................................... 85 layer ......................................... 159
fitting library file........................... 85 P
fitting parameter .......................... 99 parallel pipe piece cutting......231, 232
fitting port pipe insulation
creating.................................... 90 assigning..........................246, 249
requirements............................. 93 deleting .................................. 248
fitting port ................................... 89 modifying ................................ 247
flexible routing .................... 166, 167 redefining................................ 251
flow direction reporting ................................. 249
displaying and hiding................ 190 pipe insulation ............................ 246
flow units................................ 190 pipe segment
reversing ................................ 219 modifying ................................ 216
rules ...................................... 187 reporting weight and COG

information ........................... 323
violations ......................... 191, 220
suppressing and resuming ......... 192
flow direction ............................. 186
pipe segment.............................. 149
I
pipe solid
inlet port
creating .............................. 9, 254
specifying ................................. 97
erasing ................................... 254
inlet port ..................................... 97
pipe solid ................................... 253
installation drawing
350
Index
pipe spool.................................. 243 displaying from active assembly .... 8
pipe spool drawing...................... 300 piping system tree ......................... 4
pipeline R
associating an xml file .............. 258 report
creating.................................. 149 creating .................................. 320
deleting .................................. 151 pipeline network................329, 333
highlighting using piping system tree schematic consistency check ..... 340,
.............................................. 7 341
merging.................................. 152 report ........................................ 319
renaming ................................ 152 routing
reorganizing using piping system branch .................................... 176

tree......................................... 7
extend ....... 167, 168, 169, 171, 172
resuming ................................ 159
follow ..................................... 175
routing using schematic information
inserting a datum point ......180, 181
.......................................... 261
referencing a pipe edge............. 162
suppressing ............................ 158
route pipe menu....................... 160
pipeline ..................................... 149
setting a start point ... 160, 161, 176
piping assembly
routing ...................................... 159
activating ............................... 145
S
converting ................ 145, 146, 148
schematic-driven pipelines
inserting and modifying in another
assembly ...................... 181, 182 designating.............................. 260
piping assembly ......................... 144 routing.................................... 261
piping specification database schematic-driven pipelines ........... 257
auto-selection files ..................... 60 specification break
master catalog files .................... 24 inserting ................................. 157
project data files........................ 56 specification break ...................... 157
specification directory files .......... 57 specification override
piping specification database.......... 23 fitting insertion ........................ 195
piping system tree fitting replacement ................... 213
accessing.................................... 5 specification override ................... 195
customizing .............................. 10 specification-driven piping
351
accessing.................................... 2 spool ......................................... 243
configuring...........................10, 11 spool label
overview..................................... 3 creating .................................. 243
specification-driven piping ............... 1 deleting .................................. 245
spool modifying ................................ 244
displaying ............................... 246 spool label.................................. 243
simplified representation........... 245 standards................................... 106
352

Pro Piping Help Topics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pro Piping Help Topics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

®

Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire™ 2.0

Parametric Technology Corporation

Using Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) ......................................................... 1

About Pro/PIPING and Piping Systems ......................................................... 1

Tailoring the Pro/PIPING Working Environment........................................... 1

About Pro/PIPING Design Modes ................................................................. 2

To Access the Specification-Driven Design Mode............................................ 2

About the Pro/PIPING User Interface (Spec-Driven) ....................................... 3

PIPING Menu (Spec-Driven) ....................................................................... 3

Piping System Tree ................................................................................... 4

About the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven).............................................. 4

Viewing the Piping System Tree............................................................. 5

Pipeline Selection and Display Features .................................................. 5

Customize the Pro/PIPING Piping System Tree......................................... 5

To Access the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven) ........................................ 5

To Select Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ............................................................. 6

To Display or Blank Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ............................................... 6

To Display Centerlines or Solids (Spec-Driven) ........................................... 6

To Highlight Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ......................................................... 7

To Reorganize Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ...................................................... 7

To Modify the Column Display (Spec-Driven).............................................. 7

To Display the Pipeline Component View.................................................... 8

To Display the Piping Spool View .............................................................. 8

To Display or Hide Pipeline Labels............................................................. 8

To Create or Delete Pipe Solids from the Piping System Tree........................ 9

To Display or Hide Pipe Solids .................................................................. 9

To Create or Delete Pipe Insulation Quilts .................................................. 9

To Display or Hide Pipe Insulation Quilts.................................................... 9

About Customizing the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven)...........................10

Configuring Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) ................................................10

About Configuring Pro/PIPING (Spec-Driven) ...............................................10

ISOGEN Configuration Options ................................................................10

To Set Pro/PIPING Configuration Options (Spec-Driven) ................................11

Specifying Thumb Wheel Increments ..........................................................11

isogen_attribute_map_file (Spec-Driven) ....................................................12

isogen_endtype_map_file (Spec-Driven) .....................................................12

isogen_mandatory_attr_file (Spec-Driven) ..................................................12

isogen_nominal_size_map_file (Spec-Driven) ..............................................13

isogen_output_files_dir (Spec-Driven) ........................................................13

isogen_pcf_filename_format (Spec-Driven) .................................................13

isogen_symbol_map_file (Spec-Driven) ......................................................13

pipe_3D_bend_theor_int_pts (Spec-Driven) ................................................13

pipe_extend_dim_scheme (Spec-Driven) ....................................................14

pipe_solid_centerline (Spec-Driven) ...........................................................14

pipeline_assembly_library_dir (Spec-Driven) ...............................................15

pipeline_assembly_name_format (Spec-Driven) ...........................................15

pipeline_solid_start_part_name (Spec-Driven) .............................................16

piping_wildfire_convert (Spec-Driven) ........................................................17

piping_appearance_map_file (Spec-Driven) .................................................17

piping_bolt_nut_select_file (Spec-Driven) ...................................................17

piping_design_method (Spec-Driven) .........................................................17

piping_end_compatibility_file (Spec-Driven) ................................................18

piping_fitt_angle_tolerance (Spec-Driven) ...................................................18

piping_fitt_category_map_file (Spec-Driven) ...............................................18

piping_insulation_dir_file (Spec-Driven) ......................................................18

piping_joint_fitting_offset (Spec-Driven) .....................................................19

piping_manufacture_dir_file (Spec-Driven) ..................................................19

piping_material_file (Spec-Driven) .............................................................19

piping_mcat_dir (Spec-Driven) ..................................................................19

piping_mcat_dir_file (Spec-Driven) ............................................................20

piping_min_bolting_clearance (Spec-Driven) ...............................................20

piping_schematic_xml_dir (Spec-Driven) ....................................................20